PRINCETON, N. J. 
 
 Purchased by the Hammill Missionary Fund. 
 
 O 
 
 PS 1514 . D7 C5x 
 
 Davi s , John A . , d . 1 897 . 
 
 Choh Lin 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2017 with funding from 
 Princeton Theological Seminary Library 
 
 https://archive.org/details/chohlinchineseboOOdavi_O 
 
1 ■ 
 
Amoy. Page 143. 
 
CHOH LIN, 
 
 ®j)t Cljincse Son tojjo Attaint a |]readjtr. 
 
 BY THE 
 
 Rev. J. A. DAVIS, 
 
 Author of the “Chinese Slave-Girl,” “Tom Bard,” etc. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA : 
 
 PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF PUBLICATION 
 AND SABBATH-SCHOOL WORK, 
 
 No. 1334 CHESTNUT STREET. 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1884, BY 
 
 THE TRUSTEES OF THE 
 
 PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF PUBLICATION. 
 
 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. 
 
 Westcott k Thomson, 
 Stercotypers and Electrotypers, Philada. 
 
fit HIS JfeoOK 
 
 "V- V 
 
 |s ^espettfuUg glebicattb, bitljout %ir Jhofaltbge, 
 
 TO THE 
 
 Rev. Drs. TALMAGE, RAPALJE and KIP, 
 
 OF THE AMOY MISSION — 
 
 MEN OF WHOM THE REFORMED CHURCH MAY JUSTLY BE PROUD. 
 
 Their judicious, quiet, persistent, yet modest efforts for the temporal 
 as well as spiritual good of those around them will, by the 
 grace of God, live and grow to bless those in and around 
 Amoy as long as the Chinese remain a people. 
 
 * 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 This is a true story of a real Chinese boy who 
 became a preacher. Choh Lin is, and has been, 
 a preacher of the gospel for more than twenty 
 years, and for most of that time connected with the 
 Amoy mission of the Reformed (Dutch) Church 
 in America. 
 
 When the writer was living in Amoy he took 
 down from Choh Lin’s own lips the most of the 
 facts here given, and since his return to America 
 has written up the notes thus gathered, adding facts 
 that came to him through other sources. So it is 
 a true story. The real name of Choh Lin, for 
 satisfactory reasons is not given. 
 
 Parts of the first chapters of this story were 
 
 written for and published in The Sower, and at 
 
 5 
 
6 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 the request of not a few readers it is completed 
 and sent out in this form, with the hope and prayer 
 of the writer that it may lead many of our young 
 people to think of and to pray and work more 
 heartily for, missions in China. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Chinese Baby 11 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The Child of the Gods 16 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 A Little Boy Lost 22 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 Learning to Worship Idols 30 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 The Sick Father 37 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 The Father’s Death 46 
 
 7 
 
8 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Funeral 53 
 
 CHAPTER VHI. 
 
 Cruel Relatives 60 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Seeetng a Life-giving God 72 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 Poverty 81 
 
 CHAPTER XI. 
 
 The Famine 92 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 The Dogs 100 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 Boys’ Troubles 110 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 Choh Lin at School 123 
 
 CHAPTER XV. 
 
 Stoning the Devil 133 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 9 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Rebellion at Amoy 143 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 Mbs. Lee Finds the Life-giving God 155 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 Pebsectjtion 169 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 In Amoy 185 
 
 CHAPTER XX. 
 
 In the Mission-School 195 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 Trying to be a Christian 210 
 
 CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 Business Offers 220 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 A New Relative 233 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 Becoming a Preacher 244 
 
10 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Chi Lap and the Grandmother become Christians 256 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 Choh Lin Married and a Preacher 268 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 The Gospel at Tay Soa 281 
 
 CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 Settled at Ang Tung Thau 294 
 
 CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 Trials of a Pastor 307 
 
Choh Lin. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE CHINESE BABY. 
 
 BOUT forty years ago there lived in China, in 
 
 -LI- a little village standing on a bay of the ocean, 
 a Chinaman named Sol Law Lee. The village in 
 which Mr. Lee lived was at the foot of a mountain, 
 and so was named Tay Soa, or “Foot Mountain.” 
 He was the richest man in the place and had the 
 finest house there, yet if you had seen it you would 
 have thought that it was only a number of out- 
 houses for cattle, connected by two walls. 
 
 One day there was born in this house a boy-baby. 
 Mr. and Mrs. Lee were very proud of their little 
 son, and when the father met friends on the street 
 or at his place of business he was glad to have them 
 bow and, as they clasped and shook their own 
 hands, say to him, “ Ka li kiong-hi ” (“ unto you 
 congratulations”). When the little fellow had lived 
 a whole month his relatives and friends from the 
 village and the other places around gathered at Mr. 
 Lee’s house to see the new-comer and to have a 
 
 ii 
 
12 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 grand feast in his honor, as well as to be present at 
 the ceremony of shaving the child’s head. Each 
 brought some present for the little fellow or his 
 parents. There were fowls and fruit and many 
 other things to eat, and among them twenty duck 
 eggs painted in pretty colors. Some had brought 
 money ; two or three brought silver rings, not for 
 the fingers, but for the wrists and ankles of the 
 baby : one of these ankle-rings had a tiny silver 
 bell fastened to it to jingle when he moved his feet. 
 His grandmother gave some clothing for him to 
 wear and a queer little cap, beautifully embroidered 
 with red and yellow silk, to put on his head. The 
 visitors gave many presents, because they expected 
 Mr. Lee, as he was rich, to give them many in re- 
 turn, and better, too, than they gave. 
 
 When all of the friends had enjoyed the first 
 part of the feast, the little boy was brought into 
 the room. He was not a beauty. His little head 
 was covered with silky black hair ; his nose was as 
 flat and small as though his nurse had let him fall 
 on it ; and the little black eyes seemed to be looking 
 down to see where the nose had gone. Around 
 each wrist a red cord was tied, to keep the spirit of 
 mischief from getting loose and making the hands 
 do bad things when the boy grew up. 
 
 When the little child made his appearance one 
 and another of the people said, “ Pretty,” “ Very 
 pretty,” u Smart,” “ Brave,” and other pleasant 
 things for the parents to hear. 
 
THE C'HINESE BABY. 
 
 13 
 
 Bat now came the great event of the feast. A 
 barber was brought in, and with his little three- 
 cornered razor shaved off the hair from the baby’s 
 head, leaving it entirely bald. Of course this was 
 not what the child liked, but Chinese babies must 
 soon learn that grown people have strange ways. 
 As the men and boys in China have all but the 
 back part of their heads shaved, the little baby had 
 to begin some time. 
 
 The Chinese do not shave their heads because 
 they are heathen, but because the nation has been 
 conquered by the Mantchu Tartars, who forced them 
 to follow the Tartar way of shaving the head and 
 braiding the hair. 
 
 When the barber had gone the father gave to the 
 bald-headed little fellow a name. Since the first 
 name given usually wears out or gives place to 
 another as soon as boys are large enough to go to 
 school, we will call the little boy by the name that 
 was given him a few years after. This was Chhoh 
 Lin : we will write it Choh Lin. 
 
 Three months after this “ feast of shaving the 
 child’s head ” invitations were sent out again to 
 the relatives and friends. As before, they brought 
 presents for the little fellow. Chief among these 
 gifts were a red chair and some molasses candy. 
 Does some girl or boy say, “ I wish I were a Chi- 
 nese baby if he can get plenty of molasses candy ” ? 
 Wait and see how it was used. The candy was 
 warmed and put on the seat of the chair, and then 
 
14 
 
 CHOH LIN 
 
 the little fellow, dressed in his nice clothing, was 
 placed on the candy in the seat. It was used to 
 keep him from falling otf! 
 
 But a more important ceremony took place at 
 this feast. The presents were all placed before the 
 image of the goddess of children. Mr. Lee bowed 
 before this idol and prayed the goddess to take care 
 of his little boy, to make him good-natured, to 
 make him stay awake in the daytime and sleep 
 well at night, to keep him from crying and to keep 
 him well. When they supposed that the goddess 
 had sufficiently enjoyed the presents, all were taken 
 away and a feast made of those that could be eaten. 
 
 When Choli Lin’s birthday came, then a greater 
 feast still was prepared and more presents brought. 
 After the friends had gathered, a large sieve was 
 placed on the table before an ancestral tablet. This 
 is a piece of carved wood standing in a carved 
 block. Into this upright piece was cut the name 
 of Mr. Lee’s father, who had died many years be- 
 fore. The Chinese believe that the souls of their 
 dead friends enter into these tablets of wood and live 
 in them for a long while. On the sieve were placed 
 some silver ornaments, scissors, ink and pen, a book 
 or two, a money-scale, a small boat, tools, and other 
 things. Then the little boy, dressed in a new suit 
 of clothes, was placed on the sieve among the things. 
 The Chinese think that whatever a child at this time 
 first grasps will show the business he wifi follow 
 when he becomes a man. Choh Lin took an 
 
THE CHINESE BABY. 
 
 15 
 
 orange, so some thought that he would be a farmer, 
 and others that he would like eating better than 
 anything else. 
 
 At the feast following this ceremony the little 
 boy had a dish prepared for him of which no one 
 else was allowed to eat — a soup made from chicken 
 feet. This soup was to make him walk soon and 
 become a first-rate runner. 
 
 The little child was taken each time before the 
 idols and the ancestral tablet, and made to hold up 
 his hands and bow his head as if praying to them. 
 Thus, when only a baby Choh Lin was made an 
 idolater and a worshiper of the spirits of the dead. 
 How could he help growing up a heathen ? He 
 was taught to serve these false gods only, and no 
 one told him to say, “Our Father which art in 
 heaven ” or to pray to Jesus. Nobody living near 
 his home knew about the true God ; none had heard 
 of Jesus ; and yet it is but little more than forty 
 years since Choh Lin was born. 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 THE CHILD OF THE GODS. 
 
 W HEN Choh Lin had passed his first birthday 
 his grandmother embroidered for him a red 
 woolen cloth with bright-colored silk, yet when it 
 was finished she did not give it to the little boy, 
 but gave it instead to his mother. She took it 
 to an idol temple, and from the incense-box or pot 
 standing before the idol gathered some of the ashes 
 made by burning incense to the god. This was 
 carefully placed in the cloth, and then, rolling it 
 up, she sewed the ashes tightly within. On the 
 outside of this little bundle the name of the god 
 Avas stamped. The package was then brought home 
 and hung by a silver chain about the little fellow’s 
 neck. Choh Lin had iioav been consecrated to the 
 idol. He might pray to other images, but his own 
 idol must receive the first and most of his service. 
 By carrying with him the incense-ashes his friends 
 hoped that the child would get the god’s spirit. 
 The Chinese suppose that the spirit of the idol 
 enters the ashes and lives there to do good to those 
 who carry it. Not only was Choh Lin to be the 
 child of this god, but the god was expected to take 
 16 
 
THE CHILD OF THE GODS. 
 
 17 
 
 care of the boy, to watch over him, hear his prayers 
 and do him every favor that the child needed or the 
 god could give. Though these bundles of ashes 
 are not worn through life, yet they are usually not 
 laid aside until, to the Chinese eye, they become 
 quite unclean ; and when the Chin ;se think a thing 
 is dirty they are generally right. 
 
 When Choh Lin began to walk it was the cause 
 of great rejoicing in the Lee household. As he 
 toddled three or four steps without falling, one of 
 the family took a large knife and, with the edge 
 downward, cut down to the floor between his feet, 
 and then again behind them, as though to cut some- 
 thing that hindered his movements. Of course the 
 knife did not touch him, but was supposed to cut 
 off some invisible cords that made him fall. 
 
 Choh Lin was not as strong a child as his older 
 brother, Chi Lap, and the mother and father were 
 very much afraid that their little boy would not 
 grow to be a man. They thought that evil spirits 
 were making their child weak, and would after a 
 while kill him. To drive away the evil ones they 
 determined on a ceremony that was supposed to 
 have a great effect on a child’s health. 
 
 Several priests were invited to the house, who 
 made a kind of altar of the tables, one on the top 
 of the other ; and on the top one they placed can- 
 dlesticks, censers and images of the gods, chief 
 among them the goddess of children. On a tab !« 
 in another part of the room they placed several 
 2 
 
18 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 plates with different kinds of meat, fruits and cakes. 
 When all was ready one priest rang a bell, another 
 beat a drum, another struck on cymbals, and all 
 together chanted something which, with their mu- 
 sic, was intended to invite a number of gods or 
 goddesses of children to the house and to a feast. 
 To describe the whole of the ceremony would take 
 too long, so we relate only the last part of it, which 
 is the most important. A framework to repre- 
 sent an open door was set up in the room. One 
 of the priests, dressed to represent the goddess of 
 children, stood beside this door and repeated some 
 words to frighten the evil spirits away. While he 
 was doing this Mr. Lee took up his little son and 
 gathered his other children around him. Each 
 of the children held a lighted incense-stick, and all 
 were ready for the great ceremony of frightening 
 the evil spirits so that they would not dare trouble 
 Choh Lin again. Then one of the priests began 
 blowing a horn, and, with this in one hand and a 
 sword in the other, he slowly marched through the 
 door. Mr. Lee, with Choh Lin in his arms and 
 followed by his children, passed through the door 
 after the priest, while the other priests made all the 
 noise they could with bells, cymbals and drums. In 
 this way they felt sure that little Choh Lin would 
 be made well and strong. When this ceremony 
 was over the frame through which the little boy 
 was carried was cut to pieces and burned. This 
 ceremony is called “passing through the door.’ 
 
THE CHILD OF THE GODS. 
 
 19 
 
 The Chinese probably think that by taking the 
 sick child through the door during the frightful 
 noises the evil spirits are kept back from the little 
 one, and then when the door is destroyed they can- 
 not find it to pass through in order to overtake the 
 child. 
 
 Choh Lin’s parents took another method of keep- 
 ing evil ones away from their child. They called 
 him “beggar,” “dirty,” “useless,” because they 
 hoped that the evil spirits, if they heard how the 
 little fellow was spoken of, would think that no 
 one cared much for him, and so would let him live: 
 thus trying to cheat the evil ones. 
 
 On his second birthday Choh Lin was honored 
 with another party, and children, especially those 
 who would probably be his companions as he grew 
 up, were invited. 
 
 Some months after his second birthday Choh 
 Lin’s older sister, a girl of ten years, became very 
 sick. She was his best nurse, and he missed her 
 very much. Whenever he could he would go to 
 her room and try to coax her to get up and play 
 with him. Doctors were called, and gave many 
 and strange medicines. Prayers to the spirits of 
 dead ancestors were offered, idol temples were vis- 
 ited, presents given to the gods, and many things 
 done to drive away the disease, but the child grew 
 worse. One day, when it became evident that she 
 must die, she looked upward, and, with her hands 
 reaching up, prayed, “ O Heaven, do not take me 
 
20 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 away from my little brother ! Save me ; let me 
 live that I may watch over him. If I go away 
 he will not have his sister to care for him.” She 
 pleaded to live, not that she might enjoy life, but 
 that she might care for her little brother. Not 
 long before she died she asked for Choh Lin, and 
 when he was brought, “ Who will care now for my 
 poor little boy?” said she. “He is so weak, and 
 young too ! how can he get along without his sis- 
 ter?” Then looking up, as though to a greater 
 than man, she said, “ Heaven, take care of the little 
 boy w T ho must lose his sister. Father will die, and 
 mother too must die. Please do not let the little 
 brother suffer.” Then she was still, and those who 
 stood by her said, “ She has passed on.” She was 
 dead. She prayed to heaven, but did not know 
 of Jesus; she could not pray to Him of whom no 
 one had told her. 
 
 As Choh Lin did not become strong, even though 
 the grand ceremony of “passing through the door” 
 had been attended to, his father and mother deter- 
 mined to try another ceremony. The fourteenth or 
 fifteenth day of the eighth month is often observed 
 in some parts of China as a day of special ceremony 
 for the good of children. Sometimes this ceremonv 
 is observed on the birthday of a child, and occasion- 
 ally too for the good of grown people when sick. 
 The ceremony is called “ worshiping the measure.” 
 This they decided to try. So on the fourteenth day 
 of the eighth month a table was set in the house 
 
THE CHILD OF THE GODS. 
 
 21 
 
 with various kinds of food ou it, and a square box 
 for measuring rice. In this measure, which was 
 half full of rice, a set of money-scales, a pair of 
 scissors, a foot-measure and a small mirror of metal 
 were placed, one article in each corner. A small 
 wooden image to represent Choh Lin, an incense- 
 stick, an oil lamp, a candle or two and ten chop- 
 sticks were also placed in this rice-measure. When 
 all things were arranged a single priest came into 
 the room and chanted a form of words intended to 
 win the favor of the gods, but more especially of 
 the two gods of long life and prosperity. The 
 things on the table were partly an offering to these 
 gods, and partly to show the wishes of the people 
 for their children. The priest was supposed to have 
 an influence with these gods, and the offerings were 
 designed to persuade them to give Choh Lin great 
 favors, the two chief ones being long life and plenty 
 of money. This ceremony is called “worshiping 
 the measure ” probably because these two gods are 
 thought to hold the measure of years and the meas- 
 ure of wealth. There are many more tilings con- 
 nected with this worship whose object the Chinese 
 do not seem to understand. They perform these 
 ceremonies, as they do many other things, because 
 their fathers did so before them. 
 
CHAPTER III. 
 
 A LITTLE BOY LOST. 
 
 HREE years of age ! What a man Choh Lin 
 
 -L felt himself to be ! Three years had passed 
 very slowly to him, though he did not remember 
 much of them. He knew that he was no longer a 
 baby, but a boy, halfway to being a man ; that was 
 enough. He walked around in his loose trousers 
 and little coat as pi’oud of his growing age and 
 size as though he were a man already. He was 
 glad to tell how old he was, but in this he did not 
 differ from other boys the world over. Chinese are 
 always willing to tell their ages. It has probably 
 never happened in China that a young lady who 
 has had more than thirty birthdays is not more than 
 eighteen years old. Such things do seem possible 
 in some other countries. 
 
 Just after the Chinese New Year, which occurs 
 in our February, a man asked Choh Lin, “ This 
 year, how old?” — “ Five years” said he. — How 
 proud the little fellow was to hear the man say, 
 “ What ! so old ? You will soon be a man ” ! 
 
 Five years old? Did Choh Lin tell an untruth? 
 He had not yet reached his fourth birthday ; why, 
 
 22 
 
A LITTLE BOY LOST. 
 
 28 
 
 then, did he say that he was five years old ? But 
 Choh Lin did not tell an untruth. According to 
 Chinese methods of counting age, Choh Lin was 
 five years old, though he had had only three birth- 
 days and had not lived four full years. The Chi- 
 nese do not reckon age by birthdays, but by the 
 years in which a person has lived. Every one is a 
 year older there on New Year’s Day than he was 
 the day before. All the Chinese “ take their age ” 
 on the same day. It thus happens that infants born 
 on the last day of the old year are two years old on 
 New Year’s morning, even though they have not 
 been in the world twenty-four hours. When a 
 Chinaman is asked how old he is, he understands 
 the question to mean, In how many years have you 
 lived ? 
 
 After Choh Lin became thus “ five years old ” he 
 thought that he was large enough to go around 
 without having somebody to watch him. So, call- 
 ing one of the large dogs, as he had often seen his 
 brother, Chi Lap, do, he started for a walk. No 
 one noticed him, and soon he was out of the place 
 and had gone over a hill behind the village. Every- 
 thing was strange to him, and he did not know 
 which way to go. Strange men were walking in 
 the field before him ; he was afraid to go farther. 
 Turning around, he tried to find the way home, but 
 took the wrong course. The farther he went the 
 more afraid he became, until he could not keep back 
 the tears ; then came the low cry, “ Mother ! mother!” 
 
24 
 
 CIIOTI LIN. 
 
 How he longed to be home ! He forgot now that 
 he would soon be a man ; he was willing to be called 
 a baby again if he might but reach home, where 
 mother, father, brother and sister were. Afraid of 
 the strange men, he neither dared go to them and 
 ask to be taken home, nor even to cry aloud. He 
 walked on and on, calling softly every few steps 
 to his mother. By his side the large dog walked 
 slowly, every little while looking into his young 
 master’s face as though he wanted to tell him what 
 to do, but could not say it. After going for a long 
 distance the little fellow sat down to rest. The dog- 
 lay down beside him. Tired little Clioh Lin laid 
 his head on the dog, and was soon fast asleep, and 
 there he lay with the dog as a pillow for several 
 hours. 
 
 Choh Lin had not been away very long before 
 he was missed in his home. But as Chi Lap was 
 away, it was supposed that the two boys had gone 
 out into the streets for a while, and would be back 
 by noon. When noon-time came Chi Lap returned, 
 but not Choh Lin. Mr. Lee came in soon after, 
 and was asked if he had taken his little boy out 
 with him to his business. But Mr. Lee had not 
 seen Choh Lin. The child was lost! No dinner 
 was eaten. It seemed almost impossible that the 
 child should have strayed away and not be noticed 
 by anybody. A dark suspicion crossed Mr. Lee’s 
 mind. Perhaps somebody had stolen his boy! He 
 sent all of his hired men and every one whom he 
 
A LITTLE BOY LOST. 
 
 25 
 
 could get to search over the country and learn if 
 any one had been seen carrying his child away. 
 He himself, taking Chi Lap with him to be certain 
 that no one stole his older boy, started off, away 
 from the rest, to look for the child. Chi Lap called 
 his dog to follow. 
 
 While the men were searching for Choh Lin the 
 women of the household were rushing around from 
 one neighbor’s house to another asking if they had 
 seen anything of the little boy. But the mother 
 went at once to the temple and the idol to whom 
 Choh Lin had been consecrated, and told the god 
 her mournful storv. She accused him of nesdeeting- 
 his child, and then begged him to bring back her 
 boy or to tell the men where he was. She promised, 
 if the god would see that the child was brought 
 back that day, a feast should in due time be pre- 
 sented to the idol. After her prayers were com- 
 pleted she “ drew lots ” to see what the answer of 
 the god would be. But when she drew the paper 
 that was supposed to contain the answer, she was 
 unable to understand its meaning. One character, 
 or word, seemed to be the one meaning “find,” and 
 from this she at least hoped that the god’s answer 
 was favorable and the child would be found. With 
 this hope she returned home. No Choh Lin there; 
 no news about him. 
 
 We need not describe her sorrow nor yet the 
 search of the men. After they had gone out of 
 sight of the village and of Mr. Lee they separated 
 
26 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 as he had told them, but each one moved slowly 
 and lazily along. They went by various paths 
 leading from the village, but the father and brother 
 started across the fields, to reach by a short cut a 
 village that stood on the water some miles away. 
 Mr. Lee thought that if his child had been stolen, 
 it had been taken to that town to start from there 
 with some vessel. After going for several miles, 
 and when not very far away from the village, Chi 
 Lap’s dog began to bark at some bird that he saw. 
 His bark was answered by that of another dog in 
 the edge of a grain-field. 
 
 “ Oh, father !” said the boy, “ that’s Kailo, our 
 dog. Let us go to him ; it may be that Choh Lin 
 is with him.” 
 
 Chi Lap’s dog barked in answer to the other, and 
 ran toward the field of grain. Mr. Lee and his 
 boy followed as quickly as they could, and there, 
 just awakening from his sleep, was little Choh Lin 
 with his head resting on his hand and his elbow on 
 Kailo. The barking of the dog had awakened the 
 little boy. Though Kailo wanted to go to meet his 
 friends, he felt that it was his duty to take care of 
 his young master first. Had the dog not stayed 
 with Choh Lin, Mr. Lee might not have found his 
 boy. 
 
 It would be hard to say who was the happiest at 
 the meeting, but Mr. Lee lost no time in carrying 
 the little fellow to his home. 
 
 Before many days the mother’s promise to the 
 
A LITTLE BOY LOST. 
 
 27 
 
 idol was kept and a feast set before him. Instead 
 of eating the food themselves or giving it to the 
 priests, the Lee family gave it, after the god had, 
 as they supposed, feasted on the spirit of the food, 
 to some poor people. These people, eating the first 
 real good meal they had enjoyed for years, felt very 
 thankful, so they said, that Choh Lin had been 
 found, and they felt a wish — but this they did not 
 tell — that he might be lost and found often. 
 
 That night his grandmother felt that Choh Lin 
 ought to be taken to the temple to olfer thanks him- 
 self to the god. Just after sunset she took some 
 incense-sticks in one hand, and, leading the little 
 boy with the other, brought him before the idol to 
 whom he belonged. There she taught him to light 
 the incense-sticks and set them in the box before 
 the idol • and while they were slowly burning she 
 told him to kneel to the god and with hands folded 
 bow his head before the idol, to show that he was 
 thankful for being saved. He tried to do as his 
 grandmother bade him, and said not a word until 
 they were going home from the temple. Then he 
 asked, “ Grandmother, did that god take care of me 
 when I was lost?” 
 
 “ Yes,” said the old lady ; “ he is a good god for 
 bringing our little boy back again to us.” 
 
 “ But why did he not keep me from going away, 
 and then he need not have brought me back ?” 
 asked the child. 
 
 “ You ran away of yourself, and the god watched 
 
28 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 that you did not go so far that no one could find 
 you.” 
 
 “ Could he not have watched me just as well at 
 home ? I was so tired, and that is the reason I did 
 not go farther. Did the god make me tired ?” 
 
 “ No, but he showed your father where you 
 were.” 
 
 “Grandmother, it was Kailo that showed where 
 I was ; they were going past me.” 
 
 “ But the god may have told the dog to bark. 
 The god did take care of you, anyway, while you 
 were asleep.” 
 
 “So did Kailo; I slept with my head on him. 
 Grandmother, if dogs can take care of us as well 
 as gods, why do we worship gods only, and not 
 dogs too?” 
 
 “Do not talk so, my child. Dogs are only dogs. 
 They die ; the gods always live. Dogs do not un- 
 derstand when you pray to them, but the gods do.” 
 
 “ But dogs can run and bark and bite, too ; gods 
 cannot. They must stay where they are, like dead 
 dogs.” 
 
 “ Choh Lin, you must not speak so ; it is very 
 wicked. What you see is only the idol that holds 
 the spirit of the god. You cannot see a spirit. 
 We worship not the idol, but the spirit in it. The 
 spirit is like the wind ; you cannot see the wind.” 
 
 “ But I can feel it.” 
 
 “ Not when it stands still. So you cannot see 
 or feel the gods when they stand still. But you 
 
A LITTLE BOY LOST. 
 
 29 
 
 must be careful not to talk wickedly about the 
 gods; their spirits may be around you always, and 
 if you speak against them they may hurt you ; they 
 may make you sick or do you other injury, or, per- 
 haps, even kill you or some of your friends.” 
 
CHAPTER IV. 
 
 LEARNING TO WORSHIP IDOLS. 
 
 HOH LIN’S father now gave strict commands 
 
 that the little fellow must not be allowed to go 
 into the street alone at all, nor would his father take 
 the little boy along with him to his business, lest he 
 stray away again and be lost. Choh Lin thought 
 this very trying. He had not many things with 
 which to amuse himself, and, as his brother was at 
 school most of the day, he did not know in what 
 way to spend his time. Sometimes his mother told 
 him stories and helped to amuse him, and often she 
 told him about the gods and taught him to worship 
 them. She took him very often to the idol temple, 
 and taught him to pray, to offer incense and food, 
 and how to learn, as she believed, whether or not 
 the gods heard and would answer his prayer. 
 
 There were in the temple several pairs of short 
 roots of trees. These roots were flat on one side 
 and round on the other, and both ends were nearly 
 pointed. One way of finding out whether or not 
 his prayer would be heard was to take a pair of 
 these roots before the idol, and, after holding them 
 together for a moment, let them drop to the floor. 
 If they lay one with the flat and the other with the 
 
 30 
 
LEARNING TO WORSHIP IDOLS. 
 
 31 
 
 round side up, his prayer would be answered ; but 
 if both lay with the flat side down, his prayer would 
 not be granted ; while if both lay with the flat side 
 up, the god would not tell whether the prayer was 
 to be heard or not. Sometimes when people wor- 
 ship in the temples, and the roots do not fall right 
 the first time, they try again until satisfied that the 
 god means to hear the prayer. Of course that is 
 not exactly fair, but the Chinese do not always treat 
 their gods fairly. 
 
 Mrs. Lee taught her boy another way by which 
 he might not only learn the purpose of the god, 
 but might get part of an answer to his petition. In 
 the temple were many pieces of paper with a verse 
 printed on each in red ink; there were also as many 
 small sticks of bamboo-wood as pieces of paper. 
 Each piece of wood was numbered, as were the 
 papers. Mrs. Lee taught her little boy to take a 
 number of these sticks, and, putting them into a 
 long round box, to kneel before the god, and after 
 bowing and offering his prayer to shake the box 
 until one of the sticks fell out. The number on 
 this stick would give the number of the printed 
 paper, and the verse on that would probably give 
 some answer, or tell what would be the answer, to 
 his prayer. 
 
 Choh Lin was very willing to go to the temple, 
 and often asked his mother to take him to worship 
 the gods. She was glad to see her little boy show 
 so much interest in the worship of idols, and hoped 
 
32 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 that he would grow up to be a faithful worshiper 
 of the gods of China. 
 
 At first the little fellow wanted to go to the tem- 
 ple because that took him out into the streets, and 
 sometimes, when his grandmother went to the tem- 
 ple with him, she would take him for a long walk 
 outside of the village after they had been to worship. 
 He often talked of the gods and asked many ques- 
 tions about them. He cared more for the god to 
 whom he belonged than for any other, and his 
 mother, as well as his grandmother, sometimes grew 
 tired of answering his questions or saying to him, 
 “ I do not know.” 
 
 One day, as he and his grandmother were taking 
 a walk, he saw, far away, smoke arising. He did 
 not know what caused it, and as his grandmother 
 had told him not to ask so many questions, he did 
 not dare say anything about it, but kept thinking 
 and looking and wishing that he could go to the 
 smoke and see what was there. His grandmother 
 and mother had told him that he must pray to 
 heaven and that there were good beings in heav- 
 en ; so he thought at length that the far-away place 
 from which he saw the smoke arise must be heaven, 
 and that the smoke was caused by the people there 
 cooking their rice for supper. 
 
 Some days after, when he was told that heaven 
 would take care of him, he replied, “I am going 
 there some time. I know where heaven- is ; I saw it 
 the other day.” 
 
LEARNING TO WORSHIP IDOLS. 
 
 33 
 
 “ You saw heaven ?” said his mother. “ How 
 could you see heaven ?” 
 
 “ Oh, I saw it. It is a great way off, but I saw 
 it with my eyes.” 
 
 “ You could not see heaven,” said his sister ; “ no 
 one can : it is too far away.” 
 
 “Where did you see heaven?” asked his grand- 
 mother. 
 
 “ I saw it away off back of the hills, near the 
 mountain. It was so far away that I could only 
 see the smoke,” replied Choh Lin. 
 
 “See the smoke?” laughed Chi Lap. “He has 
 seen the clouds in the sky, that is all.” 
 
 “No, it was no cloud; it was smoke,” answered 
 the little boy. “ I know that it was smoke, and the 
 people of heaven were busy cooking their rice.” 
 
 Chi Lap laughed louder than ever as he said, 
 “ You saw the smoke over the hills near the moun- 
 tain ; that is nothing but a limekiln, and men /were 
 burning lime there. Your heaven is not very far 
 off, and it is not a very large place, either. If you 
 pray to that kind of heaven, it will not do you 
 much good. Limekiln-burners do not make a very 
 good heaven.” 
 
 Chi Lap’s laughing and the smile on the faces 
 of the rest of the family made the little boy feel 
 ashamed, and he began to cry. His mother took 
 him on her lap, and soon quieted him as she told 
 him that heaven was not on this earth, but in the 
 sky somewhere, and far above the clouds, where no 
 a 
 
34 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 one could see it. To all of his questions about 
 heaven she could only say, “ We do not know much 
 about it. It is a good place, and takes care of the 
 good people on earth who pray to it.” 
 
 Then she told him something that made the little 
 fellow ask a great many more questions. “ On the 
 fifth night of the first month of the new year,” she 
 said, “ heaven is opened and a beautiful angel comes 
 out in the sky. This angel is clothed in red and is 
 surrounded by light. Whoever sees this angel and 
 asks any favor will receive what is asked for. Now, 
 if you will stay up on the night when the angel ap- 
 pears, and ask a favor of heaven, you will get it.” * 
 
 “Does the angel appear only once each year?” 
 asked Choh Lin. 
 
 “ Yes, only once, and he is not always seen when 
 he does come. Somtimes he comes when people 
 are all asleep.” 
 
 “Why do they not stay up to see him?” asked 
 the child. 
 
 “ Because many do not care enough for heaven’s 
 favors ; and, besides, not every one can see the angel 
 when he does appear.” 
 
 “ Who cannot see him ?” asked Choh Lin. 
 “Could I see him?” 
 
 * This tradition, told by the subject of this story to the 
 writer, is probably not known generally in China. There is 
 in it something that reminds us, especially when we consider 
 chronologies, of the angels’ appearance in the sky at Bethlehem 
 at the birth of Christ. 
 
LEARNING TO WORSHIP IDOLS. 
 
 35 
 
 “Yes, I hope so,” said his mother. “I think 
 that you are good enough ; you worship the gods 
 and are quite a good boy.” 
 
 “ Why cannot some people see the angel ?” 
 
 “ Because they are bad. Good people may see 
 him, and bad ones, looking at the same time, will 
 see nothing at all. So my little boy must be good 
 if he would see the beautiful angel and get favors 
 from him.” 
 
 “ But, mother, can we see him if it be cloudy ?” 
 asked Clioh Lin. 
 
 “Yes; he is so bright that he would shine 
 through the clouds.” 
 
 “Will he not hurt me? I am afraid to see 
 him.” 
 
 “ No ; he loves children if they are good.” 
 
 “ Did you ever see the angel, mother?” asked the 
 little boy. 
 
 “No; I looked two or three times and did not 
 see him, and then, when people said that I was not 
 good enough, I thought that it was true and did 
 not look again.” 
 
 “ You are good now. Why do not you look the 
 next time the angel comes ?” 
 
 “Perhaps I will, but grown people are not as 
 good as little children who try to be good. If my 
 little boy could see the angel he might ask him to 
 make Choh Lin’s mother better, as well as to give 
 Clioh Lin favors.” 
 
 “ I will, mother,” said the child ; “ and do not 
 
36 
 
 CHOH LIN 
 
 forget to tell me some days before the time, for I 
 will try to be number-one good then. I want to 
 see the angel and ask him for something.” 
 
 “ What will you ask for, Choh Lin?” asked Chi 
 Lap. 
 
 “ I will ask him to make Chi Lap good,” said 
 the little boy; “I think that he needs it.” 
 
 Chi Lap did not like the laugh that his little 
 brother’s reply caused. He forgot that he had 
 laughed at his brother a short time before. We 
 forget if anything we say causes others pain ; we 
 do not forget our own pain so quickly. 
 
CHAPTER V. 
 
 THE SICK FATHER. 
 
 Y EARS go as quickly in China as in America 
 for old people, and about as slowly for chil- 
 dren. The first five years of Choh Lin’s life were 
 long ones, and to him it seemed that he never 
 would grow to be a man. One day an old man 
 told him that the boys who grew slowly became 
 the strongest men, while those who grew up quick- 
 ly were weak and died soon. This made the little 
 fellow more contented, yet he would quite often 
 stand by his brother and quietly measure to know 
 whether Chi Lap was so very much larger. Chi 
 Lap, who was several years older, seemed to the 
 little boy to be almost a man already, and if he 
 were as large he would be satisfied. 
 
 He was a proud boy when Chi Lap gave him a 
 new top and said that he might play with the older 
 boys. A ring was marked on the ground and sev- 
 eral boys were invited to bring their tops to spin in 
 the ring. After Chi Lap and two or three others 
 had spun their tops, and one or two were left lying 
 in the ring, Choh Lin said, “ My turn now. Let 
 me try.” He had the string wound around the top, 
 
 37 
 
38 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 and then threw it as he saw the others do, but it did 
 not spin, and had to be left in the ring. Then one 
 of the boys sent his own top into the ring and 
 “pegged” Clioh Lin’s so hard that the new top 
 was split. The little fellow began to cry. This 
 counted him out of the game at once, for a Chinese 
 boy who cannot see his top broken without crying 
 is not allowed to play. The little boy went home 
 resolving that he would not spin tops again if the 
 big boys must peg his new one the first thing, and 
 then not let him play at all after that. He was be- 
 ginning to learn that to be a big boy brought troubles 
 that little boys could not well bear. 
 
 Choh Lin had a little friend about his own age 
 named Oan, whom lie often visited. One day, as 
 he came from worshiping the idol in the temple, he 
 saw Oan, and while Mrs. Lee and Oan’s mother 
 were talking the little boys had a talk by them- 
 selves. 
 
 “ I have been to the temple to worship my god,” 
 said Choh Lin. “ What god do you have for yours, 
 Oan ?” 
 
 “ I have none,” said he. “ Grandmother and 
 mother do not take me to the temple every day. 
 Sometimes they take me along on the first or the 
 fifteenth of the moon, but I don’t want to go 
 often.” 
 
 “ I like to go,” said Choh Lin ; “ I want the god 
 to love me and take care of me and give me many 
 things.” 
 
THE SICK FATHER. 
 
 39 
 
 “ Do the gods give you nice things ? What do 
 they give?” 
 
 “ Oh, most anything you ask for, so mother 
 says.” 
 
 “ Did they give you that new top that Jim broke 
 the other day ?” 
 
 “ No ; Chi Lap gave me that.” 
 
 “ What has your god ever given you?” 
 
 “ He has not given much yet, but he will some 
 day, mother says. She told me that the gods and 
 the spirits have given my father all of his things.” 
 
 “ Didn’t he buy them ?” 
 
 “ Yes, but the gods gave him the money or helped 
 him get it.” 
 
 “ If the gods do that, then I mean to worship 
 them too, and ask my father to worship them, for 
 he told me that he had no money when I wanted 
 him to buy me a dog. Did the gods give you your 
 dogs ?” 
 
 “ No, they grew. Perhaps the gods did give 
 them when they were very small, and the dogs 
 grew the rest.” 
 
 “ How long will it take to get things that way ?” 
 
 “ I don’t know ; mother says we must keep wor- 
 shiping, and then the gods will always be giving us 
 good things.” 
 
 “ Come, Choh Lin,” said his mother, “ we will 
 go home.” 
 
 At home they found Mr. Lee lying down in the 
 house. He had just come back from a business-trip 
 
40 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 that had taken him several days. When his wife 
 and little boy came in he said to them, “ You must 
 be very still, for my head aches very much and I 
 have a fever. I am sick, very sick.” 
 
 Mrs. Lee saw that her husband had a high fever, 
 and sent for the doctor at once. Mr. Lee had never 
 been so ill before. As soon as the doctor came Mrs. 
 Lee met him at the door and told him that he must 
 make Mr. Lee well soon or he would get no pay for 
 his medicine and care; but if the sick man was 
 soon restored to health the doctor should have good 
 pay.* 
 
 Mrs. Lee was so anxious to see her husband cured 
 that she did not ask about the price of medicine, 
 but only that he be made well very soon. 
 
 When the doctor came to Mr. Lee’s bed he sat 
 down on a chair, and, putting on a very large pair 
 of spectacles, took one hand of the sick man and 
 then the other, to feel if there was much difference 
 in the pulses of the two wrists. 
 
 “ Yes,” said he, “ it is as I feared. The pulses 
 are different, and there is a battle going on in the 
 body. Some time, when you were busy or asleep, 
 so as not to notice, the spirit of cold crept in, and 
 
 * When the doctor in China comes to see a sick person for 
 the first time the friends, if not the sick one, sometimes ask 
 how much it will cost to cure ; and if the price be too much 
 the doctor is requested to do it for less, or the people may send 
 for another who will cure for less money. As the people pay 
 for the medicines, they often demand the cheaper kinds and 
 refuse to take those which cost much. 
 
THE SICK FATHER. 
 
 41 
 
 it is now fighting the heat in your body and trying 
 to drive it out. It has taken its stand in the middle 
 of the body, and is there fighting the two sides.” 
 
 “ But if there is cold in me, why am I so hot ?” 
 asked the sick man. 
 
 “ Why,” said the doctor, “ that is the result of 
 heat fighting with the cold. When men fight they 
 become hot ; so with your body — fighting makes it 
 hot. A dead body is cold because its heat does not 
 fight; in fact, it has been driven out, and the cold 
 has taken possession entirely.” 
 
 “ If there be cold in me, why do I not feel it ?” 
 asked Mr. Lee. 
 
 “ The cold is all on the inside, and has driven 
 the heat toward the outside,” answered the doctor. 
 “ Did you not feel chilly when you first became sick 
 or just before ? That was the cold entering your 
 body. Now we must stop that cold, drive it out, 
 or it will conquer the heat and you will die.” 
 
 Mr. Lee felt too sick to ask any more questions, 
 and let the doctor talk to Mrs. Lee. “ He must 
 have nothing cold to eat or drink, and he must be 
 kept very warm ; there must no wind blow on him 
 and there must be no air passing through the room. 
 He must be kept as quiet as possible,” were the 
 orders of the doctor ; “ and then, by the heating 
 medicines I give him, the cold will soon be driven 
 out or overcome, so that it cannot fight any more ; 
 then it can easily be removed.” 
 
 He told Mrs. Lee to send some one around to his 
 
42 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 shop soon, when the medicines would be ready, and 
 told her to be careful to give them just as he di- 
 rected, and, above all, to keep her husband very 
 quiet. He promised to come again in the morning, 
 and said that by great care he could cure Mr. Lee, 
 but it would take much costly medicine and give 
 the doctor a great deal of trouble and anxiety. 
 
 The whole family were forbidden to go into Mr. 
 Lee’s room, or to even open the door, lest more cold 
 should find its way into the sick man’s body and 
 make the battle to drive it out all the harder. 
 
 Clioh Lin thought it very trying that he could 
 not speak to or even see his father, but his mother 
 told him that he might help him very much by 
 asking the gods to make him well. The little fel- 
 low felt very sorry, and when he went to bed at 
 night determined to go very early to the temple the 
 next morning. 
 
 Choh Lin was up early and on his way to the 
 temple. The village was not large, and he had 
 so often been to the temple that he could easily find 
 the way. He did not wish any one to know that 
 he was going, so he went out very quietly through 
 a back door. On his way he thought of Oan and 
 of what had been said the night before. His little 
 friend was not up yet when he came to Oau’s house ; 
 but, as his father had already gone to work, the 
 door was open, and Choh Lin found his wav to the 
 little boy’s bed and asked him to go with him to 
 the temple to pray. Oan was soon up and ready. 
 
THE SICK FATHER. 
 
 43 
 
 Quietly the little boys slipped out of the house, and 
 before long were in the temple. 
 
 Choh Lin had told of his father’s illness, and 
 when they were ready to worship he said to Oan, 
 “ Let me worship first. You can wait for your 
 dog, but my father cannot wait. I want to get him 
 well very quickly.” 
 
 It was agreed that Choh Lin should pray first. 
 Bowing before the god, he began: “O god, my 
 father is very sick, and we cannot make him well. 
 We do not know how, but you do, and you can 
 cure him. Choh Lin, your little slave-boy, prays 
 you to make him well very soon. We cannot do 
 without my father; we have only one, and if he 
 dies our hearts will not let us get another. He is 
 good, and when he is well again we will give you 
 many good things, and I think that he will come 
 and worship you too. He has not had time to wor- 
 ship you, but mother and I have for him. Please 
 make him well ; please do not let him die, for Choh 
 Lin’s heart will die then ; and you, O great god, do 
 not want a boy whose heart is buried ; please, then, 
 make my father well.” 
 
 When the little fellow had finished he turned to 
 Oan and said, “ Now I have done, but you wait a 
 little, until the god thinks how to cure my father. 
 You know a father is worth more than ten thousand 
 dogs. Besides, dogs are plenty, and I have only 
 one father.” 
 
 For quite a while the boys waited ; then Oan 
 
44 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 said, “ May I pray now, for I want a clog soon ? 
 The god can think when we are gone.” 
 
 “ Yes,” replied Choh Lin ; “ gods do not need to 
 think long.” 
 
 Then, bowing as he had seen Choh Lin, Oan 
 began praying to the idol : “ O god, please give a 
 poor little boy a dog. He has no money to buy 
 one, and his father has no money either. You 
 need not give a large dog ; if it be only half as big 
 as a kitten it will do; I will make it grow the rest. 
 If you have more black ones than any other kind, 
 give me a black dog, but do not give me a white 
 one unless you want all the others. If you will 
 give me a dog I will come often to the temple, and 
 will bring the dog too. Please give a dog to Lo 
 Oan, a poor boy who lives in Tay Soa.” 
 
 After Oan had finished he asked Choh Lin, “ Do 
 you think I will get a dog now ?” 
 
 “ I do not know,” said he ; “ you must pray more 
 than once. But you must not tell the god that you 
 will bring the dog to the temple; dogs cannot wor- 
 ship. It may be that gods do not like to have them 
 there.” 
 
 “Shall I tell the god that I will leave the dog 
 at home ?” 
 
 “ Not now ; next time will do. You must pray 
 often, you know.” 
 
 “ Why ? Cannot the god remember about the 
 dog?” 
 
 “ I do not know. Mother and grandmother say 
 
THE SICK FATHER. 
 
 45 
 
 we must pray often until the god does give what we 
 ask for. If my father is not better, I am coming 
 again to-day.” 
 
 “ I do not think that I will. I want a dog, but 
 I do not like to worship too much for one. Some- 
 body may give me one ; then I will not need to ask 
 the god. I wish that some one would. Let us go 
 home now.” 
 
 So the little boys returned home. They had 
 prayed to a dumb and helpless idol, instead of to 
 a real God. But it was the only god of whom they 
 knew. Why did they not know about Jesus ? 
 
CHAPTER VI. 
 
 THE FATHER'S DEATH. 
 
 T HE little boys reached their homes before any 
 one missed them, and as they said nothing 
 about going to the temple, none suspected that they 
 had been there to pray. Clioh Lin was told by his 
 mother that his father was no better. 
 
 “Oh, he will be better soon,” said the little boy. 
 “I hope that he will, yet I am afraid not. He 
 is very, very ill. It is a bad fever. But why does 
 my little boy think that his father will get well?” 
 
 “ I know. He will get well soon ; I know some- 
 thing.” 
 
 “ Has a fortune-teller said so?” 
 
 “No, mother. I will tell you. I went early to 
 the temple and prayed to the god to make father 
 well; and I am going again and mean to pray until 
 he gets well. That is the way that you and grand- 
 mother told me to do.” 
 
 “ My heart’s loved little boy !” said Mrs. Lee. 
 “The gods must hear your prayer. You are good, 
 and the idol will listen. Yes, pray, and pray often. 
 But who went with you to the temple?” 
 
 “ Oau and I went. He prayed too, but he did 
 
 46 
 
THE FATHER’S DEATH. 
 
 47 
 
 not pray for ray father. He does not go often, and 
 I did not ask him to pray for my father’, because 
 the gods may not know yet who Oan is. Do the 
 gods answer the prayers of those whom they do not 
 know ?” 
 
 “ I think that the gods know everybody. But I 
 must go, for the doctor is coming.” 
 
 When the doctor came he saw that Mr. Lee was 
 much worse. “ Ah,” said he, “ the medicine is 
 fighting very hard. There must be a great deal 
 of cold inside; we must use stronger medicines.” 
 So he prepared a mixture of pepper aud some other 
 things that burn even worse, and told Mrs. Lee to 
 give this mixture, with the other medicine, very 
 often, and it would drive the cold out in time. 
 The doctor then went away, promising to call again 
 soon. 
 
 The new medicine only made the sick man worse. 
 He became delirious, and every little while would 
 say, “ Cold water, please! cold water !” But no one 
 gave the sufferer cold water. Sometimes, when he 
 was partly asleep, he would call to Choh Lin, “ My 
 little boy, give your father a drink of cold water.” 
 The doctor’s orders were strict ; and, besides, as the 
 Chinese think cold water is not good for well people 
 to drink, no one would give it to a sick man. 
 
 Mr. Lee’s friends came in, and seeing how ill he 
 was said that another doctor must be called. As 
 they could not agree on one, several were sent for. 
 One said that this remedy must be tried, and another 
 
48 
 
 CEOE LIN. 
 
 that, yet the new doctors did no better than the old 
 one. 
 
 Mrs. Lee and the grandmother went more than 
 once each day to the temple to pray the gods to cure 
 the sick man, and promised the idols a great feast 
 and very many good things if they would make 
 him well. Choh Lin usually went with them, and 
 when he saw his mother cry and beg the gods to 
 drive away the fever and not let her husband die, 
 he would kneel down crying before his own special 
 idol and say, “ Please, Choh Lin’s own god, do not 
 let the little boy of your own heart lose his father. 
 He is the only father I have, and if he dies there is 
 no place where I can get another. Grandmother 
 cries, mother cries, Choh Lin cries, Chi Lap cries, 
 all cry, ‘Spare him whom our hearts love.’” 
 
 But doctors, medicines, prayers, tears, did not stop 
 the fever. Mr. Lee’s friends felt very sad when 
 they thought that he must die, yet there were not 
 a few in the village who did not care. Some said, 
 “It is plain that death wants somebody from the 
 village, and if it is not Mr. Lee it will be one of 
 us. So if he is taLen we shall be spared the longer.” 
 It was not that they wanted the sick man to die, 
 but in China people care for self rather than for 
 others, and think when death is trying to get some 
 one else he will let them alone. So far do they 
 carry this selfish idea that often they will let a man 
 who falls into the water drown rather than pull 
 him out. They fear that by pulling him out they 
 
THE FATHER’S DEATH. 
 
 49 
 
 will rob Death, who will get his pay by killing 
 them. 
 
 Some who were glad that Mr. Lee was likely to 
 die were those who owed him money; they thought 
 that if he died they would get clear of paying their 
 debts. Some, too, thought that in the confusion at- 
 tending his death they might be able to take some 
 of his property without being noticed. 
 
 At length the doctors gave up all hope ; they said 
 that if they had been called before they would have 
 saved the sick man’s life, but it was too late now. 
 And the one who had been called first said that he 
 knew Mr. Lee would die as soon as those men who 
 knew nothing about the disease took him in charge 
 to dose him with their worthless remedies. 
 
 Choh Lin’s mother and grandmother could not 
 give up yet. Each resolved to try once more to 
 “ bring back the spirit of the sick man,” as they 
 said. The grandmother, taking the little boy to 
 the temple, told him to pray to his own idol while 
 she worshiped another. Lighting a large number 
 of incense-sticks before the idol and kneeling before 
 it, she told the god that her son was sick, and that 
 he must be made well or there would be a great 
 deal of suffering in the village; not only would his 
 family suffer, but many of the people would suffer 
 and be unable to give incense or food or any good 
 things to the gods ; so they too would suffer. Then 
 she begged the god to allow her to take with her a 
 curiously-shaped utensil, looking somewhat like an 
 
50 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 arrow, on which were the characters — that is, Chi- 
 nese words — for “command.” This would mean, 
 if in the room of the sick man, that the god com- 
 manded the disease to leave. This utensil was to 
 be hung up in the sick room and worshiped as 
 tho'ugh it were an idol. When the old lady sup- 
 posed that her prayer was heard, and that she might 
 take what she asked for, she took the utensil from 
 its place, and, calling Choh Lin, started for home. 
 
 As soon as the little boy and his grandmother 
 came home, Mrs. Lee, taking Chi Lap, went to the 
 temple. Here, at her request, two priests were 
 waiting. They had with them the coat that Mr. 
 Lee had last worn, a small mirror made of metal 
 brightly polished and a pole of bamboo-wood fresh- 
 ly cut, with leaves yet green at the top. A stick, 
 fastened by a string to the top of the pole, was put 
 into the coat for arms ; then above it, and just high 
 enough to represent the head of a man wearing the 
 coat, the mirror was fastened to the string. When 
 everything was ready the priest gave the pole to 
 Chi Lap, who field it over his shoulder. Then a 
 priest rang a bell and called Mr. Lee’s name, and 
 repeated some words supposed to have power to 
 bring the spirit of the man who had worn the coat 
 back to its place. After the priest had repeated 
 these words and performed several ceremonies that 
 need not be told here, the coat was hurriedly taken 
 to Mr. Lee’s house, and, as he was too weak to have 
 it put on, the coat was laid over him on the bed. 
 
THE FATHER’S DEATH. 
 
 51 
 
 The object of all this was to call back the spirit, 
 which was supposed to be leaving Mr. Lee’s body. 
 The poor man understood the meaning of it all, 
 though he seemed too weak to speak, and he only 
 tried to shake his head. After a while he motioned 
 to his wife to come to him. He whispered, “ Bo 
 law eng ; kan si-mia e law be ” (There is no road to 
 use; I have ari’ived at life’s end). 
 
 The delirium and fever had passed away; so had 
 his strength, and Mr. Lee knew that he must die. 
 For a few minutes his strength came back a little, 
 and he called his two boys to his bed. Looking at 
 them, he said, “ My boys, your father has been to a 
 land where it is very hot, and there was no water 
 there for him. He asked the people to give him 
 one drink, only one taste of cold water, but they 
 would not. Two looked like his own Chi Lap and 
 Choh Lin, but it could not be ; they would not let 
 their father die for want of a drink of cold water. 
 But no one would give it, and the fever-fire has 
 burned his spirit loose. It must go soon, but where 
 he does not know. When it has gone his boys 
 must not forget to place food and water where it 
 may get them. I do not wish to go ; I wish to stay 
 and care for my boys and for all. But it is too late 
 now. It is all dark, dark ! Let me sleep.” 
 
 They stooped over him; they called his name, 
 but he did not answer, he did not notice them. 
 “ He is asleep,” said one. Yes, he was asleep, but 
 it was the sleep that does not waken. His breath- 
 
52 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 ing was slower and slower until it stopped, and Mr. 
 Lee was dead. 
 
 For a few moments they stood around the dead 
 man in silence, hoping that he was asleep, until 
 Choh Lin’s grandmother stooped over the bed and 
 listened ; he did not breathe. She started back with 
 the cry, “ My heart has passed away ! my heart has 
 passed away !” 
 
 Sad was the lamentation of the old mother • more 
 touching still were the cries of Mrs. Lee when she 
 knew that she was a widow. She begged his spirit 
 to come back, to speak just once more to her, and 
 besought it not to leave her alone as a bird in a 
 cage with no hand to keep her from starving. How 
 should she now care for the little fledglings in the 
 nest? Soon they would call for food, and she must 
 hear their cry, unable to feed them. She little 
 thought how like a prophecy these words would 
 prove. 
 
 When it became known that Mr. Lee was dead 
 the friends in the house began to cry and lament 
 their loss. They had reason to mourn, for they 
 had no good hope of meeting the dead loved one 
 again. As Mr. Lee said, it was all dark, dark to 
 them. No gospel to light death, no Jesus to give 
 light to the grave. That darkness is awful. 
 
CHAPTER VII. 
 
 THE FUNERAL. 
 
 S soon as the mourners became more quiet, can- 
 
 -Ll_ dies and incense-sticks were lighted and placed 
 by the side of Mr. Lee’s body. The Chinese believe 
 that all is dark in the spirit-world, and that the 
 spirit does not know how to find the path ; so, as 
 soon as possible after death, candles are lighted to 
 show the way. The incense is meant as worship to 
 the spirit. The people worship the spirits of the 
 dead somewhat as they do idols, only they treat the 
 spirits with much more respect than they do their 
 gods ; they fear and love them more. 
 
 The next day, when the body was prepared for 
 the coffin, the whole family assembled in the room 
 in which it lav. Chi Lap, who had been told what 
 to do, took a cup of wine, and, kneeling before the 
 dead, three times placed the cup to the lips of the 
 corpse. After this he took, with a pair of chopsticks, 
 some cooked food from a bowl and offered this three 
 times, and again he did the same with boiled rice. 
 While he was thus offering drink and food to the 
 dead all the rest, except Mrs. Lee and old Mrs. 
 
54 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 Lee, kneeled around the body and with loud cries 
 mourned their loss. 
 
 After this another ceremony was performed. A 
 paper sedan-chair, an imitation of the real ones in 
 which the Chinese ride, and four imitation chair- 
 bearers, or men to carry the sedan, made of paper, 
 were placed on the ground in front of the house, 
 and four cups of wine and eight small cakes — real 
 cups and wine and real bread — were put near them. 
 When all was ready for the ceremony Chi Lap set 
 fire to the paper men and sedan, while two priests 
 who were present recited a prayer, keeping time 
 with brass cymbals. 
 
 The people suppose that these paper men and 
 sedan-chairs, when burned, become spirit men and 
 chairs in the next world to carry the soul of the 
 one they mourn. The wine and bread are for the 
 use of the chair-bearers. They are expected to get 
 the spirit of the food in the other world. A paper 
 house with paper furniture, paper clothes and every- 
 thing that the soul was supposed to need in the 
 other world were burned also. 
 
 Lest the reader should grow tired of these cere- 
 monies, we will pass over the rest of them. 
 
 Little Choh Lin did not understand their mean- 
 ing, nor did he quite understand why his father was 
 put into the coffin. He had never seen so much 
 done at any other funeral, and could not see why it 
 should be done for his father. He asked his mother 
 if it was because his father did not worship the gods 
 
THE FUNERAL. 
 
 55 
 
 as much as other people that so much must be done 
 for him when dead. His mother told him that his 
 father was a good man, and because he was good 
 and had left money to do it with, they could have 
 so many ceremonies. 
 
 “But, mother,” asked the little fellow, “does not 
 my father grow tired of so many ceremonies ? I 
 would. He said, ‘ Let me sleep ’ when he died, 
 and the priests and people will not let him sleep. 
 Their noise will disturb him. Shall I tell them 
 to stop?” 
 
 “No, my boy,” said Mrs. Lee, “it will not dis- 
 turb him. Noise does not trouble spirits as it does 
 us. Besides, all this crying and mourning will tell 
 the spirits how much your father was loved and 
 how much he is missed now. They will think that 
 he was a great man in the world, and will treat him 
 with respect.” 
 
 “ Mother, if father was such a good man, why 
 must he die?” 
 
 “ I do not know, Choh Lin. It was the will of 
 heaven — heaven knows.” 
 
 “ Why could it not be the will of heaven that 
 some bad man should die ? There are many such 
 men.” 
 
 “Choh Lin must not ask such questions. We 
 cannot tell why heaven takes away good people 
 who are loved and leaves bad ones who are hated.” 
 
 “ What is heaven, mother ?” 
 
 “ I do not know. Heaven is above us, whence 
 
56 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 good things come; the sunshine, rain and other 
 good things live there.” 
 
 The Chinese often talk about heaven, yet when 
 asked where and what heaven is they seem, like 
 Mrs. Lee, to know very little about it. Perhaps 
 the first fathers of the Chinese learned from 
 prophets, or from the Bible, or from God himself, 
 that heaven is God’s home and the place where 
 every good is ; but when the people turned to idols 
 they lost nearly all the knowledge they had about 
 God and heaven. 
 
 When the body of the dead man was put into 
 the coffin the lid was fastened down tightly and 
 every part of the coffin made air-tight with cement. 
 Then, instead of burying the dead a few days after 
 death, the body was kept for a number of weeks in 
 the best room in the house. The Chinese keep their 
 dead so long before burial because they think that 
 it will seem like wanting to get rid of their friends 
 if they hurry the bodies off to the grave. They 
 regard it a disgrace to have the funeral too soon. 
 
 When the time came for Mr. Lee’s funeral, the 
 relatives and friends gathered at the house to join 
 the procession to the grave. No address was given, 
 no prayer offered, no hymn sung, because it was a 
 heathen funeral. The coffin was placed on a bier 
 carried by ropes fastened to poles that were borne 
 on the shoulders of men. An offering was then 
 made to a god in the hope that he would take care 
 of the soul of the man whom they were about to 
 
THE FUNERAL. 
 
 57 
 
 bury. After the offering the bearers took up the 
 bier and started for the grave. Before them went 
 men blowing instruments of music, and following 
 the coffin was a covered sedan-chair carried by two 
 men, in which was a little wooden tablet. After 
 the sedan came Choh Lin and Chi Lap on foot, 
 and Mrs. Lee and the grandmother riding in sedans. 
 Then came the rest of Mr. Lee’s family and his 
 friends on foot. All of these relatives were crying 
 and mourning with loud voices. For a few mo- 
 ments the noise would be less, then all would burst 
 into tears again and mourn louder than before. 
 
 Choh Lin and Chi Lap, as also their mother, 
 grandmother and sister, wore over their clothing 
 long coarse sackcloth cloaks of a grayish-white 
 color. These coats had hoods that covered the 
 heads all but a small part of the face, arid long 
 sleeves that almost hid the hands. Others of the 
 relatives wore these coats, but only the nearest 
 relatives wore the hoods. 
 
 The grave was on the side of a hill, and was 
 lined with cement. Into this grave the coffin was 
 lowered, and then, when all others had moved back, 
 Chi Lap came forward and bowed toward the coffin 
 three times until his face touched the ground. Next 
 came Choh Lin, then Mrs. Lee and the grand- 
 mother, afterward the daughter, and last the other 
 relatives, each in turn bowing with face to the 
 ground. 
 
 At the end of this ceremony of worshiping the 
 
58 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 dead, Chi Lap took the tablet that had been carried 
 in the sedan-chair, and, while all of the rest kneeled, 
 placed it at the head of the grave, and then, kneel- 
 ing too, he said, “ Let the flesh and the bones return 
 to the earth again, but let the spirit enter this tab- 
 let.” 
 
 The grave was closed with cement, and the 
 friends, taking the tablet in the sedan-chair again, 
 returned to the village. The tablet was placed in a 
 room in Mr. Lee’s house near those of his father 
 and grandfather. The Chinese suppose that one 
 spirit of the dead person at the grave enters this 
 tablet and lives there ; so they treat these little pieces 
 of wood as though they were real persons. They 
 place food and drink before them ; they offer incense 
 to them ; they worship the wood and pray to it : 
 they say, however, that they do not worship the 
 wood, but the spirit in it. So powerful do they 
 suppose a spirit becomes after death that sometimes, 
 when a man wishes to take terrible vengeance on an 
 enemy, he kills himself. He thinks if he is a spirit 
 that he can make his enemy suffer far more than if 
 he remained in the world in a body, 
 
 No one seems to know how the Chinese first got 
 the idea of worshiping the spirits of the dead. Very 
 many do not worship idols ; many laugh at the gods, 
 but none laugh at the worship of the spirits. There 
 are several stories told by the Chinese about the 
 first worship of the tablets, and we will give two 
 of them in a few words : 
 
Ancestral Tablet. 
 
 Page 58. 
 

THE FUNERAL. 
 
 59 
 
 More than two thousand years ago, as a noted 
 prince was traveling with some of his people 
 through a woods, all the food was eaten, and no 
 more could be got. One of the servants of this 
 prince — so the story goes — to save the great man’s 
 life cut a piece of flesh from his own thigh and had 
 it cooked for his master. The prince was saved, 
 but the poor man, unable to walk, was burned to 
 death by a fire that was kindled in the woods. The 
 prince afterward had a tablet made in memory of 
 his faithful servant, and to this he offered incense 
 and worship. 
 
 The other story is, that a little boy, who had been 
 very disobedient to his parents, afterward became 
 very good to them. His mother one day, when 
 taking food to him in the field, fell over a root of a 
 tree and hurt herself so badly that she died of it. 
 The boy took this root and made images of his 
 parents and worshiped them. Do you think the 
 Chinese foolish ? But they do not know any better. 
 Why? 
 
CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 CRUEL RELATIVES. 
 
 A FTER the funeral Choh Lin missed his father 
 very much. j While the body remained in the 
 house the little fellow seemed to think that the 
 dead man was asleep and would awake again ; but 
 now, since the room in which the coffin had stood 
 was empty, he longed very much to see his father. 
 Mr. Lee had been very fond of his sons, and Choh 
 Lin was his special favorite. It was not merely the 
 petting and the good things given him by his father 
 that the little boy missed; he wanted to see him 
 again because he loved him. 
 
 One day, shortly after the funeral, Choh Lin 
 asked, “ Mother, when will father come back? I 
 want to see 11101.” 
 
 “ He will not come back, Choh Lin,” replied the 
 mother. 
 
 “ Not come back at all ? Can I not have my 
 father any more?” 
 
 “No,” said Mrs. Lee; “you have no father now, 
 I no husband. He has left us alone.” 
 
 “ We are not alone, mother. You are here, I 
 am, Chi Lap is, and so are grandmother and my 
 sister; father only is gone. Where has he gone?” 
 
 60 
 
GRUEL RELATIVES. 
 
 61 
 
 “ He has gone away into the spirit-world, never 
 to come again to his family.” 
 
 “ Can I not see my father again ? Why did he 
 go and leave his little boy behind him ? Why did 
 he not take Choh Lin too? Can I go to him?” 
 
 “No, no, my little boy; you must stay with me. 
 You do not wish to die, do you ?” 
 
 “ What is it to die, mother ?” 
 
 “ It is to be put into a coffin and be buried in 
 the ground, and go alone into the gloomy desert of 
 the spirit-world, there to be without friends, cloth- 
 ing, food — without anything — unless people in this 
 life care for your wants.” 
 
 “ Has my father no home nor food where he is?” 
 
 “ No, none but what we give him.” 
 
 “Then if we do not take care of him he will be 
 hungry and will starve. Poor father ! What would 
 he do if we could not take care of him? What 
 will he do, and what will we do, when we die? If 
 no one should feed us in the spirit-world w r ould 
 we die?” 
 
 “No. Spirits cannot die. They shiver with 
 cold, they grow hungry and thirsty, they are lone- 
 ly, they starve, but cannot die.” 
 
 “ Mother, did father have more than one soul ?” 
 asked Chi Lap, who had just come into the room. 
 “'You say that his soul is in the spirit- world, yet 
 the soul at the grave came into the tablet that we 
 brought home with us.” 
 
 “ My boys,” said the mother, “ each body has 
 
62 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 more than one spirit — we do not know, surely, how 
 many : one goes into the dark world, another into 
 the tablet, and another stays at the grave. We can- 
 not see into the spirit-world.” 
 
 Not long after the burial of Mr. Lee the friends 
 and relatives of the dead man came, as they said, 
 “ to settle up his accounts with themselves.” As 
 her husband’s business had been so large, and Mrs. 
 Lee was unable to carry it on, or even to settle it, 
 she was glad to have help. But the men said that 
 they could attend to it without any help from her. 
 Each one knew how his own account stood, and all 
 of them together could arrange the whole very 
 easily. 
 
 Men whom Mr. Lee had helped in business came, 
 and, presenting bills, said that Mr. Lee owed them 
 large sums of money. Others to whom Mr. Lee 
 had lent money when asked for it said that he owed 
 them very much more than they owed him. These 
 knew that Mrs. Lee was not able to defend herself 
 or take care of her property, and that her boys 
 were too small yet to go to law with them ; so they 
 thought that it would be an easy way not only to 
 get rid of paying debts, but of getting part of Mr. 
 Lee’s property. 
 
 The relatives who had charge of the business 
 made these men give them a share of the money 
 which their bills demanded, and then settled with 
 them. Thus, instead of Mrs. Lee getting the 
 
CRUEL RELATIVES. 
 
 63 
 
 money that was owing her husband, she lost it 
 and more besides. In this way nearly all of the 
 money that Mr. Lee had left for his wife and chil- 
 dren was taken from them. 
 
 Men who had worked for Mr. Lee brought in 
 large accounts that they said had been unsettled for 
 many months. The relatives did not care to look 
 for receipts among Mr. Lee’s papers ; if these men 
 only gave them a large part of the money, the ac- 
 counts were paid. 
 
 When all had been paid, not only was the money 
 all gone, but much had been borrowed. These rel- 
 atives had lent it themselves or borrowed of others, 
 and they said that the property must be sold to pay 
 back this money. Mrs. Lee tried to stop them, and 
 said that they were cheating her and Mr. Lee’s chil- 
 dren. The men became very angry and threatened 
 to turn her and her children out of doors. Mr. 
 Lee’s property was theirs, they said ; they had ad- 
 vanced money to pay off his debts, and they meant 
 to have that money back again. Besides, Mr. Lee, 
 they said, had owed them for many years, and they 
 had waited for their pay until he was able to give 
 it. 
 
 Mrs. Lee saw that these men meant to rob her 
 of all her property in one way and another, and 
 that she had no one to help her ; so she determined 
 to take the control of her affairs in her own hands. 
 She tried to send the men away, but they would not 
 go ; she tried to take the business out of their con- 
 
64 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 trol, but they would not give it up ; she tried to 
 learn about the business, and even that they refused 
 to tell her. 
 
 There are laws in China, and officers of govern- 
 ment to see that these laws are obeyed, but a little 
 money given to these officers usually saves the of- 
 fender from punishment. There are roguery and 
 cheating in our own land, yet this is really the 
 place for honest people ; but rogues are as plenty in 
 China as honest men are here, and that means that 
 there are very many of them. 
 
 All that Mrs. Lee could do only made matters 
 worse. A woman in China has little hope of get- 
 ting her rights before the mandarins (Chinese offi- 
 cers), and very seldom does a woman appeal to them. 
 The only way that Mrs. Lee could take to drive 
 away these relations of her husband was to call on 
 her own father’s family to help her. They lived 
 far away from Tay Soa, and she was left to help 
 herself. The people in the village might have pitied 
 Mrs. Lee, but they said, “ It is not our business ; we 
 will only get into trouble ourselves by helping; 
 these men will bring a false charge against us to 
 the mandarins, and we will receive harm ourselves, 
 while Mrs. Lee will get no good.” So the poor 
 woman was left to the rascality of these men, who 
 took away all the property that Mr. Lee left his 
 family. 
 
 His boats were seized by these men, who pre- 
 tended to own them, or were sold to others to pay 
 
CRUEL RELATIVES. 
 
 65 
 
 the debts that it was said were on the property ; all 
 the rice in the rice-shop had been stolen by these 
 relatives; the lumber in the lumber-yard disap- 
 peared, no one seemed able to tell how; and several 
 rice-fields, his relatives said, belonged to their fam- 
 ily. In this way all the property, except the house 
 in which Mrs. Lee lived and the furniture, was taken 
 away, and she was left without anything to support 
 her family. 
 
 In her anxiety to save something for her family 
 Mrs. Lee partly forgot her grief at the loss of her 
 husband; and now that she must do something at 
 once to get food for her children, she had no time 
 to mourn. Unable to punish those who had robbed 
 her, the poor widow hated the unjust men all the 
 more. She determined to be revenged on them in 
 some way, and taught her boys not only to hate, but 
 to think of punishing, the men who had taken their 
 property. 
 
 One day, as the family at their scanty dinner 
 were talking of some way to “get even” with the 
 rogues, Mrs. Lee said to Choli Lin, “You can pray 
 your god to punish them. Ask him to send sick- 
 ness and death to their families — to make the rain 
 destroy their crops or the drought to kill their rice. 
 Ask him to send robbers to steal what they have 
 or to make the mandarins catch and shut them in 
 prison. Your god ought to take your part and 
 punish those who rob you.” 
 
 “You can pray to your father’s spirit to bring 
 5 
 
66 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 sickness and loss and death to their families,” added 
 the grandmother. 
 
 “ I do not believe that my father’s spirit would 
 do it,” replied Chi Lap. “ He would not let us 
 fight the boys who hurt us when he was alive, and 
 I do not believe that he will harm people now.” 
 
 “But you can pray him to help you get back the 
 property that those rogues stole from you.” 
 
 “ Can my father’s spirit help us, grandmother?” 
 asked Choh Lin. 
 
 “Certainly,” replied the grandmother. 
 
 “Then why must we give his spirit food, clothing 
 and other things?” inquired the child. 
 
 “ Because he does not know yet where to find such 
 things in the spirit-world,” answered the grand- 
 mother. “ But you need not ask many questions 
 now.” The old lady was afraid to hear the boys 
 ask questions about the spirit-world. The Chinese 
 believe so many foolish things that they do not like 
 to be catechised about their superstitious notions. 
 
 Mrs. Lee found it very hard to get food for her 
 family, and more than once not only she and the 
 grandmother, but the children too, were obliged to 
 go hungry to bed. She thought one day that she 
 would try to sell her large house and buy or rent a 
 small one, and have enough money left to support 
 her family for a long time. She asked a man if he 
 knew of any one who wanted to buy a house. This 
 soon came to the ears of the relatives who had rob- 
 bed her, and they were afraid that she would sell 
 
GRUEL RELATIVES. 
 
 67 
 
 and go away with the money ; so some of them 
 came at once to forbid her selling the property. 
 She had no right to do it, they said. Mrs. Lee 
 gave sharp answers in reply. They told her that 
 if she tried to sell they would at once drive her out 
 of the house and take it themselves. A few days 
 after they heard that she meant to dispose of the 
 place, and several came as soon as possible to “ see 
 about it.” The result of all was that they drove 
 Mrs. Lee and her family from the large house and 
 made her take a much smaller one that, they said, 
 belonged to Mr. Lee. The large one they took pos- 
 session of, as they professed, for Mr. Lee’s children. 
 
 But this did not end the cruelty of these men. 
 They wanted an excuse to keep the house. They 
 dared not rob any more. Besides, they were afraid 
 that if they took the house they might be obliged 
 to support the children and widow. Only one way 
 seemed open to them : they would have Mrs. Lee 
 marry again, and then as a wife in another family 
 they could say that since she had deserted Mr. Lee’s 
 relatives they were not obliged to care for her and 
 she had no right to his property. They knew that 
 if she did marry she would keep her children, and 
 then, on the plea that the children had been adopted 
 into another family, these relatives would claim the 
 property. 
 
 One day a number of Mr. Lee’s relatives came 
 to the house where Mrs. Lee was living and pre- 
 tended to be anxious about her welfare. They said 
 
68 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 it was a pity that her husband had left his business 
 in such a bad condition. They did not believe that 
 the men who settled it had done the very best with 
 the property, yet it was too late now to remedy that. 
 Nor was it just that those men should keep posses- 
 sion of the large house ; yet, as they were many and 
 had great influence, it would be safer to say little 
 about it now. They were only keeping the house 
 for the children ; as soon as the boys became men it 
 would be given back to them. Besides, that house 
 could not be sold out of the family; it stood not on 
 Mr. Lee’s ground, but on that belonging to the 
 whole family. They were poor themselves and un- 
 able to aid the widow, though they would gladly do 
 all in their power to help so good a woman. Grad- 
 ually thev turned the conversation until one of them 
 said to the other, “ If a young and rich man, good 
 enough, could be found to marry our sister here, 
 how fortunate it would be for her and her children, 
 who otherwise may suffer!” 
 
 “ Oh no,” said the other ; “ it would not do to 
 think of her marrying and leaving the family. We 
 cannot let her go.” 
 
 “But she need not leave our family,” replied the 
 first. “ She is too much one of us to be lost by 
 marrying again.” 
 
 In this way they tried to find out whether the 
 widow would be willing to marry; but as she said 
 nothing and acted as though she did not hear, ono 
 asked her what she thought of Ian’s plan. 
 
CRUEL RELATIVES. 
 
 69 
 
 “ What plan ?” asked Mrs. Lee. 
 
 “ Ian thinks that if you could find a good and 
 rich husband to take care of you and the children 
 it would save you a great deal of care and suffer- 
 ing,” replied the man. 
 
 “ I do not want a husband ; I never mean to 
 marry again. No woman can find more than one 
 good husband, and few find even one in this world. 
 Their father,” said Mrs. Lee, pointing to the boys, 
 “ was a good man. He was the only good one in 
 this place, or some one would have cared for a 
 widow who had no friends. N o, I wi 11 never have 
 a husband again.” 
 
 The men soon found that it was useless to talk 
 gently about her marrying, and they began to say 
 that she must get a husband. 
 
 “I have a husband, and I love him yet,” said 
 she firmly. “His body only is dead; his spirit 
 lives, and I will go to him some day, but it shall 
 not be from the house of a stranger.” 
 
 It was useless to reason with her about her chil- 
 dren. “I will take care of them,” said she, “if I 
 must give my life to do it. If we must starve, we 
 will starve together. Cruel relatives can then think 
 that they killed us; for what have they done but 
 rob his children of the food that he gathered? 
 Vengeance will come some day. If through the 
 skeleton gate of starvation we must go to the spirit- 
 world, we will come back again. The robbers of 
 the widow and fatherless will then find them- 
 
70 
 
 CHOII LIN. 
 
 selves robbed, and none can find that which will 
 then be taken away.” 
 
 The woman’s manner and words frightened some 
 of the men, and they were ready to let Mrs. Lee 
 take her own course. But two or three more des- 
 perate ones determined not to be baffled. They 
 would not let a woman conquer. They told her 
 that she must marry. She might as well yield first 
 as last, for they were men, and many too, while she 
 was only a woman, and one alone. 
 
 “ If I am only one and but a woman,” said Mrs. 
 Lee, “ there is one thing I can do : I can die a 
 widow.” 
 
 Angry beyond control at her determination, one 
 of the men caught up a heavy iron hoe and struck 
 Mrs. Lee on her bead. Without a word or a cry, 
 only uttering a low moan, the poor woman sank to 
 the floor. Pale, silent and motionless she lay there. 
 
 “She is dead, dead; you have killed her,” cried 
 the daughter. 
 
 “My child! my child! are you dead? are you 
 dead?” moaned the old grandmother as she bent 
 over Mrs. Lee. “Have I lost my last and best? 
 No, do not go. — O spirit of my child, come back ! 
 come back ! My light, go not out; leave me not in 
 darkness.” 
 
 When the men saw what had been done they 
 were frightened, and hurriedly left the house, and 
 as soon as possible the village. 
 
 For a moment Choh Lin looked at his mother, 
 
CRUEL RELATIVES. 
 
 71 
 
 then at his sister and grandmother, and when lie 
 saw them kneeling beside his mother and mourning 
 for her, he too began to ciy. Chi Lap’s first thought 
 was to strike the man who had struck his mother, 
 but as he saw them all run away he kneeled beside 
 his grandmother and asked, “ Is mother badly 
 hurt ?” He could not understand that death could 
 come so suddenly. 
 
 “Badly hurt, poor child?” said the grandmother. 
 “She is dead. You have no father, and now no 
 mother, and my last child is gone.” 
 
 “No, she is not dead,” replied Chi Lap. “See, 
 she moves ; she is alive. — Mother ! mother ! do not 
 die! do not leave us!” 
 
 Mrs. Lee was not dead, though very dangerously 
 wounded. For some time she was senseless, but 
 after the blood had been washed from the wound 
 and the injured woman laid on a bed, she slowly 
 recovered her senses. For several days it was un- 
 certain whether she would live or die, but, being a 
 strong, healthy woman, she passed the time of dan- 
 ger and gradually grew better. It was some weeks 
 before she was entirely well. 
 
CHAPTER IX. 
 
 SEEKING A LIFE-GIVING GOD. 
 
 T HE cruelty of these relatives made a great stir 
 in the village, though the mandarins took no 
 notice of it. Perhaps they thought that as Mrs. 
 Lee was poor they would get no money for punish- 
 ing her enemies. No one made complaint to them, 
 so that they were not obliged to attend to the matter. 
 If the officers in China took notice of every case 
 of cruelty, they would find far more to do than they 
 have now. 
 
 The elders of the village, however, felt that these 
 relatives had gone too far, and if not stopped might 
 actually murder the poor woman; so they forbade 
 the men abusing her any further, but allowed them 
 to keep their ill-gotten property. 
 
 The elders of a Chinese village have authority 
 something like that of parents in our country, 
 though they are not government officers. The rob- 
 bers knew that if they disobeyed the elders a com- 
 plaint would be made to the mandarins, and then 
 much of the stolen property must be surrendered to 
 save them from punishment. After this Mrs. Lee 
 
 72 
 
SEEKING A LIFE-GIVING GOD. 
 
 73 
 
 and her family were not troubled so much, though 
 by no means free from little annoyances. 
 
 Mrs. Lee was very grateful for her recovery, and 
 looked upon it as life from the dead. She believed 
 that some god had restored her to life. This god 
 she determined to find — to make him her own, and 
 then teach her fami-ly of him. But who was the 
 god ? Where was he worshiped ? What temple 
 had been built in his honor? Often she asked her- 
 self these questions, and in every way possible tried 
 to find out. She talked to her friends in the village 
 about her recovery, and told them that she believed 
 there was somewhere a greater god than she had 
 known before, who had brought her back to life 
 again. She asked them to tell all they knew of 
 the gods of their own and other countries, but they 
 could tell little more than she knew already. “Per- 
 haps,” said one, “ there is a greater god in our land 
 than we know, and he may be worshiped in some 
 temple far away from Tay Soa.” 
 
 She learned of a number of temples, some many 
 miles away. Saying nothing to others, she started 
 one morning alone to find one of these. It was a 
 long, weary walk, but when, near noon, she reached 
 the place, she found the same gods worshiped there 
 that she had known in Tay Soa. She prayed and 
 offered incense to them, yet in her heart felt that 
 they were not what she sought. At night she 
 reached home disappointed, though determined to 
 seek another temple, a larger one still, farther away, 
 
74 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 of which she had heard on her journey. She went 
 to this, too, to be disappointed. Though some of the 
 idols were different from those she had seen before, 
 yet after offering food, incense and prayer she left, 
 feeling that none of them had the spirit of the god 
 she longed to find. 
 
 In this way she went to temple after temple until 
 all within many miles of her home had been vis- 
 ited, yet nowhere did she find the life-giving god. 
 In her talks with the priests she asked what each 
 god did, and always asked if there were any who 
 could give life to the dead. Some gave one and 
 some another answer, but all said that none of the 
 gods whom they knew could restore the dead to 
 life, nor did they believe there were such gods in 
 China or in any other land. One priest said, 
 “There is no such thing as a dead person coming 
 to life again. Once dead, the body is dead for ever. 
 There is no god who can, or at least who will, bring 
 it back to life.” 
 
 “ There must be such a god,” she replied, “ for 
 I was killed, or so nearly killed that I must have 
 died had not some god unknown to me brought my 
 life back. There is such a god, and I am trying to 
 find him. I want to know where his temple is, that 
 I may go there to worship him. He gave life back 
 to me, and when I find him he shall have me and 
 all that I have.” 
 
 Some priests looked at her, then at each other, 
 with a look that seemed to say, “ The woman is 
 
SEEKING A LIFE-GIVING GOD. 
 
 75 
 
 crazy others told her that her search would be 
 vain. 
 
 Not only did she go to the temples of both of the 
 great religions of China — the Buddhist and the 
 Tauist — but tried to learn their doctrines and all 
 about the many gods of which they taught. Every- 
 where she met with the same disappointment. The 
 hungering, thirsting famine of soul, the anxious 
 longing to find the god who gave life, remained, 
 but of the god she could learn nothing. Wearied 
 with her search, she gradually came to believe that 
 there was no such god, or, if there were, that he had 
 hid himself so that none could find him. 
 
 An aged priest told her one day, “ I am an old 
 man and more learned than you ; I have studied 
 this long and carefully, and ought to know. I tell 
 you there is no better god than those we worship. 
 Our country is the oldest, wisest and best of the 
 world, and certainly has the best gods. If there 
 were better ones, the wise men who lived long ago 
 would have found out about them. But no learned 
 men, no books, nothing in the Middle Kingdom ” 
 (the Chinese name for their country), “ tells of other 
 gods.” 
 
 “Is all known?” asked Mrs. Lee; “is there 
 nothing new to learn?” 
 
 “ There is nothing new to learn about the gods,” 
 was the reply. 
 
 “But there are new things in the world — new 
 things to us, too,” answered Mrs. Lee. “ At every 
 
76 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 rise of the sun comes a new day. New years follow 
 the old ones ; new lives begin, and old die out and 
 are gone. Why may it not be that new gods are 
 born, or at least appear?” 
 
 “ None have appeared,” was the reply. 
 
 “ Perhaps we know none who have appeared, yet 
 they may have shown themselves elsewhere.” 
 
 “ If any gods better than those of the Middle 
 Kingdom live, they would surely show themselves 
 to our country. Gods, like men, seek the best lands 
 as their home. No, rest assured that the best gods 
 are those who have made our country their choice. 
 Other nations try to get our gods. For many years 
 there has been a class of foreigners in our country 
 who have pretended to bring in a new religion, but 
 they are merely copying* one of ours, the Buddhist. 
 But the copy is too poor; the gods are not deceived 
 by it. These foreigners intend to teach our people 
 this new religion, and hope by that means to win 
 the favor of the gods, but they have another object : 
 they wish to get money.” 
 
 “ Perhaps foreigners have better gods at home,” 
 suggested Mrs. Lee. 
 
 oo 
 
 “I don’t think so,” replied the old man. “If 
 they had they would have brought some of their 
 idols here for us to buy, or at least would have told 
 
 * There is a strong resemblance between the worship of the 
 Roman Catholics in China and that of the Buddhists. An ob- 
 server hardly knows which is copying, if either be taken from 
 the other, the similarity is so striking. 
 
SEEKING - A LIFE-GIVING GOD. 
 
 77 
 
 us about them. They have better ships, better 
 money, better cloth, better tools, better medicine; 
 they have better guns, too, than we. All these 
 they bring to sell to our people, but they never 
 bring any of their gods nor their religion to sell. 
 They would surely do it if they had better than 
 we. Indeed, they would bi'ing their religion to 
 sell if they had any.” 
 
 “ What ! have foreigners no gods at all ?” asked 
 Mrs. Lee in astonishment. 
 
 “ They have none,” replied the priest, “ except 
 that of which I tell you, and that is but a poor 
 copy of our own.” 
 
 “ Do they never worship, have they no temples, 
 no gods at all, in foreign countries?” inquired Mrs. 
 Lee. “ Then they are wretched indeed.” 
 
 “ I have not asked them, but others of our peo- 
 ple who have lived on their ships say that they 
 never worship any idol or spirit.” 
 
 “ Perhaps the men who come to our country are 
 the poor outcast ones of their country, who have 
 been driven away because they would not worship 
 the gods or spirits.” 
 
 “That may be,” replied the old priest thought- 
 fully : then, after a moment of silence, he continued, 
 “ No, that cannot be, for some men who have come 
 here were their mandarins and commanded their 
 large war-vessels. These did not worship either.” 
 
 “ Strange people they must be,” spoke Mrs. Lee, 
 half to herself, “to have nothing to worship! They 
 
78 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 must be like dogs or buffaloes. How much better 
 the Middle Kingdom is than those wretched foreign 
 countries ! But how can it be that they have no 
 gods? Who cares for them? Do they not serve 
 any being nor love anything ?” 
 
 “Yes'/’ replied the priest, with a change in his 
 look and tone; “they do serve something, and love 
 it more than any in our land do our gods. For- 
 eigners have a god ; they love him, too, with all 
 their hearts, and give all they have to his service. 
 It is for this god they leave their country and come 
 here.” 
 
 “ What do you mean ?” asked Mrs. Lee, not un- 
 derstanding the priest’s words. “You said they 
 have no gods, and now you tell me that they have 
 one whom they love and faithfully serve.” 
 
 “Oh,” answered the old man, “the god of whom 
 I speak is known and worshiped in China too. 
 The people know and worship him, while the man- 
 darins serve him faithfully.” 
 
 “ Is it the emperor?” inquired she. 
 
 “ No,” was the reply. “ I will show you one of 
 their gods ;” and he showed her a silver dollar. 
 “This is the god of the foreigners; for this they 
 live — for this they make war, enslave and murder 
 nations.” 
 
 “ What do you mean ?” asked Mrs. Lee, looking 
 at the priest with astonishment. 
 
 “ I mean that some years ago, when our emperor 
 forbade the smoking and buying of opium, and or- 
 
SEEKING A LIFE-GIVING GOD. 
 
 79 
 
 deretl that none should be brought into the country, 
 then foreigners made war on us. They had better 
 guns, soldiers and ships than ours, and forced the 
 emperor to allow the opium to be sold — forced our 
 country to buy that which makes slaves of a people 
 and destroys a nation. Foreigners did it, but not 
 because they love opium — they do not use it them- 
 selves — but did it because they love silver. For 
 silver they would ruin any people.” 
 
 This, it must be remembered, was in the early 
 days of Protestant missions in China, when very 
 little had yet been heard about the true God. 
 Though Roman Catholics had been for many years 
 in the country, it is possible that many who had 
 heard of their doctrines thought, as did the priest, 
 that they were merely poor copies of Buddhism 
 and schemes for getting money from the people. 
 
 At length Mrs. Lee gave up her search, but not 
 her longing, to find the god who gives life. One 
 day she told her mother-in-law of the vain search. 
 
 “Are not the gods of the village good enough?” 
 asked the old lady. “ They are for me ; they were 
 for your husband, for his father and for his ancestors 
 before him. Why should they not be good enough 
 for you ?” 
 
 “ But these gods do not give life,” answered Mrs. 
 Lee. “ I want to find the one who gave back the 
 life to me that our cruel relatives took away. I 
 want to make an offering to him and to serve him. 
 Oh, where is such a god to be found ?” 
 
80 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “ There is none,” was the reply. “ Yon were not 
 dead. If one dies there is is no coming back again 
 to life. You were almost dead, but our gods saved 
 you that you might take care of your children. 
 Don’t anger them now by seeking some other god, 
 but give them your thanks. We have nothing else 
 to give,” she added in a lower tone. “ Do not show 
 such ingratitude as to forsake them for some un- 
 known god, who neither has done you a kindness 
 nor knows about you.” 
 
 The children at first knew little about Mrs. Lee’s 
 search. She told Choh Lin one day that she had 
 been looking for the god who had brought her back 
 to life again. 
 
 “ I can tell you where that god is,” said he ; “ it 
 is my god. You gave me to him and taught me to 
 serve him, and so he brought life back to you that 
 you may take care of me. When we are rich again 
 I mean to make him a great feast.” 
 
 Mrs. Lee did not care to destroy Choh Lin’s faith 
 in his god, and said nothing in reply. Gradually 
 her desire to find another god passed away. She 
 thought that perhaps it was true that the gods of 
 her own country had been her friends, yet not one 
 of these was the god she wanted. 
 
CHAPTER X. 
 
 POVERTY. 
 
 FTER recovering from her wound, Mrs. Lee 
 
 -TX learned how poor she was. Besides herself, 
 she had her two boys, her daughter and mother-in- 
 law to support, and neither money nor property 
 with which to do it. The mother-in-law was too 
 old and the boys were too young to do much, and it 
 was contrary to Chinese custom for girls of the age 
 of her daughter to do any work except such as 
 could be done at home. Mrs. Lee had only her 
 own strength on which to depend. She was able to 
 work, but there are always in China more willing 
 and able to work than there is work for them to 
 do. Whatever faults the Chinese have, laziness is 
 not one of them. Most of the people are anxious 
 to earn a living: if a chance is given. Work is 
 scarce and wages are low. An ordinary day-laborer 
 thinks he receives good pay if he can get one hun- 
 dred cash (or less than ten cents) a day. It is true, 
 the common kinds of food are cheap, but a family 
 of five must live very poorly to be supported on 
 the wages of one laboring-man. The wages of a 
 woman are even less. 
 
 81 
 
82 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 During Mrs. Lee’s illness debts for food had been 
 incurred ; these must be paid. So, when able to 
 work, she found herself with debts, but no money 
 and almost without food. The poor woman had no 
 time to mourn over her misfortune, nor could she 
 give the time she wished to the search for the life- 
 giving god. When there was work she could not 
 leave it even for this object, and when there was 
 nothing to do she seldom felt willing to go to the 
 distant temples, because obliged to take a present 
 for the god whose temple she visited : she was too 
 poor to give more than the commonest present. 
 
 It was not unusual for Mrs. Lee to be several 
 days at a time without work, and more than once 
 the last cash was spent and the last bit of food 
 eaten. At such times she would go away from the 
 house, and where none noticed her would sit down 
 to weep. Sometimes, if a little food were left, she 
 would go away before meal-time, pretending that 
 some business called, and stay away in the hope 
 that the rest would eat before she returned. If 
 they waited, she told them on her return that she 
 had eaten enough, and they must take what food 
 there was at home. Little Choh Lin at such times 
 coaxed his mother to take some food, refusing to 
 eat until she did. His coaxing would make her 
 pretend to eat, though she seldom took more than 
 a little morsel. 
 
 Not often nor long at a time during the first year 
 of her poverty did Mrs. Lee’s family lack food. 
 
POVERTY. 
 
 83 
 
 Unable to buy a large quantity at a time, she must 
 pay a much larger price and buy the cheapest kinds 
 of food. Choh Lin hardly knew how meat tasted, 
 and seldom ate fish, though fish are usually so plen- 
 tiful and cheap along the coasts and rivers of China. 
 Only now and then could the family have a dish of 
 rice, and when they had it Choh Lin said it was 
 “ Om, om,” that is, “ Water-rice, water-rice/’ — 
 meaning that the rice was so much mixed with 
 water as to seem mostly water. 
 
 While rice is eaten by all the Chinese who can 
 afford it, there are many kinds of food much 
 cheaper, and the poor people must eat many a meal 
 without tasting rice. When they do have it, it is 
 often cooked until it becomes what they call “ om,” 
 — that is, rice very soft and almost dissolved in 
 water, like a thin starch. The poorer the people 
 the more water is mixed with their rice. Sweet 
 potatoes form one of the most plentiful foods of 
 Southern China. These are watery and stringy, or 
 woody. In China, or at least in the southern part, 
 they do not usually plant white potatoes, though a 
 few small ones are raised for the use of foreigners. 
 Beans, leeks, and a vegetable very much like our 
 radish, though without sharpness, are cultivated 
 and eaten by the poorer people, while melon-seeds 
 and seeds of other vegetables, together with almost 
 anything eatable, help to keep them from starvation. 
 Nothing is wasted in China. The parts of fish and 
 animals that even the poorest in our country would 
 
84 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 throw away are carefully saved and eaten by the 
 poor. The old pictures of Chinese selling rats and 
 puppies for food may never be a reality in that 
 country, yet the writer knows, from what he has 
 seen, that rats and other animals not more desirable 
 are eaten by some of the people. In times of fam- 
 ine, and even when famine does not distress them, 
 the poor gather potato-leaves and weeds, which they 
 cook and eat. 
 
 The country near the coast is overcrowded with 
 people, and, though the land is fertile and the Chi- 
 nese are good farmers, and though, as there is no 
 winter and scarcely any frost, the land in the south- 
 ern part produces two and sometimes as many as 
 four crops a year, yet there is scarcely ever a time 
 when some people are not starving there. 
 
 Choh Lin learned what it is to live on poor food. 
 If the two boys were unable to earn much by work, 
 they helped their mother in other ways. A hungry 
 boy will do a great deal to get something to eat, and 
 a boy who loves his friends will do more to keep 
 them from suffering. These two little fellows were 
 hungry, and they loved their mother, sister and 
 grandmother; they willingly did what they could 
 to provide for the wants of the family. 
 
 As Mrs. Lee was too poor to buy fuel, the boys 
 were compelled to hunt wood. They could not 
 pick up sticks along the roadside, since there are no 
 roads in Southern China, only paths; nor could they 
 gather up broken and useless pieces of fence, as 
 
POVERTY. 
 
 85 
 
 there are no fences ; nor yet could they go to the 
 woods and gather dead limbs or parts of fallen trees, 
 for there are not many woods, and single trees are 
 scarce; even fruit trees are not plenty. These and 
 the great banians scattered here and there over the 
 country are not allowed to be cut for fire-wood. 
 Fortunately, the people need little fuel except for 
 cooking, as they keep warm by putting on more 
 clothes rather than by making fires in the chilly 
 weather of winter. The boys did, however, have 
 two ways to get fuel. They lived near a bay of 
 the ocean, and sometimes wood drifted ashore. For 
 this they, with other children, eagerly watched. 
 The smallest sticks were picked up, and he who 
 could find a large one thought himself fortunate. 
 As many other children went to the shore for the 
 same purpose, Choh Lin and his brother very often 
 found not a bit of wood. Each one tried to be at 
 the water in the morning long before sunrise, and 
 even before daylight, because the first there of 
 course had the best chance for wood. Often the 
 two brothers were roused from a sound sleep long 
 before daylight to go down to the shore for fuel. 
 They begged hard to be allowed to sleep a little 
 longer, saying that the other children did not get 
 up so early, and promising to go soon if they might 
 take a little nap. The grandmother, who usually 
 called them, would not listen to these appeals, but 
 forced the little fellows to go at once, lest others 
 should be at the shore first. Once or twice they 
 
86 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 were permitted to lie still for a while, but as they 
 came back each time without a particle of fuel, the 
 old lady learned that if they were to have anything 
 with which to cook their food the boys could take 
 no morning nap. 
 
 The other way of getting fuel was to take bags 
 and a heavy hoe and go along the paths, and wher- 
 ever they dared to dig up grass by the roots, and, 
 shaking off the earth, to lay it out to dry. When 
 ready to return they gathered up the partly-dried 
 grass, put it into their bags and carried it home. 
 Here it was laid out again in the sun, and when 
 thoroughly dried was stored away for fuel. 
 
 Choh Lin and Chi Lap were also obliged to hunt 
 for food. Any remnant of fish or meat that had 
 been thrown away by others, if at all fit to eat, was 
 carried home and cooked. At low tide they gathered 
 small shellfish, shrimps and whatever else might be 
 eaten. On the rocks in the water were tiny oysters. 
 With a little cup and a pointed piece of iron the 
 two boys would go at low tide along the rocks hunt- 
 ing for oysters. Most of the other children of Tay 
 Soa went too, so that Choh Lin and his brother did 
 not bring home much. They were thankful to 
 bring home anything. 
 
 In China small boys learn that it is not the best 
 thing in the world to be small. If the brothers 
 found a good place, larger boys would drive them 
 away and get the oysters themselves; sometimes they 
 would even take what they had gotten by hard 
 
POVERTY. 
 
 87 
 
 work. Many a struggle did the brothers have in 
 their efforts to get food, and it not unfrequently hap- 
 pened that, coming home with empty oyster-cups, 
 they found nothing at all to eat. They bore the 
 privation as well as possible, seldom finding fault, 
 for they saw that the others were hungry too. 
 
 One day, as the boys were coming home from a 
 vain search for both wood and oysters, Choh Lin 
 asked, “ Why is it, Chi Lap, that you and I, who 
 once had plenty, must now be hungry so often?” 
 
 “ I don’t know,” answered Chi Lap, “ but I know 
 that it is very hard to be hungry half of the time.” 
 
 “ Do you know that I think it is because the gods 
 have forgotten us,” said Choh Lin. “ They used 
 to give us all we wanted.” 
 
 “If they have forgotten us,” replied the older 
 brother, “ they are not good gods. Gods who take 
 care of people when they are rich and forget them 
 as soon as they are poor are little better than beg- 
 gars. What is the use of worshiping them if they 
 do us no good ?” 
 
 “ They do do us good,” spoke Choh Lin, “ but 
 we have not worshiped in the temples as we used 
 to do ; and it may be that the gods have forgotten 
 us because they don’t see us any more.” 
 
 “ Then they have no business to be gods,” an- 
 swered Chi Lap, half angrily. “ We remember 
 our friends, though we don’t see them for a long 
 time ; and a god who cannot do as much as we is 
 not worth having.” 
 
88 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 “ You must not talk so, Chi Lap,” said the 
 younger brother earnestly. “ Grandmother says it 
 is wrong, and that we are already suffering because 
 we don’t worship in the temples.” 
 
 “ Oh, grandmother is old and she forgets. If 
 the gods treat us in this way after all our worship 
 and feasts and presents, then they are gods who will 
 get nothing from me.” 
 
 “ Grandmother and mother think that they are 
 good, or why does mother go to one temple after 
 another to worship them ?” 
 
 “ Shall I tell you why, Choh Lin ? No one has 
 told me, but I know it. Mother is not satisfied 
 with the gods since we became so poor, and she is 
 looking for a better one : she calls it a life-giving 
 god, but people say there is no such god. I think 
 that she will soon stop going to the temples ; she 
 don’t go nearly as often as she used to.” 
 
 “ That is because she is too busy, and also too 
 tired when work is done. I am tired too when we 
 have done hunting wood and oysters.” 
 
 “ So am I tired ; and, more than that, I don’t 
 want to go to the temple, nor do I mean to go any 
 more, unless the gods treat us better. They took 
 the good things we gave them when we had plenty, 
 and now, when we have nothing, they let us suffer. 
 Father did not think very much of them before he 
 died. He only gave them things because mother 
 and grandmother said he must, and because he was 
 afraid the gods might hurt him if he did not. That 
 
POVERTY. 
 
 89 
 
 is the way many other men feel, I know ; I have 
 heard them talk. If other men need not worship, 
 I don’t mean to.” 
 
 Chi Lap had learned, as many other boys are 
 learning from the men in China, to care very little 
 for idol-worship, while Choh Lin had not yet gone 
 beyond the teachings of his mother and grand- 
 mother. Women are the idolaters and teachers of 
 idolatry in China, while men, as a rule, only wor- 
 ship the idols ®when they hope to gain something 
 by the practice. 
 
 Choh Lin did not give up the idea that the gods 
 had forgotten him. The more he thought of what 
 Chi Lap had said, the more difficult it was to un- 
 derstand why the gods should forget him. It 
 seemed to him unkind in them to desert him when 
 he most needed their help. “ Mother,” said he one 
 day, “ did not you teach me that I belong to the 
 god whose name I wear?” 
 
 “ Yes,” was the answer. 
 
 “ Didn’t you say that the god would take care of 
 me if I served him faithfully?” 
 
 “ Yes,” replied the mother, more hesitatingly, 
 “and probably he will, after a while. He may be 
 trying you now. But remember that you have not 
 cared for your god of late ; you hardly ever go to 
 the temple, and it would not be strange if the god 
 should neglect you, since you neglect him.” 
 
 “Don’t he know that I am poor, and must hunt 
 oysters and pick up wood, and have not time to 
 
90 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 worship ? If I am caring for you and grand- 
 mother, that saves his doing it.” 
 
 “ That is true,” replied Mrs. Lee, “ and — and — 
 But I think you should not forget to worship in 
 the temple.” 
 
 “ If I am busy, and doing right too, why should 
 my own god forget me? Will he not continue to 
 take care of me unless I keep giving him presents?” 
 
 “ Certainly he will,” replied the grandmother, 
 who saw that Mrs. Lee hesitated. 
 
 “ Why, then, is it,” asked the little boy, “ that 
 as soon as I stop worshiping and giving presents he 
 stops showing me favors ?” 
 
 “ He has not stopped,” replied the old lady. 
 “ You are alive and well now ; you have a home 
 and friends and something to eat. Some day, if 
 you are faithful to him, no doubt your god will 
 give you great favors again. He has only let you 
 lose a few things, and still gives you many.” 
 
 “Why did he let me lose anything?” asked the 
 child. “I was careful to serve him; why should 
 he not take better care of me ? Many boys in Tay 
 Soa, who never go to the temple unless on feast- 
 days, have far more than we have. It seems to 
 me that we don’t get much good from serving the 
 gods.” 
 
 “ Oh, Choh Lin, you must not speak so ; it is 
 veiy wrong,” replied the grandmother. “ I am 
 afraid that the gods will punish you for such 
 words.” 
 
POVERTY. 
 
 91 
 
 “If they punish him for speaking so,” spoke 
 Chi Lap, who had quietly listened, “ they will only 
 do what they have done to him for his doing right.” 
 
 “ My son, you are speaking very badly,” said 
 Mrs. Lee. “ We must not serve the gods for what 
 we can get ; we must do it for what they have done 
 for us.” 
 
 “ That is what I think, mother,” replied the older 
 brother. “ They have let us lose our property, so 
 that we have nothing to serve them with ; and the 
 way for us to do is to let the gods take care of 
 themselves.” 
 
 The two women saw that it was useless to argue 
 with Chi Lap. Their only hope was to keep Choh 
 Lin from becoming as indifferent to the gods as his 
 older brother was. 
 
CHAPTER XI. 
 
 THE FAMINE. 
 
 TAROUGHTS and famines are not rare in 
 J-"' Southern China. The rainy season usually 
 ends in May or June. After that, until autumn, 
 and sometimes until February, rain seldom falls. 
 But if storms come they are frequently fearful in 
 violence, as well as in the amount of rain that falls 
 in a few hours. It is during this season of the 
 year that the typhoons, as they are called in China 
 (hurricanes), come. These storms may last only a 
 few hours, rarely more than a day, yet during one 
 of them as much as six inches of rain has been 
 known to fall. The typhoons do not come regu- 
 larly ; occasionally several years go by without one, 
 and again there will be several in a year. 
 
 If the rainy season passes without much rain 
 foiling or lasts much less than three months, famine 
 may follow. Since the country is so full of people, 
 the failure of a single crop produces want, and 
 when the two, three, and even four, crops of a year 
 foil, there is certain to be great suffering. Provis- 
 ions are not stored up in China by large dealers as 
 in America, uor does China buy much food from 
 
 92 
 
THE FAMINE. 
 
 93 
 
 foreign countries. Of late years, however, since 
 Choh Lin became a man, foreign merchants in 
 times of scarcity buy great quantities of food else- 
 where and sell it to the people. Thus foreigners 
 have prevented much suffering, and yet have made 
 themselves rich. 
 
 The rice-fields of China are level spots of ground 
 surrounded by a small embankment a few inches 
 high and wide. The fields vary in size, from a 
 small part of an acre to several acres. These fields 
 are always near a stream, spring or well, from 
 which is taken the water to flood them when the 
 crop is growing. Usually, a number of rice-fields 
 are together, and the one nearest the water is flooded 
 first; when that is full the water is allowed to flow 
 into the next, and so on until all are covered. Some- 
 times a little canal is made between the fields, and 
 this being kept full of water and openings made in 
 the banks of the fields along which it passes, the 
 water runs in, and thus keeps each one full. The 
 ground is usually ploughed and harrowed or raked 
 when very wet or even partly under water, and the 
 young rice-plants are set in the ground when it is 
 flooded. A newly-planted rice-field is a pretty 
 sight, with the tiny spears of green rising in regular 
 rows from the sheet of quiet water. Nor does the 
 beauty grow less when the tall rice, swaying with 
 the wind, seems like green waves rising and falling 
 in an almost hidden sea of silver. Many fields are 
 made by terracing the hillsides, the smallest being 
 
94 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 the highest, so that they appear like great green 
 steps on the hills, growing smaller and smaller as 
 they ascend. Of course there are none of these on 
 hillsides that have not a spring above them. Usu- 
 ally, there are rice-fields on the banks of the rivers, 
 from which the water to flood them is taken. This 
 is pumped up by a sort of endless-chain pump 
 worked by men’s feet. 
 
 When Choh Lin was seven years old there did 
 not fall as much rain as usual in the spring, and 
 with the early summer came a drought. The first 
 crop of rice planted in April grew well for a few 
 weeks, and then the water began to fail. The fields 
 farthest away from spring and brook were shut off 
 from the supply. Field after field was in this way 
 deprived of water and the growing rice left to die. 
 While near the failing water the fields remained 
 green, farther away they grew yellow, ripening 
 straw, but no rice. Soon there were great barren 
 patches from which the half-grown rice had been 
 gathered by the disappointed farmers. Daily the 
 people watched the sky, hoping for some sign of 
 rain. Clouds now and then appeared and raised 
 their drooping spirits, but passed away. The farm- 
 ers went to the temples and prayed for rain. With 
 empty hands, but full hearts, they gathered in the 
 temples and begged the idols not to let them and 
 their children starve. They gave their meagre of- 
 ferings, hoping to buy what the gods were unwilling 
 to give ; but all in vain. Day after day the sun 
 
THE FAMINE. 
 
 95 
 
 poured his rays upon the parched earth until the 
 dreary summer wore away. 
 
 A few sheaves of ripened rice had been gathered 
 here and there near the springs and streams, while 
 the other fields had produced nothing but empty 
 straw. The farmers had watched the growth of the 
 other crops, hoping that these would live until rain 
 came ; but they saw the leaves of the sweet potatoes 
 curl up and the beans die, and thus crop after crop 
 failed. The people dug up the small potatoes and 
 ate them. The poor gathered the withered potato- 
 vines and cooked them to stay the cravings of hun- 
 ger. When the time for planting the second crop 
 of rice came in June or July, there was no water 
 for flooding the fields. The whole country was 
 parched. 
 
 Around the failing springs and wells the thirsty 
 ones gathered. Well after well sent back empty 
 the bucket dipped to its lowest depth ; one spring 
 after another dried up ; the brooks failed, and only 
 in the large streams was water to be found. At 
 night the poor people gathered around the few deep 
 wells containing a little water. Each waited his 
 turn, and some remained until morning before they 
 could get a portion, as the water would soon be ex- 
 hausted, and they must wait for a fresh supply to 
 run in. Even this resource soon almost entirely 
 failed. The owners of the wells, finding them 
 empty in the morning, shut and locked them. At 
 times the locks were broken and the scant supply 
 
96 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 of water taken. Sometimes the stillness of the 
 night was broken by the angry words of men fight- 
 ing for water. 
 
 Many poor families suffered, and so did Mrs. 
 Lee’s. She could earn no money. Even had she 
 had money, food was so scarce that it would have 
 taken a small fortune to support a family in China. 
 Begging around Tay Soa was useless, for most of 
 the people were little better than beggars. Day 
 after day Chi Lap and Choh Lin, with their little 
 baskets, wandered wearily over the country, hunt- 
 ing for weeds or something that might do for food. 
 They watched the tides on the shore, and gathered 
 all the oysters they could, as well as other shellfish. 
 In this way the two boys did much to keep their 
 family from starving. 
 
 This struggle for life was a long and hard one, 
 and it often seemed that more than one of the fam- 
 ily must die before it ended. Chi Lap, older and 
 stronger, was better able to endure hunger; Choh 
 Lin grew thin and seemed wasting away. 
 
 One day their mother and grandmother were 
 talking of their suffering, when Mrs. Lee said, “If 
 there were only four instead of five mouths to feed 
 we might live, but if we continue in this way I fear 
 that little Choh Lin, the weakest, will die. There 
 seems only one way to save his life : we ljjust give 
 him away to some rich man. He is such a nice 
 loving boy that many will be glad to have him.” 
 
 Chi Lap overheard his mother, and cried, “Oh, 
 
THE FAMINE. 
 
 97 
 
 mother, do not give Choh Lin away. He is only 
 a little boy ; it doesn’t take much to feed him. We 
 must keep him. He is the little one ; if he is gone 
 we shall all be lonely and our hearts will die. We 
 cannot let him go; if we must starve, let us all 
 starve together. But better times will come.” 
 
 Again and again did Mrs. Lee talk of giving her 
 little boy away, and as often was she persuaded by 
 her older son to keep the little one. 
 
 Choh Lin became too weak to accompany his 
 older brother in the searches for food. One day 
 his mother took the little fellow to the temple to 
 pray for rain and for food. Kneeling before the 
 idol, the child lifted up his skeleton hands and 
 pleaded that the god would not forget and leave 
 them to starve. When they were slowly walking 
 back the child asked, “ Mother, do you think the 
 gods will let us starve?” 
 
 “ I don’t know,” was her reply. “ I hope not, 
 yet others are starving and dying around us. If 
 the famine keep on much longer, I fear we must 
 all die.” 
 
 “ If we only had some money to make offerings 
 to my god and give him a feast, I am sure he would 
 keep us from starving. I believe he loves me and 
 wants to take care of me, but it may cost so much 
 that the gods cannot do it for nothing.” 
 
 Mrs. Lee gave her little son a look of surprise, 
 but said nothing, though his remark made her think, 
 and she asked herself, “ Can it be true that the gods 
 7 
 
98 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 care only for the rich and not for the poor? Is 
 there no god who cares for people without expecting 
 something for it? We are taught that the gods 
 care for those who make them presents; even the 
 god of the beggars is their friend because they offer 
 him part of what they get.” 
 
 One day Chi Lap came in with a quick step, and 
 in a cheerful voice said, “Oh, mother, the famine 
 will soon end now. The great mandarins have or- 
 dered a procession to the temples to pray for rain. 
 All the mandarins and nobles are to go there and 
 ask the gods to bring the famine to an end. A 
 proclamation has been made forbidding the people 
 to take life, to kill any animals. The mandarins 
 say that the gods are angry at the people for shed- 
 ding blood, and therefore withhold the rain.” 
 
 “ Have we shed any blood ?” asked Choh Lin. 
 
 “No, child,” answered his grandmother; “we 
 are too poor, and have nothing, no goat nor even 
 a chicken, whose blood we might shed.” 
 
 “ Well, I am glad the gods are not angry at us, 
 then,” said the little fellow. 
 
 “ Yet they make us suffer as much as those who 
 have shed blood,” replied Chi Lap. 
 
 “We are all alive,” spoke the grandmother, 
 “ while others have died. How do you know but 
 that the gods are taking care of us, while they can- 
 not help our suffering from the famine that they 
 must send upon others?” 
 
 “ Well, I know what I’d do if I had my way,” 
 
THE FAMINE. 
 
 99 
 
 said Chi Lap. “ The gods make people suffer : I’d 
 make the gods suffer. I would just throw their 
 idols out of doors. If they will not do anything 
 without pay, and then punish a lot of people for 
 what one does, they ought to be punished them- 
 selves. How can people help shedding blood some- 
 times? They must live and eat meat too.” 
 
 “ Chi Lap ! Chi Lap !’’ spoke the grandmother, 
 “be still with your wickedness. The gods will 
 punish, and maybe kill us all, for what you say.” 
 
 “ Grandmother, I am only saying what I have 
 heard men say,” replied the boy. “If I am so 
 wicked, they must be, yet the gods do not punish 
 them.” 
 
 “ Perhaps the gods have sent this very drought 
 because of their wickedness,” replied the grand- 
 mother. “ When I was a child we never heard 
 such things said of the gods. Then every one 
 spoke of them in reverence, and men worshiped as 
 well as women. Now people speak ill of the gods. 
 Some great calamity will surely come to our nation 
 for this.” 
 
 Although the procession was made in the city, 
 the drought and famine continued for months, nor 
 did they stop until the rainy season of the following 
 spring. 
 
CHAPTER XII. 
 
 THE DOGS. 
 
 rTIHE boys had kept their dogs after the property 
 was taken. From being plump and fat, the 
 creatures became lean as the dogs of the street. The 
 boys tried to save some of their own food to give 
 their pets, but Mrs. Lee forbade this, and threatened 
 to have the animals killed if Chi Lap and Choh 
 Lin gave them food. 
 
 Some of the neighbors, who knew that the boys 
 did not have enough to eat, asked, “Why do not 
 you kill and eat your dogs? Kill them, cook them. 
 Dog-meat is better than beggar’s meat” (hunger). 
 
 “ We will not kill our dogs,” answered Chi Lap; 
 “ they are too good. If they did not forsake us 
 when we needed them, we will not forsake them 
 when they need us.” 
 
 When Choh Lin understood what was meant he 
 ran to his own dog, and, throwing his arms around 
 his neck, said, “ No, Kailo, we will not kill you. I 
 will keep you until I am a man; then I will feed 
 you enough to make you fat again.” 
 
 Each morning, when the boys started on their 
 errands after fuel or food before the drought began, 
 
 100 
 
THE DOGS. 
 
 101 
 
 the (logs accompanied them. No matter how early 
 the little fellows started, the dogs were at the door 
 to welcome and go with them to the shore or field. 
 Until the famine began the animals managed to 
 find food enough to keep from actual starvation, 
 but with the scarcity the poor creatures grew thin 
 as skeletons and were unable to run as once they 
 did. If the dogs or the boys were fortunate enough 
 to find anything that could be eaten, the poor brutes 
 devoured it as though afraid the little would grow 
 less for every second it remained uneaten. What- 
 ever the boys found fit to eat, and that they could 
 possibly do without, they gave to the dogs. Often 
 much of the time spent in hunting for wood was 
 really spent in searching for something with which 
 to feed the starving brutes. 
 
 The dogs seemed to understand the feeling of 
 their young masters and gratefully took the little 
 food given. Had they been like the street-dogs of 
 China, they would not only have stolen something 
 to eat wherever they could find it, but might have 
 attacked each other or have tried to kill and eat 
 their young masters. Naturally gentle, affectionate 
 and obedient, starvation did not change the nature 
 of the faithful brutes. Sometimes Choh Lin, sit- 
 ting down in the sand on the shore, would take his 
 dog between his knees, and, looking into his eyes, 
 would try to encourage him with a hope of better 
 times: “ Poor Kailo ! you won’t be thin and hun- 
 gry then, will you? No, old dog, you’ll have 
 
102 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 enough then ; and it won’t be bits and bones, either, 
 but you’ll have rice and fish and meat — good meat, 
 too. Won’t that be good, old dog?” 
 
 The affectionate creature looked into the face of 
 his master as if he understood all and only lacked 
 words to answer. Tenderly he would lick the bare 
 arm resting on his neck or rest his head against the 
 boy’s knee, while he looked wistfully into the thin 
 face before him. 
 
 One morning the boys missed their dogs; not 
 daring to call loudly, lest other boys should hear 
 and hurry to get first to the shore, the brothel’s 
 hastened to the water, expecting to find their dogs 
 waiting for them on their return. But no dogs ap- 
 peared as they came home, nor had any of the family 
 seen them. Calling did not bring them; so the boys 
 started on a search for the animals. After looking 
 a long time and calling often, they heard the low 
 bark or cry of a dog. Running to the place whence 
 the sound came, they found Chi Lap’s dog lying 
 stretched out and dead, while the faithful Ivailo lay 
 beside him. The poor fellow wagged his tail fee- 
 bly, as if to welcome his young master, and then in 
 a low moan seemed to try to tell that his friend was 
 dead. Sorrowfully the boys kneeled beside the dead 
 brute and mourned as though he were a brother. 
 Looking up through his tears, Choli Lin said, “ We 
 have but one dog now, Chi Lap ; he is only half 
 mine, the other half is yours. Ivailo is our dog 
 now. We will take care of him — won’t we, Chi 
 
THE DOGS. 
 
 103 
 
 Lap?” And then, taking Kailo’s head between his 
 hands, the little fellow said, “You must not die; 
 we cannot do without you, Kailo.” 
 
 When the first burst of sorrow was over the boys 
 talked about what had caused the death of the dog, 
 not thinking that he had died from hunger. 
 
 “ He always was a good dog,” said Chi Lap, 
 “and when his soul is born again into another 
 body, it will not be as a dog. I think he will be 
 even better than a girl. He’ll be a boy like you 
 and me, Choh Lin.” 
 
 “Do you think we will know him, Chi Lap?” 
 asked the younger brother. 
 
 “ I do not know,” replied the other ; “ perhaps 
 he will know us. A baby-boy may be born whom 
 we like very much, and in it will be the soul of my 
 dog.” 
 
 “Where has his soul gone now, Chi Lap?” 
 
 “ I don’t know. Perhaps it has gone up in the 
 air, -where the clouds are.” 
 
 “ What are souls?” 
 
 “Souls are — they are — ” and Chi Lap hesi- 
 tated. “Souls are the clouds from which all the 
 rain has fallen. The body is the rain, and the 
 soul is the cloud when the rain has gone out of 
 it.” 
 
 Choh Lin asked no more questions. Probably 
 he knew as much as he did before he asked his 
 brother. There are other people besides Chinese 
 boys who cannot describe the soul. 
 
104 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 After talking till they, for the time, forgot their 
 sorrow, Chi Lap said, as he pointed to the dead dog, 
 “ But we must bury him, or some people who are as 
 hungry as we will find San and eat him. There is 
 not much of him left except bone and skin, but he 
 was too good to be eaten.” 
 
 “ Where shall we bury him?” asked Choh Lin. 
 “Shall we carry him to some hill where they bury 
 people ?” 
 
 “ No,” replied the other, “ he is too heavy to 
 carry; we will bury him right here. He came here 
 to die; maybe he chose this place because he thought 
 it a lucky spot. No one will find his body here. 
 You stay here and watch until I can go for a hoe 
 with which to dig his grave.” 
 
 “ No,” replied the little fellow, “ I do not want 
 to stay here alone ; the black-faced man may get me 
 if I am here.” (When the Chinese wish to frighten 
 their children they tell them that the black-faced 
 man will get them.) “Let me go home with you. 
 Kailo will stay here and watch by San — won’t you, 
 Kailo ?” The feeble wag of the dog’s tail and a 
 weak effort to lick his young master’s hand were 
 the dog’s answer. But he was too weak to get on 
 his feet to follow the boys. 
 
 Choh Lin would neither stay nor go alone, so the 
 two boys started to get a hoe with which to dig the 
 grave, leaving Kailo to watch by his dead compan- 
 ion. On their way the boys resolved to say nothing 
 about the death of San. 
 
THE DOGS. 
 
 105 
 
 “Must not we tell mother or grandmother?” 
 asked Choh Lin. 
 
 “ No,” replied the older brother; “if they don’t 
 know they can’t tell. People will ask where my 
 dog is, and if they find out they will dig him up. 
 Don’t tell anybody where San is.” 
 
 “I won’t,” replied the little fellow, pressing his 
 lips together — “ not even if they whip me for it.” 
 
 When they reached home Chi Lap was sent off 
 on an errand at once. It kept him away for some 
 time. Choh Lin waited impatiently for his return, 
 and was ready with a hoe as soon as Chi Lap came 
 back. 
 
 “ Where are you going with that hoe ?” asked the 
 grandmother as she saw the two boys starting off. 
 “ Bring it back and give it to me, and you boys go 
 down to the water ; the tide will soon be low enough, 
 so that you may find shrimps or crabs.” 
 
 Not daring to tell their object, the boys reluctant- 
 ly obeyed, and, taking their basket, went down to 
 the slioi'e. 
 
 “ Kailo will take care of San,” said Choh Lin 
 hopefully, “and we’ll come back as soon as we can, 
 and then go to bury the good dog.” 
 
 “Where will we get a hoe?” asked Chi Lap. 
 “ If grandmother were not so harsh I would have 
 told her about San.” 
 
 “ No matter, Chi Lap,” said the other, taking his 
 older brother by the hand as they walked along ; 
 “ we can borrow a hoe somewhere, I know.” 
 
106 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “ Yes, but mother and grandmother won’t let us 
 go unless we tell them. Perhaps they won’t let us 
 go even then.” 
 
 “I will tell you what we can do: we won’t go 
 home from the shore, but go around and borrow a 
 hoe from somebody at the other end of the village, 
 and then we can bury San.” 
 
 “ I am afraid no one will let us have a hoe.” 
 
 “Let me tell you what we can do, Chi Lap. Let 
 us tell Jip ; he won’t let any one know. He is our 
 friend, and he liked San too ; he will get his father’s 
 hoe and help us.” 
 
 “ That’s so ; we can do that.” And more cheer- 
 fully the two boys went down to the water. They 
 met Jip there, and told him the story of San’s death, 
 and asked if he would help bury the dog. 
 
 “ Poor old San !” said Jip ; “ he was such a good 
 dog! I am sorry lie is dead. Yes, I can get a hoe, 
 and will help you bury him.” 
 
 As soon as they could the three boys left the wa- 
 ter and started on their sad errand. As they were 
 going Jip asked, “Haven’t you any paper-money 
 and other paper to put on San’s grave?” 
 
 “ No, we didn’t think about that,” answered Chi 
 Lap. “ Do you think we ought to put paper there? 
 A dog’s spirit won’t know how to use it in the 
 other world?” 
 
 “ We don’t know how much a dog’s spirit knows 
 when it gets out of the body,” replied Jip. “I 
 would put paper on the grave.” 
 
THE HOGS. 
 
 107 
 
 “We haven’t any,” answered Choh Lin. 
 
 “ And that isn’t the worst of it : we have no cash 
 to buy it,” said Chi Lap. 
 
 “ I have some cash at home,” replied Jip ; “ we’ll 
 take that.” 
 
 “We can’t pay you back, Jip,” said Chi Lap; 
 “ at least not till we are richer than we are now.” 
 
 “ That makes no difference,” answered Jip; “let 
 San be my dog too.” 
 
 The paper was bought; Jip got the hoe, and the 
 three boys started for the grave. 
 
 This paper, that is made to imitate money, cloth- 
 ing and other things, is put on the grave of the 
 dead in the expectation that when it disappears 
 from the grave it will be found in the spirit-world, 
 and there be real money and clothing and other 
 necessary things for the use of the spirit on whose 
 grave it was first placed. 
 
 When the boys came in sight of the dogs they 
 saw Kailo stretched out beside his dead companion. 
 He took no notice of their approach, though Choh 
 Lin called him by name. “ See, Kailo is asleep,” 
 said the little fellow to the others. Kailo was 
 asleep, but it was the same slumber that had come 
 to San before. Lying side by side, the two dogs 
 were dead. It was a sad discovery for Choh Lin. 
 Sitting down beside the body of the brute, he 
 stroked the head, wetting it with his tears as he 
 mourned over his dead friend. The two bereaved 
 young masters sat each beside his own, and Jip 
 
108 
 
 CHOH LIN 
 
 stood near by, looking on in sad silence. There 
 were tears in his eyes too. 
 
 After waiting a while he walked a little way 
 from the boys and began digging. Chi Lap soon 
 followed him and helped at the work, the two mean- 
 while talking of the good qualities of the dogs. 
 When a place deep and broad enough to contain 
 the bodies of the dogs had been dug they came to 
 Choh Lin, who still sat stroking the head of his 
 dog, though silently now, anil Chi Lap said, “Now, 
 Choh Lin, the grave is ready ; shall we bury San 
 first? he died first.” 
 
 Without replying the little fellow arose, and Jip, 
 who acted as undertaker, tried to fold San’s fore feet 
 over his breast. The boy had thoughtfully brought 
 with him two long pieces of cotton cloth ; these he 
 put around the body as the Chinese place ropes 
 about a coffin, toward the head and toward the feet. 
 Then, placing the hoe-handle through the pieces of 
 cloth, whose ends were tied together, he motioned 
 to Chi Lap to put one end of the handle on his 
 shoulder, and, Jip taking the other, the two carried 
 the dog to the grave, and then, removing the bands 
 of cloth, came back for Choh Lin’s dog. When 
 this had been prepared in the same way Choh Liu 
 said, “ Let me help carry Kailo.” 
 
 The two dogs were laid side bv side in the ground. 
 “Shall we have the ceremonies?” asked Jip, looking 
 at the other boys. 
 
 “ I think we ought to bow once,” said Chi Lap. 
 
THE DOGS. 
 
 109 
 
 “I mean to worship just as if it were my 
 brother,” spoke Choh Lin. 
 
 Stepping back from the grave, first Chi Lap and 
 afterward Choh Lin, approached and bowed each 
 three times; Jip, out of sympathy for his friends, 
 imitated them, and then said, “ Now shall I cover 
 them ?” 
 
 The dogs were soon covered, the paper scattered 
 over the grave, and then the boys slowly started 
 homeward. 
 
CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 BOYS’ TROUBLES. 
 
 C HOH LIN did not soon forget the death of his 
 dog. Indeed, twenty years after, when a Chris- 
 tian preacher, he told the author with no little sor- 
 row the story of the famine and the burial of the 
 dogs. 
 
 It was a joyful time in Tav Soa when the first 
 rain fell after the famine. When the cry, “ Haw 
 lai !” (Rain comes), was shouted in the streets every 
 one rushed out to see the welcome sight. The wast- 
 ed faces turned upward to catch the first drops, 
 while the despairing look that had been on nearly 
 every face gave place to smiles of gladness. The 
 rain began in earnest, and the people saw that there 
 was a prospect of a great rainfall. 
 
 One shower followed another in rapid succession, 
 hardly giving the farmers time to plough or plant 
 between them. But rain was so welcome that none 
 seemed to fear it. Not stopping to think of the 
 wetting they would get, the men began to work as 
 soon as the ground was moist enough. They seemed 
 to forget, too, their weakness and hunger in the 
 prospect of soon having an abundance of food, 
 no 
 
BOYS’ TROUBLES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 While the men went to the fields the women went 
 to the temples to offer their thanks to the gods. 
 Choh Lin and his brother took their share in the 
 general rejoicing. Though almost starving for lack 
 of food, yet with plenty of water they seemed to 
 feel stronger. 
 
 “ Oh, mother,” said Choh Lin a few days after 
 the first rain, “ the grass is coming out ; we will soon 
 be able to pick green leaves and blades of grass, 
 and not be obliged to cook dried ones any more. 
 My god has at last heard our prayers, and now 
 we will have enough to eat again.” 
 
 “ He has taken a long time to think about hear- 
 ing your prayers,” replied Chi Lap, good-naturedly. 
 “ If he had waited a little longer he need not have 
 done it at all. We should not have required any- 
 thing to eat in this world. But he seems to have 
 cared for others as much as for you.” 
 
 “Well, he is a good god,” said the smaller boy; 
 “ he does care for all.” 
 
 “ That may be,” answered Chi Lap, “ but I see 
 that most of the people thank the other gods for 
 rain. Would it not be well for you to tell them 
 that they are thanking the wrong god?” 
 
 “ Choh Lin is right, as are the other people,” 
 spoke the grandmother. “ All the gods have joined 
 together and answered the prayers for rain ; they are 
 good to those who serve them.” 
 
 “ That is, to those who lived through the famine,” 
 said Chi Lap in a lower tone. “ If people, instead 
 
112 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 of dying from starvation, would just wait, they 
 might learn how good the gods are.” 
 
 Food did soon become more plenty. That which 
 had been hoarded was now brought out. Since 
 there was a prospect of enough before long, each 
 one who had more than would be needed tried to 
 sell at the high prices. These soon came down, and 
 not only was there more to be bought, but it could 
 also be bought with less money. Mrs. Lee found 
 all the work she could do, and Chi Lap, who had 
 grown large enough to help, also earned money. 
 The work of wood-gathering and hunting for food 
 was given almost entirely to Choh Lin, who with 
 more food soon became quite strong again. At first 
 he feared to go alone, but gradually became used to 
 it and went cheerfully to his work. He did not 
 find it as pleasant, however, to hunt for wood as 
 when his brother was with him. The other boys, 
 taking advantage of his small size, gave the little 
 fellow no small trouble. 
 
 One day, on his way home from the shore with a 
 bundle of sticks, he sat down to rest. Near him 
 was a peg driven in the ground to which a cow was 
 tied to eat the grass. Hardly thinking what he did, 
 the boy took a stick from the bundle and began tap- 
 ping on the top of the peg. Soon rapid footsteps 
 were heard behind him. In a moment the little 
 fellow was on his feet, but not soon enough to es- 
 cape one of his tormentors. A large boy who dis- 
 liked Choh Lin came up and gave him a severe 
 
BOYS’ TROUBLES. 
 
 113 
 
 kicking for trying, as lie said, to break the peg. 
 The big fellow did not own the cow, but here was 
 an excuse for hurting the small boy without run- 
 ning- any risk of being; hurt in return. 
 
 Many a time did Choh Lin receive knocks and 
 kicks from the larger boys. They stole his wood 
 and took away the oysters and crabs he had gathered, 
 and when he struggled to keep his property they 
 pushed him down and beat and kicked him for 
 fighting. This was not because he had so many 
 enemies, but because in Tay Soa, as in many other 
 places in China, there were two parties among the 
 boys. The side to which Choh Lin belonged was 
 not only smaller, but composed of smaller boys, so 
 that the little fellow and his relatives were worsted 
 in more than one fight. They did not, however, 
 often come to blows, though now and then there 
 was a real fight between the two sides. Boys as 
 well as men in China are less willing to fight than 
 people are in America. When they have battles, 
 they prefer to fight with their tongues ; this does 
 not hurt much, and such battles can be fought at 
 any time or place and yet the fighters not be unfitted 
 for work afterward. These tongue-battles between 
 the boys’ parties sometimes ended in real battles, 
 rftones were flung, sticks were used, fists and feet 
 were brought into the fight, and sometimes there 
 were bloody noses and bruised bodies before the 
 belligerents separated. 
 
 The most of Choh Lin’s trouble came when he 
 
114 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 was alone. If his older brother were with him, the 
 larger boys usually let him alone. 
 
 More than once, Choh Lin, after telling the story 
 of his wrongs, added, “ I wish I were a man ; then 
 they would not knock me around as they do now.” 
 
 Chi Lap would say, “Wait until we are men; 
 then we will pay them back.” 
 
 The sister often wished herself a man to take the 
 part of her brothers. To her words of sympathy 
 Choh Lin replied one day, “I’m glad that you are 
 a girl and must stay in the house. No one can 
 harm you. I almost wish that I was a girl too ; 
 girls don’t get kicked and knocked around as we 
 do.” 
 
 “ I’ll tell you what we can do,” replied Chi Lap. 
 “ Our sister will soon be old enough to be married ; 
 then mother must marry her to a very big man, and 
 he can give those boys one of the hardest beatings 
 they ever had, and you and I, Choh Lin, will just 
 look on and see it.” 
 
 “ There is a better way to punish your enemies,” 
 said the grandmother. “ You are not strong enough 
 to punish those boys, but others are.” 
 
 “ Who, grandmother?” asked the boys. 
 
 “ If I tell you, Chi Lap will only mock at what 
 I say,” replied the old lady ; “ but I will tell Choh 
 Lin : he knows how to respect the aged.” 
 
 “ I do respect the aged,” replied Chi Lap. “Do 
 not I always treat you kindly, grandmother?” 
 
 “Yes, you treat me well enough,” replied she, 
 
BOYS’ TROUBLES. 
 
 115 
 
 “ but it is not of myself that I speak. There are 
 beings greater far than I, whom you treat with dis- 
 respect.” 
 
 “ Whom do you mean?” asked Chi Lap in won- 
 der. 
 
 “ I mean the gods,” was the reply. “ You speak 
 of them as though they were of no more account 
 than slaves.” 
 
 “ I do not mean to mock them,” answered Chi 
 Lap. “ The gods may be good enough, but I do 
 not quite see their goodness. I only say what the 
 men say of the gods, anyway.” 
 
 “Yes, and we who serve them faithfully must 
 suffer for what you and such men say of them. The 
 white crow must starve in the black one’s famine.” 
 
 Chi Lap made no reply, and the grandmother, 
 turning to Choh Lin, continued: “If you go to the 
 temple and pray to the gods, they will punish your 
 enemies. Tell your own god that he must take care 
 of you ; and if the bad boys continue to abuse you, 
 then ask him to punish them severely; yes, tell him 
 to kill them.” 
 
 “Oh, grandmother,” said he, “I don’t want 
 them to be killed. If the god would punish and 
 make them cry twice as bad as they make me cry, 
 that would be enough.” 
 
 “ How would it do,” asked Mrs. Lee, who had 
 listened, “ to ask the god to make the boys your 
 friends ?” 
 
 “Do gods ever do that?” asked Chi Lap. “I 
 
116 
 
 CHOH LIN 
 
 thought they punished the bad, rewarded the good 
 and took care of their friends, and that is all. I 
 did not know that they cared at all for bad people, 
 except to let them go on and grow worse and worse 
 until they could not stand it any longer; then they 
 suddenly threw them down into the dark prison for 
 the bad.” 
 
 “That is what the gods do,” replied the grand- 
 mother. “ They do not make bad people good nor 
 good people bad ; that is the work of people them- 
 selves.” 
 
 “ I wish the gods would help people to become 
 better,” said Mrs. Lee with a sigh. 
 
 Not long after this talk Clioh Lin asked his 
 brother, “Chi Lap, will you make a kite for me? 
 The other boys have kites; it is kiteflying-time, and 
 I want a kite too.” 
 
 “ What kind do you want ?” asked the older 
 brother. 
 
 “Just the best one you can make,” answered 
 Clioh Lin. “ Make a big bird — one that will fly 
 very high and pull hard at the string.” 
 
 “All right!” replied Chi Lap. 
 
 This custom of flying kites is quite common in 
 Southern China. In the city of Foo Chow (recent- 
 ly attacked by the French), some distance north of 
 Tay Soa, the ninth day of the ninth month is ob- 
 served as a special day for flying kites. At Tay 
 Soa and Amoy the spring is the kiteflying-time. 
 The kites are made in all kinds of shapes — some 
 
BOYS’ TROUBLES. 
 
 117 
 
 like fish, others like birds, others like snakes, and, 
 indeed, like almost anything else that the ingenious 
 Chinese can think of imitating. 
 
 A bird-kite was made for Clioh Lin, and the 
 little fellow, with his friend Oan and two or three 
 other boys, went out to fly it. Some of the larger 
 boys of the other party were out flying kites, but 
 had none as fine as that of Choh Lin. Chi Lap 
 could do well whatever he tried, but he was more 
 skillful in kite-making than in anything else, as 
 this kite proved. 
 
 When the small boys appeared with the fine large 
 kite, the larger boys tried to coax its owner to trade 
 it off for one of theirs. Failing in that, they of- 
 fered to buy it, but Choh Lin was unwilling to part 
 with it. Determined to get the better kite in some 
 way, yet unwilling to take it from him by force, 
 they tried to persuade him to make his kite fly a 
 race with one of theirs. One of them said, “ Clioh 
 Lin, let us see whose kite can fly the best? If 
 yours can, then you may take mine, but if mine 
 flies the highest, then I will take yours.” 
 
 The little fellow was unwilling to try this, but at 
 length consented ; the kites went up, and Choh Lin’s 
 went higher than any others. 
 
 “ There, Tun !” cried he, “ my kite is the highest. 
 Yours can’t go as high as that. But you can keep 
 your kite ; I don’t want it.” 
 
 “Oh yes, take it,” whispered Oan; “it’s yours 
 now ; then give it to us.” 
 
118 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “Tun, Choh Lin has won your kite,” said one of 
 the little boy’s friends, “so hand it over to him.” 
 
 For a moment the larger boy hesitated, and then, 
 one of his friends whispering to him, he spoke: 
 “ Right ! Choh Lin’s kite has won. I don’t want 
 to give up mine, but it’s fair. — Here, Choh Lin, 
 take the string; I will not pull it down. Now let 
 me hold the string of yours for a while.” 
 
 Without thinking, the little fellow took the cord 
 of Tun’s kite, handing that of his own to the larger 
 boy. Tun took it and walked slowly away, flying 
 the kite as if it were his own. In a few minutes 
 Choh Lin handed the string he held to Oan and 
 went to Tun and asked for his own kite. 
 
 “ This is not yours,” replied the large boy ; “ it is 
 mine now.” 
 
 Choh Lin’s entreaties and threats were of no 
 avail. Tun’s friends sided with him, and there 
 was no help for the smaller boys. Choh Lin was 
 obliged to give up his own aud take the poorer kite; 
 but kiteflying had no further interest for him now. 
 Taking hold of the string, he pulled down the kite, 
 and, carrying it in his hand, started with his friends 
 for home. They had not gone far, muttering and 
 threatening what they would do to the larger boys 
 as soon as a chance offered, when Oan, seeing some 
 stones in their path, said, “ Here’s a chance now. 
 Let us throw stoues at their kites and break them.” 
 
 “ We can’t hit them; they are too high,” replied 
 Choh Lin. 
 
BOYS’ TROUBLES. 
 
 119 
 
 “ Well, we can hit the boys, if we can’t the kites,” 
 said one of the others ; “ let us try.” 
 
 The kite was dropped, and in a moment the little 
 fellows caught up several stones each, and, running 
 back a short distance, began throwing at the larger 
 boys. Fortunately, the aim was bad and not a 
 stone struck the mark. But those who held no 
 kite-strings did not wait to be hit: they started 
 after the small boys, chasing them some distance. 
 Choh Lin and his companions in their haste neg- 
 lected to take up the kite, and the larger boys car- 
 ried it back as their own. 
 
 After this the little fellow was careful to make 
 no bargains and to have nothing to do with the 
 larger boys. Perhaps it saved him from falling 
 into the practice, common among boys as well as 
 men in China, of betting and gambling. 
 
 One day in the autumn some of Choh Lin’s 
 friends met him and said, “ There is a man down 
 street who has a whole tubful of crickets to sell; 
 let us buy some and have a cricket- fight.” 
 
 “ I haven’t any cash,” replied he. 
 
 “ I have,” answered Chiap, “ and will lend you 
 some ; then you can pay me back when your mother 
 gives you money.” 
 
 “ But she does not give me any money,” replied 
 he; “she is too poor yet.” 
 
 While they were talking Chi Lap came along. 
 
 “ Here comes your brother ; he’ll let you have 
 cash,” said one of the boys. 
 
120 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “ I don’t want to fight crickets,” replied Ckoh 
 Lin. 
 
 “ Don’t want to ? Why, it’s fun,” said the other ; 
 “come along and try. You don’t want to because 
 you do not know about it. Chi Lap will — won’t 
 you, Chi Lap?” called out Chiap. 
 
 “ Do what ?” asked he. 
 
 “ Fight crickets. There’s a man down street who 
 has a whole tubful. They are fine strong young 
 crickets, and he sells them cheap, too. Let’s have 
 a cricket-fight. — What do you say, Chi Lap?” 
 
 “ Where is the man ?” asked he eagerly ; and the 
 boys hurried down the street to the cricket-seller, 
 Choh Lin following more slowly. 
 
 Crickets were bought, placed in a box and the 
 boys hastened away to have a cricket-fight. A 
 basin was brought and set on the ground. Chiap 
 and Chi Lap then sat down on opposite sides, and 
 each put a cricket in front of him in the basin. 
 The two boys then bet each several cash that his 
 own cricket would be the best fighter. Some of the 
 other boys who had followed bet, some on Chiap’s 
 and others on Chi Lap’s cricket. When all were 
 ready the two boys, each with a straw, began teasing 
 his cricket until the two insects became angry, when, 
 uttering loud chirrups, they sprang upon each other. 
 Then began a battle between the little creatures that 
 would have been terrible if they had been large. 
 The boys crowded around the basin and jostled each 
 other as they eagerly watched the fight, each seem- 
 
BOYS' TROUBLES. 
 
 121 
 
 ing nearly as much excited as the crickets. They 
 cheered and shouted, and urged the enraged insects 
 on in the battle. Though each little creature had 
 a leg torn off, both kept on with the desperate com- 
 bat. At length Chi Lap’s cricket stopped fighting, 
 and soon ceased struggling ; he was dead. 
 
 Chiap had won Chi Lap’s cash, and others who 
 had bet on his cricket lost their money too. 
 
 “ I mean to try it again, Chiap,” said Chi Lap, 
 “ if you will.” Another fight was soon arranged 
 for, the money staked and the battle begun. This 
 time Chiap’s cricket lost two of its legs, and was 
 forced to try to escape, and Chi Lap was the winner. 
 
 Since each had won a battle, the third must be 
 fought. This Chi Lap gained. By this time the 
 rest of the boys were ready to try a cricket-fight. 
 They tried to persuade Choh Lin to buy a cricket, 
 or at least bet on one, but he remembered his kite 
 and refused. He even tried to persuade Chi Lap 
 to stop, and threatened to tell their mother, but the 
 elder brother had caught the excitement of gam- 
 bling, and he would not stop until all the crickets 
 had fought. After losing and winning, and in the 
 end losing not only the price of the crickets, but 
 some money besides, Chi Lap went home with his 
 younger brother somewhat discouraged with gam- 
 bling. 
 
 Choh Lin told their mother, who scolded her 
 eldest son and forbade his gambling again. This, 
 however, did not prevent him, but it did stop his 
 
122 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 gambling when Choh Lin was by, and made the old- 
 er less willing to have the company of his younger 
 brother. 
 
 Boys very early in life learn to gamble in China; 
 nor is it strange : they see men every day engaged 
 in it. High and low, rich and poor, are gamblers. 
 
CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 CHOH LIN AT SCHOOL. 
 
 HEN Choh Lin was nine years old his mother 
 
 felt able to send him to school. He was a 
 bright boy, and every one thought that he should 
 learn to read. When told that he was to be a 
 school-boy, he was greatly pleased. Perhaps he 
 thought that now his days for hunting wood and 
 gathering crabs and oysters were over, but he was 
 glad to go to school. He wanted to be able to read 
 the story-books of his country, and then, too, it 
 would be something new. 
 
 When the school began he started in the morning 
 with the others. Without books or slate, with no 
 dinner-basket on his arm, he entered the school- 
 room. It was dark and gloomy, its walls were almost 
 black with smoke ; its only windows were two square 
 holes with wooden bars across, high above the reach 
 of the scholars. There were a few desks or tables 
 and some wooden benches without backs in the 
 room ; these, with the teacher’s desk and chair, were 
 the only furniture. 
 
 The school was soon called to order by the teach- 
 er, who tried to put on a very wise look behind his 
 
 123 
 
124 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 large spectacles. Choh Lin as he looked at him felt 
 that he was in the presence of the wisest man in 
 China, and one who probably knew all there was to 
 be learned. He wondered if he ever would know 
 one-half as much as the sober schoolmaster, and de- 
 termined to try to take in all the learning his head, 
 would hold. When the scholars were all seated the 
 teacher called one to him, and, taking a book, read 
 a sentence or two from it, and had the boy repeat it 
 correctly after him ; then he sent the pupil to his 
 seat to repeat again and again the same words. Then 
 another was called, and his lesson read to him in 
 the same way ; he in turn was sent back to his seat 
 repeating it. In this way all were called, until each 
 had his lesson given. All were soon in their seats 
 studying and repeating their lessons at the top of 
 their voices, as if each were trying to drown the 
 voices of the others. Swinging: themselves back and 
 forth on their seats and shouting with all their 
 might, the scholars seemed to be doing anything 
 else than studying; yet this, the Chinese think, is 
 the true way to study. Each by shouting out his 
 own lesson will be unable to hear what others say, 
 and will not be attending to that with which he has 
 no business. Besides, the teacher can tell by the 
 noise how much studying is being done. 
 
 As soon as a boy had learned the lesson he went 
 to the teacher, and, handing him the book, turned 
 his own back on the master; then in a rapid way 
 he rattled off from memory what had been learned. 
 
Clio II LIN AT SCHOOL. 
 
 125 
 
 A new lesson was given in the same way as the 
 first, and the pupils went back to their seats to 
 shout it into their memory. 
 
 Such was the school to which Choh Lin went. 
 Like many others in China, little else was taught 
 ;in it than reading some of the old books of the 
 ’country and writing. Arithmetic, geography, his- 
 tory and other studies, so important in American 
 schools, had little place there. If able to do as 
 well as their forefathers did thousands of years ago, 
 the Chinese usually are satisfied. 
 
 After the other boys had their lessons given, 
 Choh Lin’s turn came. The teacher called him up, 
 asked a few questions, praised him, and then gave 
 him, like the others, a sentence or two to learn, only 
 it was easier than what the older boys had. He did 
 not begin at the alphabet, because the Chinese lan- 
 guage has no alphabet — no letters at all. Nor did 
 he need to learn to spell. The people of Choh 
 Lin’s country never spell in their own language; 
 the words are already spelled out and ready for the 
 scholar to begin to read them. Instead of being 
 made up of letters, the words are made up of dots 
 and marks, straight and crooked arranged in differ- 
 ent ways. But every child in America probably 
 has seen Chinese characters, or words, on tea- boxes, 
 if nowhere else. Those are real Chinese words — 
 just like the words in their books. If some boy 
 thinks that it must be easy to learn to read, since 
 there are no words to be spelled, let him think that 
 
126 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 Chinese words are hard to remember because there 
 are so many of them. There are at least ten thou- 
 sand in common use, and each one different from the 
 others, yet many so alike that one is often mistaken 
 for another. Imagine how hard it would be to 
 learn to read a language that had several thousand 
 letters, and each made up of a number of marks, 
 some of very many. The fact is, that there probably 
 is no written language so difficult to learn to read as 
 the Chinese. One may be learning a lifetime and 
 yet not know nearly all the words in the books for 
 the use of common people. 
 
 When Choli Lin went to his seat, reciting the 
 words the teacher had read, the little fellow felt as 
 if he had grown six inches since he came into the 
 schoolroom. He was a scholar in a school with 
 other boys. He had a book of his own, and, more 
 than that, was studying a lesson given by a real 
 teacher — a man who wore spectacles, and large ones 
 too. Proud Choh Lin ! He saw himself there a 
 student and becoming learned and great. The 
 teacher had told him that by diligent study he 
 would some day become a learned man, a graduate, 
 and then an officer of the government, and then — 
 But the boy’s imagination could not go farther. He 
 knew of the mandarins who ruled over the portion 
 of country to which Tay Soa belonged ; he had 
 heard of the Tau Tai, or district magistrate, and 
 knew that there was such a being as a governor- 
 general of the province ; but the emperor — of course 
 
CHOH LIN AT SCHOOL. 
 
 127 
 
 he had heard of him — whether he was a real god 
 or part god and part man Choh Lin did not know. 
 He certainly did not think of being emperor some 
 day, any more than he did of being a god, nor did 
 he know enough about a governor-general to think 
 of being one when he was old enough ; but he did 
 think that he might some day become a siun hang, 
 an under-mandarin, or a mandarin’s secretary. 
 Great plans were formed in that little head as he 
 walked to his seat and began to study. He would 
 be great, and then he should be rich, and thus have 
 plenty of money. Then his mother, sister and the 
 rest would have plenty to eat, no matter how much 
 famine there might be, nor need they work any more. 
 
 In thinking and planning the little boy did not 
 forget his lesson. He kept repeating it over and 
 over in a low voice, not daring to shout out as the 
 rest did. He was afraid of his own voice, but as 
 he thought more of his plans and heard the voices 
 of others ringing in his ears, he tried to study loud 
 too, and raised his voice ; but the noise made by the 
 others drowned his own, and he spoke louder, then 
 louder and louder, until his voice rose as high as the 
 rest; then Choh Lin was content. He was a full 
 scholar now, and could shout as loudly as any. He 
 tried to shout a little louder, but it soon made him 
 hoarse, and he was obliged to be less a scholar, 
 though he swayed himself back and forth, just as 
 he saw the others do, until there was danger of 
 his falling off the bench. 
 
128 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 Choh Liu now knew his lesson, and had known 
 it for some time, but hardly dared go to the teacher 
 with it. Finding enough courage at length, he 
 gathered all he had and boldly walked to the teach- 
 er’s desk ; handing the book, he turned his back and 
 began to recite. He went through the whole, though 
 it was not much, without missing a word. 
 
 “ Ah ! you have done well to-day for a new 
 scholar,” said the teacher. “ Some day you will 
 know by heart many books if you keep on in this 
 way.” 
 
 The tremble he felt when he came to recite had 
 all gone out of the little boy’s knees now, and all 
 the flutter out of his heart. He felt proud of the 
 teacher’s praise, and determined to be a scholar 
 equal to the teacher himself. A new lesson was 
 given to be speedily learned and well recited. Choh 
 Lin did not understand why he was praised less for 
 this than for the first; so he took his seat after the 
 second recitation with less pride ; but at the end of 
 the day he had made good progress for a beginner, 
 and was quite well pleased with being a school-boy. 
 
 As he went along the street he wondered if 
 people did not look at him and say, “ Choh Lin 
 has become a scholar. He will be a great man 
 some day, perhaps a graduate and a high manda- 
 rin.” 
 
 He had a great deal to tell at night about the 
 school. His mother, grandmother, brother and sis- 
 ter were almost as proud of the young scholar as he 
 
The Young Scholar. 
 
 Page 129. 
 

CHOH LIN AT SCHOOL. 
 
 129 
 
 was of himself, and were ready to listen to his plans 
 for the future until he talked of being a very great 
 man; then Chi Lap told him that “the little bird 
 chirruped loudly in the nest, but chirruped louder 
 to get back when the nest was gone.” 
 
 Chi Lap’s remarks usually of late quieted the 
 younger brother in his plans. The two loved each 
 other, no doubt, as much as ever, but the older 
 brother, being more at work and among men, 
 thought it his duty to say wise things to the young- 
 er one. 
 
 Choh Lin went to school day after day, nor did 
 he grow tired of study. Sometimes he did wish for 
 a day when he might rest, but those days are few 
 in China — no Saturday of play for the scholars, 
 and no Sabbath of rest. Now and then a feast-day 
 comes when the schools are closed, but usually they 
 are open day after day. The Chinese, having no 
 Sunday, have no weeks; their time is divided by 
 days, or literally suns and months, or moons. 
 
 As the little boy talked more with the boys at 
 school, his thoughts were more fixed on becoming 
 rich than on becoming great. Since he noticed how 
 his mother and Chi Lap must work to earn money 
 for food and clothing for the family, he determined 
 to be rich and pay them back some day. “ Mother, 
 you and Chi Lap work on yet a few years,” said he 
 one day, “ until I have learned enough at school ; 
 then I will go to work and earn money enough for 
 us all. The boys at school all mean to be rich when 
 
 9 
 
130 ' 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 they can read well ; so do I. It will be very easy 
 to get money then. All rich men can read many 
 books, and poor men can read none. Learning to 
 read does it; so the boys and the teacher say.” 
 
 He thought that learning to read books written 
 many hundreds of years ago would in some way 
 give him power over money. The older he grew 
 the more he determined to become rich. Nor was 
 it strange. He had learned by a terrible experience 
 what the poor must suffer, nor had he forgotten the 
 comforts that wealth gives. 
 
 When Choh Lin had gone to school a short time 
 he was told to bring writing-material, so that he 
 might learn to write. Some paper, a writing-stone, 
 a cake of ink, a tiny water-pot and a pointed brush 
 of fine hair were bought for him, and he was ready 
 to become a writer. When he brought these the 
 teacher took the little pot, and, filling it with water, 
 poured some into a hollow place in one end of the 
 stone, and then, taking the stick of ink, he dipped 
 the end in the water and rubbed it on the stone, 
 thus inking it. He then took the brush, which 
 was a hollow stick of bamboo about as thick as a 
 goose-quill, in one end of which was a bunch of 
 soft hair that tapered down to a point. This end, 
 when the brush was not in use, was kept covered 
 by a small cap or piece of bamboo large enough to 
 slip on the handle. Taking off the cap, the teacher 
 dipped the brush in water, touched it lightly on the 
 inked stone, and began writing on the paper some 
 
CHOH LIN AT SCHOOL. 
 
 131 
 
 Chinese words for the little boy to copy. After 
 writing a few simple ones he gave Choh Lin the 
 brush and, showing him how to hold it, told him 
 to write the words'. He made slow and rough work 
 at first, but, encouraged by the teacher and the other 
 boys, he soon learned to make something that looked 
 like the copy. 
 
 After a while Choh Lin was taught to add and 
 subtract, but not much more of arithmetic. For 
 nearly a year he continued at school, studying every 
 day except on feast-days. He never played truant, 
 for he was too anxious to learn ; besides, he liked to 
 go to school, where he could be with other boys, 
 and where the teacher would prevent their taking 
 advantage of his size. 
 
 Mrs. Lee was pleased to hear from the teacher of 
 the progress her boy made, and would gladly have 
 continued him at school had she been able. The 
 teacher said all the good he could of Choh Lin, 
 since he wished to have as many pupils as he could 
 get. Since each one paid for his own tuition, the 
 more scholars the more money for the master. But 
 what he said of Choh Lin was meant to be the truth. 
 The little boy had become a great favorite with the 
 teacher. He was well behaved and made rapid 
 progress in his studies. 
 
 At the end of the year Mrs. Lee found herself 
 unable to keep her son at school. She and the 
 teacher regretted it, but none felt so sorry as Choh 
 Lin. With the end of school he saw his bright 
 
132 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 hopes disappear ; and, more than that, he was obliged 
 to go back to his old work of hunting for wood and 
 oysters, crabs and other food. 
 
 Another drought had begun. Work was scarce, 
 food was rapidly growing dearer, and both boys 
 were needed to help keep the family from starva- 
 tion. Fortunately, the drought did not last as long 
 nor was food as scarce as during the former famine. 
 When the rain fell again, Choh Lin was disap- 
 pointed at not being able to go back to school. Un- 
 able to study without a teacher, he forgot much of 
 what he had learned. 
 
 After the second drought Chi Lap, who had now 
 become quite a large boy, concluded that Tay Soa 
 was a good place for famines not only, but a good 
 place to move away from; so he determined to go 
 down to the large city of Amoy, about a dozen miles 
 away, and see if he could not find something to do 
 there. He went down on one of the boats going to 
 Amoy, and came back with the news that he had 
 found something to do. He was going to the city 
 as a peddler, to sell candies and other good things for 
 those who had a sweet tooth. To start would take 
 but little money, and he had been told that he could 
 earn considerable at it. His mother was willing to 
 let him try, while the grandmother opposed it, and 
 Choh Lin felt that he could not let his brother go. 
 But Chi Lap did go, and stayed in Amoy too, com- 
 ing home now and then for a day or two. 
 
CHAPTER XV. 
 
 STONING THE DEVIL. 
 
 O NE day a number of the men in Tay Soa were 
 talking together earnestly about a disease raging 
 in some villages not far away. As usual, the stories 
 of the ravages of the disease had grown by travel- 
 ing. Some said that many were sick and some had 
 already died, while others said that half the people 
 were sick and that a great number were dead. It 
 was said, too, that the disease was spreading to the 
 different villages and approaching Tay Soa. This 
 last news had aroused the people to great excitement, 
 and they were considering what should be done to 
 keep the disease from their village. 
 
 “ What can we do ?” asked one. “ If the evil 
 spirits choose to send such calamities, we must sub- 
 mit and suffer. If we are to die we must die, and 
 that is all we can do.” 
 
 “ What do you think, Uncle Kim ?” asked one of 
 the younger men of an old man in the group who 
 had stood by quietly listening, but now and then 
 shaking his head at remarks that seemed to displease 
 him. “ You are older than we, and far more wise ; 
 
 133 
 
134 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 do you think that we can do anything to prevent 
 this disease reaching Tay Soa?” 
 
 “I think we can keep the disease away from our 
 village,” he replied, “ but the disease is not so much 
 to be dreaded as something else.” Then he stopped 
 and looked as wise as he could at oue and another 
 of the company. 
 
 “Something else? What else, Uncle Kim?” 
 asked several voices at once. “ Please tell us. You 
 are wise; years have taught you many things; let 
 us drink from the fountain of your wisdom.” 
 
 After waiting a while and looking at one and 
 another, the old man began : “ Disease is not so bad 
 as that which brings it. All such evils are only 
 weapons of the bad spirits, who use them to tor- 
 ment us. We cannot see evil spirits — we can only 
 see their acts — but we can feel them ; and unless we 
 do something soon we shall feel one act of the evil 
 one more than we have felt for many days.” 
 
 “ But what can we do?” asked many eager voices. 
 “ Can we do anything to keep away the evil?” 
 
 “ Yes,” replied the old man ; “ but when I tell 
 it you will not heed. Many years ago, when the 
 fathers lived, we had not such calamities as now 
 visit our country. Then all was happiness and 
 peace. The fathers knew how to care for them- 
 selves and their children, but we have gone from 
 their wisdom into ignorance and sorrow.” 
 
 “What did the fathers do?” asked an impatient 
 
 one. 
 
STONING TIIE DEVIL. 
 
 135 
 
 “ Keep silence,” said another, “ and let age and 
 wisdom speak.” 
 
 Uncle Kim began again : “ All evil comes from 
 the devil. He hates men and wishes to cause them 
 pain and misery, but if he sees them in trouble and 
 in great suffering, he lets them alone. He is con- 
 tent if they suffer, no matter who brings the suffer- 
 ing.” 
 
 “ What do you mean, venerable Uncle Kim ?” 
 asked a young man. “ Remember, some of us are 
 but youthful ; we have only read a few characters 
 in the child’s book, while you have searched through 
 the great volumes of deep wisdom.” 
 
 “ Oh, there is no need of telling you, young men ; 
 you are giving up the customs of our fathers, and 
 all are suffering for it. If you would learn wisdom 
 from the past, all might yet be well.” 
 
 “ Uncle Kim, please tell us what customs we 
 should follow, and we will gladly go back to them,” 
 said one of the older men. “ No doubt we have 
 gone astray, but now we come back as children to 
 learn lessons from a father, and here we wait for 
 him to teach us, and we will follow.” 
 
 “In the time of the fathers,” said the old man, 
 “ they tried a way to keep off disease and other 
 evil, and it succeeded.” 
 
 As he stopped a moment, one man, impatient and 
 ready to show his wisdom, asked, “What was it? 
 Did they offer sacrifices to the evil spirits ?” 
 
 “ No,” continued the old man ; “ sacrifices to the 
 
136 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 devil are useless. He cares nothing for what we 
 offer, but for what we suffer. Give sacrifices to the 
 gods and human blood to devils.” 
 
 “ What do you mean ?” asked one who seemed 
 startled. 
 
 “ To escape the torments of the devil we must 
 take the work out of his hands,” replied Uncle 
 Kim. 
 
 “ How can we do that ?” was asked. 
 
 “ By causing each other to suffer.” 
 
 “ In what way ?” 
 
 “ This is the way the fathers did,” continued the 
 old man, “ as they told me when I was a child : 
 They gathered on the plain, and, dividing into two 
 parties, they separated a little distance and then be- 
 gan throwing stones at each other. Often men were 
 hit, wounded, and some were even killed. The dev- 
 il, seeing them fight in this way, thought that they 
 were enemies and would do each other all the injury 
 necessary without his help, so he let them alone.” 
 
 “ Did they not have any sickness then ? Did not 
 people suffer and die?” asked a young man. 
 
 “ Some of them did,” was the reply, “ but not as 
 many as now. The devil can work far more evil 
 than we can.” 
 
 “ Do you mean,” asked one, “ that we are to stone 
 each other to death to save the devil the trouble of 
 killing us?” 
 
 “ Do you believe that any of us will never die?” 
 was the answer. 
 
STONING THE DEVIL. 
 
 137 
 
 “ Do you mean that the devil will let us alone if 
 we hurt each other enough ?” asked another. 
 
 “ Certainly,” replied Uncle Kim. “ That is the 
 way the fathers did; and if we would live as hap- 
 pily and as long as they, we must do as the fathers 
 did.” 
 
 “ That may be all right,” spoke a young man, 
 “ but I don’t see why we should do the bad work 
 of evil spirits. It is enough that we sulfer from 
 them, and not do their work too, and that upon our 
 own friends and relatives.” 
 
 “ It is not in that way that we are to look at it,” 
 said an older man. “ As I understand Uncle Kim, 
 we must, by doing some of the devil’s work, keep 
 him from doing any of it, and so escape a great 
 deal of trouble. — Is it not so, venerable uncle?” 
 
 “Right! right!” replied the old man. “Besides, 
 it is better to receive wounds at the hand of a friend 
 than of an enemy.” 
 
 “ Uncle Kim is right,” said a man who had until 
 now been silent. “ When we take the matter into 
 our own hands we control it.” 
 
 “Why need we hit each other at all?” inquired 
 a man. “ We may stand far off and throw stones 
 without hurting any one.” 
 
 “ Yes,” said another, “ and we need not throw 
 heavy stones nor take good aim, either.” 
 
 “You are young and I am old,” spoke Uncle 
 Kim. “ Take the advice of an old man : Not 
 stones, nor throwing them, will satisfy the devil, 
 
338 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 but the pain we suffer, the wounds we receive, the 
 blood spilled, — only these satisfy the evil ones.” 
 
 Some of the Tay Soa boys, Chi Lap among them, 
 heard this consultation, for it took place before he 
 went to Amoy; and the boys held a council too. 
 They, however, waited and listened quietly until the 
 men had decided on the time and place when they 
 would “ stone the devil,” as it was called. When 
 all arrangements had been made by the men the 
 boys made their plans. They agreed to follow the 
 men and wait until the battle was fairly begun, then 
 take part in it. Some knew of certain men whom 
 they would try to hit if a good chance offered. 
 
 When both consultations were over Chi Lap hur- 
 ried home and told his younger brother of the pro- 
 posed fight, and urged him to go along to see men 
 stone the devil. 
 
 “ Stone the devil?” repeated Choh Lin ; “ how can 
 they see him to hit him?” 
 
 “ Oh, they don’t hit him, but they throw stones 
 at each other to save him the trouble. I think that 
 each one supposes the other is the devil, and so tries 
 to hit him.” 
 
 Chi Lap told what he had heard, and of course 
 his little brother was eager to go along. When the 
 time came for the stoning the grandmother, seeing 
 the two boys start away, called them, “Where are 
 you going ?” 
 
 “ Going to see the men stone the devil,” was the 
 reply. 
 
STONING THE DEVIL. 
 
 139 
 
 “ ‘ Stone the devil ’ !” said the old lady. “ Do 
 they mean to do that here? Then there is safety. 
 If the people are coining back to the old customs, 
 the favor of the gods will come back to us. But 
 do you boys mean to throw stones with the rest? 
 You must not,” said she, changing her voice to one 
 of command ; “you will be hurt, perhaps killed.” 
 
 “ Well, if we are killed,” said Chi Lap, half in 
 sport, “ it will save the lives of others. It it be 
 good to throw stones and hurt people, then it must 
 be good for us to do it, and good for us to be hurt.” 
 
 “ No, no ! Let others suffer, but not yourselves.” 
 Not until the boys had promised to keep entirely 
 out of the way of the stones would she allow them 
 to go. 
 
 The men had gathered when the boys reached 
 the place, and were dividing into two parties. It 
 was a large level spot of ground where they had 
 met, and stones were plenty. After dividing, the 
 two parties separated about a stone’s throw ; when 
 all were ready one side began throwing stones at 
 the other ; these were speedily flung back. At first 
 each side seemed careful not to hit any in the other 
 party, but some were hit ; this made them a little 
 angry, and those struck became willing to let the 
 other side suffer. Stones were thrown with more 
 violence and better aim. The parties grew excited 
 and the battle became a real one. Many bruises 
 were given and received, blood flowed, and some 
 were forced to leave the field, yet the battle kept 
 
140 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 on. Instead of stoning the devil, the men stoned 
 each other, and in earnest too. The fight did not 
 last long. Three lay on the field helpless and seem- 
 ingly lifeless. When their friends noticed their 
 condition they called to the others to stop, but they 
 did not, and more cuts and wounds were given. 
 
 At length the battle ceased. Four now lay on 
 the field as if dead. Around them friends gathered 
 and spoke, but received no answer except a groan 
 from one of them. The other three were senseless, 
 and one of them lifeless. The dead and the wound- 
 ed were carried from the field to the village amid 
 great lamentations. The grief, no doubt, was sin- 
 cere, but all felt grateful that some had been hurt, 
 and each was thankful that the wounded did not 
 include himself. One of the three borne from the 
 field alive died before morning, and a few days after 
 a third one gave up his life, while the fourth slow- 
 ly recovered. Others who had been wounded car- 
 ried the marks for many days ; some never lost the 
 scars. 
 
 The stoning was a subject for talk among the 
 boys for many a day. Some thought it noble, 
 while others regarded it as great fun, but a few 
 thought it a terrible thing and very cruel. The 
 tender heart of Choh Lin was greatly affected by it. 
 AVhen he talked to his grandmother he spoke of it 
 sometimes with tears. “ Why is it, grandmother,” 
 said he, “ that people must hurt each other in this 
 way to please the evil spirits? Why do not the 
 
STONING THE DEVIL. 
 
 141 
 
 gods keep the evil spirits away? Why do not they 
 take care of the people instead of allowing them to 
 fight each other ?” 
 
 “ There are two kinds of spirits,” said the grand- 
 mother — “the evil and the good. The gods and 
 the good spirits on one side are fighting against the 
 devil and the evil spirits on the other. If the gods 
 and the good spirits should always have their way, 
 the evil ones would mass together and produce some 
 dreadful calamity. The way to keep the evil ones 
 from this is to pretend that we are their friends and 
 do the work that they like to see.” 
 
 “ But, grandmother,” said the child, “by doing 
 this work the people are forgetting the gods and 
 serving their enemy.” 
 
 “ My son,” said the old lady, “ we can sometimes 
 best serve our friends by seeming to be their en- 
 emies.” 
 
 “ Do you mean that by stoning each other we are 
 doing each other service?” 
 
 “Yes,” replied she; “by hurting some we save 
 many from being hurt much more by the evil one. 
 All he wants is to see us in trouble, to see us suffer; 
 and if he sees us injuring each other, he sits down 
 and rests.” 
 
 Chi Lap had his own views of doing the work 
 of the devil. “That may do for his children,” said 
 he, “but not for the children of men. If the evil 
 one wishes to see us injured, let him do it himself, 
 and not set us at it, and then give us no pay except 
 
142 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 wounds, bruises and death. Let those who will, do 
 the work of the devil ; I will not.” 
 
 With great show of sorrow the dead were buried. 
 The people felt that they must make all the greater 
 mourning to let the evil ones see how much they 
 suffered. There were others besides Chi Lap who 
 regarded this whole proceeding as foolish, but the 
 great majority looked upon it as a noble act, while 
 a few of the aged rejoiced to see a revival of one 
 of the old customs of their country. 
 
 There may be a gradual change of customs 
 throughout China, but it is very slow, and in many 
 places the customs of thousands of years ago are 
 yet followed by the people. It is only in and near 
 the seaports, where the people have mingled with 
 other nations, that there has been much change of 
 customs. Whether this strange and foolish super- 
 stition of stoning the devil was ever common 
 throughout China the author does not know, but 
 it certainly was very strong many years ago in the 
 country around Tay Soa, and of late years it has 
 been revived. One of these attempts at doing the 
 woi’k of the devil the writer saw on the plain north 
 of Tay Soa some years ago. 
 
CHAPTER XVI 
 
 REBELLION AT AMOY. 
 
 W E go back in our story two years and take the 
 reader to the city of Amoy, about twelve or 
 thirteen miles from Tay Soa. 
 
 Amoy is built on the landward side of the island 
 bearing the same name. The people call the island 
 and city A Mung in the spoken language, though 
 some Chinese speak the name very much as we do, 
 and thus foreigners have got the name Amoy. In 
 the written language, which is the same all over 
 China, the name is “ Ha Bun,” though the meaning 
 is the same as Amoy — “ mansion-door that is, 
 Amoy is the mansion-door of China, or its principal 
 opening. Until lately it was the chief naval station 
 of the empire. 
 
 Amoy City contains about two hundred and fifty 
 thousand inhabitants, yet so compactly built is the 
 town and so narrow are the streets that the whole 
 city does not cover much more than a square mile 
 of ground. It is a walled town, but the larger part 
 of it lies outside the walls. Every old Chinese city 
 has high walls surrounding what was the city in 
 former years. But as towns grow and walls do 
 
 143 
 
144 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 not, many of the cities have by far the larger part 
 of their inhabitants outside the walls. Within the 
 walls the mandarins, or officers, live, and there the 
 soldiers are usually stationed. 
 
 Besides the walls, Amoy has gates at the ends of 
 its streets, which are shut at night and opened at 
 daylight, so that none can enter the city or go out 
 after dark. 
 
 In the spring of 1853 rumors reached Amoy of 
 the approach of a rebel army whose purpose was to 
 capture the city. It was during the great Tai-Ping 
 rebellion, which came so near destroying the present 
 Chinese government. Armies of rebels were moving 
 in different directions, capturing the cities that lay 
 in their way. Word reached Amoy that one of 
 these armies was coming to the coast. There was 
 great excitement in the city, and it was feared that 
 there would be terrible fighting, as there was an im- 
 perial army in the town and a number of war-ves- 
 sels lay in the harbor. The people professed to be 
 loyal to the government, but many at heart were 
 friends of the rebellion. 
 
 Not long after the report of the approach of the 
 rebels their army appeared. The mandarins boasted 
 of what they would do to the “ long red-haired rob- 
 bers,” as they called the rebels, and some believed 
 that the government soldiers would be able to keep 
 the invaders out of the city. 
 
 Late in the afternoon the rebels came in sight of 
 the city. Nothing was done to prevent their enter- 
 
REBELLION AT AMOY. 
 
 145 
 
 ing the harbor from the river on the west. The 
 soldiers of the government remained in the walled 
 part of the town, and the mandarin fleet lay at an- 
 chor north of the city. The gates of the city-walls 
 were closed, however, and all the gates of the streets 
 shut. 
 
 Early the next morning the rebels were found on 
 the island of Amoy. They had landed not far from 
 the government fleet. Not a war-vessel had opposed 
 their landing, not a shot had been fired. Not only 
 were the rebels on the island ; they were in front of 
 the city, and ready with the light of day to make 
 an attack on the gates of the streets. But they 
 found no need of that. All the street-gates stood 
 open before them. Early in the morning the rebel 
 army entered the city, and without bloodshed took 
 possession of the unwalled part of the town. The 
 people quietly received their new masters. The 
 walled part of the city was still closed to the invad- 
 ing army. The four gates were kept securely fast- 
 ened and strongly guarded. After taking full pos- 
 session of the rest of the town, the rebels marched 
 to the walled part and began an assault on three of 
 the four gates. The fourth they neglected as though 
 it did not exist. Not a rebel soldier was seen near 
 it. After a short assault the three gates gave way 
 and the attacking army entered. Not an imperial 
 soldier was to be seen inside. The fourth gate stood 
 wide open, and through it might be seen the rear of 
 the government army hastening to the war-vessels 
 10 
 
146 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 in the harbor. Every soldier and every mandarin 
 had escaped, and all were soon on board the govern- 
 ment vessels, which weighed anchor, hoisted sail 
 and moved away, leaving the city entirely in the 
 hands of the rebels. Not a man was killed and 
 only one or two wounded in the taking of the city. 
 The rebels were delighted, most of the people satis- 
 fied and the imperial army not greatly troubled. 
 
 Why the mandarins so readily gave up the city is 
 uncertain. Perhaps they had heard so much of 
 rebel victories that they dared not meet them ; and 
 it is possible that some of the officials of the gov- 
 ernment made enough money by delivering up the 
 city to the rebels to make defeat easy to bear. Bat- 
 tles more bloodless and more successful can be fought 
 in China by silver than by the sword. 
 
 It is not rare for attacking armies in China to 
 neglect one gate of a walled town. The reason 
 given for this is that a rat, when he finds a hole for 
 escape, will run away, but when all ways of escape 
 are cut off he will fight. 
 
 Not long did the rebels peaceably hold possession 
 of Amoy. When the news reached Pekin the man- 
 darins were ordered to retake the city at offce. 
 
 Two weeks after the government fleet sailed 
 northward from Amoy, there came a fleet of im- 
 perial war-vessels into the same harbor from the 
 south. The mandarins tried to enter the harbor 
 and take the city by surprise, but the rebels knew 
 of their coming and knew their plans. Instead of 
 
REBELLION AT AMOY. 
 
 147 
 
 coming in front of the city, the vessels anchored 
 some distance away, and at once the soldiers landed 
 and marched to assault the place on the side away 
 from the water. As they advanced, sure of victory, 
 they were suddenly and furiously attacked by rebel 
 soldiers hidden in the valley south of the city. 
 Partly recovering from the surprise, the mandarins 
 tried to urge on their soldiers to battle. Many did 
 stand, but they were too much frightened to fight 
 with any hope of success, and soon the battle became 
 a rout. The government soldiers fled, some toward 
 the city, others to the vessels. Those who reached 
 the war-vessels went away with them as soon as 
 possible; those who found no hiding-place in the 
 city were caught and held as prisoners, if not killed. 
 
 Tli is was a very different battle from that by 
 which the rebels took the city, as the many wound- 
 ed and dead proved. Not content with driving off 
 the mandarin army, the rebels determined to capture 
 every soldier hiding in the town. Little bands of 
 victors after the fight marched through the streets 
 searching for fugitives ; whenever one was found he 
 was hurried off to the walled part of the town, there 
 to be held for a ransom if unwilling to turn rebel, 
 or put where he would never fight rebels any more. 
 
 All the afternoon of this day the rebel soldiers 
 were searching houses or marching: through the 
 streets with their prisoners. The excitement was 
 great. The shouts of the victorious soldiers, the 
 screams of terrified women and the cries of fright- 
 
 O 
 
148 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 ened children made the people almost wild with 
 terror. 
 
 This day, as well as that on which the rebels cap- 
 tured the city, was the Sabbath — a day like others to 
 nearly all the people in Amoy, but there were a few 
 to whom it was a sacred day. About ten years be- 
 fore, missionaries from America, and later from Eng- 
 land, had come to Amoy to preach the gospel, and 
 at this time there were quite a number of Christians 
 in the young churches established in the city. These, 
 after morning worship, were startled by the firing 
 and the noise of battle, and later heard the shouts 
 of the victorious rebels as they pursued the fugitive 
 soldiers. An officer of the defeated army, Sok Tai 
 by name, came to the door of the house of the Rev. 
 John Stronach, an English missionary, and begged 
 to be saved from the vengeance of the rebels. Sok 
 Tai, though an officer in the army, was a Christian 
 and well known to Mr. Stronach. The good mis- 
 sionary at once took the man into his house and 
 promised to protect him. Soon after the rebel sol- 
 diers appeared at the door and asked for the officer 
 hidden there. The missionary told the soldiers that 
 they had no right to enter his house, and that he 
 would not give up to them any good man who asked 
 for protection. In vain the soldiers pleaded and 
 threatened ; the fugitive was not given to them. 
 Mr. Stronach was so well known in the city as a 
 good and brave man that the rebels dared not at- 
 tempt to take the hiding soldier from his house. 
 
REBELLION AT AMOY. 
 
 149 
 
 They feared not merely the missionary, but the 
 English nation. Wishing to keep the friendship 
 of foreigners, the soldiers left the fugitive in Mr. 
 Stronach’s charge for the time. Afterward the 
 rebel officers demanded Sok Tai from the mission- 
 ary, but the demand was met with a polite though 
 firm refusal, nor could anything that was said or 
 done compel the brave missionary to give up to 
 death a man who had been doing his duty in fight- 
 ing against the enemies of his country. Not long 
 after, Mr. Stronach sent his charge by a foreign ves- 
 sel to Shanghai, where he remained until the rebels 
 left the city, when he returned, gave up his position 
 in the array and became a preacher of the gospel. 
 He was until lately, and may yet be, a preacher in 
 one of the churches of Amoy, where he has done 
 faithful service in trying to bring the same city to 
 his imperial Master, Jesus. 
 
 Arrangements had been made for a baptismal 
 service that afternoon in the first Christian church 
 of Amoy. The Christians from all parts of the 
 city had been invited to be present to unite in the 
 service connected with the baptism. When news 
 of the battle reached the missionaries, and they saw 
 the excitement in the city, they feared that it would 
 be impossible to hold the service. People were 
 hiding everywhere, while excited men were rushing 
 through the streets. Soon after came the shouts of 
 the victors as they chased fugitives through the 
 streets or led captives to the walled part of the town. 
 
150 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 This seemed anything but the time for a religious 
 meeting, yet the missionaries, thinking that a few 
 Christians might gather, went to the church intend- 
 ing to hold a prayer-meeting with those who might 
 attend. When they reached the place they found a 
 number of people waiting for them, and among 
 them the converts who were expecting to be bap- 
 tized. The excitement of battle could not keep 
 them away from the house of God at such a time as 
 this. Water was brought, and amid the shouts and 
 uproar of the streets these who a short time before 
 had been heathen were consecrated to God and his 
 Church by baptism. It was a sacred, a precious ser- 
 vice, though they did not know but that it would 
 be their last together on earth. As the frightened 
 sheep draw nearer together and gather closer about 
 the shepherd when they hear the howl of the wolf, 
 so did these followers of Jesus draw nearer together 
 and closer to the Great Shepherd as they heard the 
 wild screams without. 
 
 After this battle the imperial soldiers, learning a 
 lesson from their defeat, prepared more deliberately 
 to capture the city. For four and a half months 
 they were gathering soldiers and making elaborate 
 preparations for another attack. The people of 
 Amoy knew that when it came the capture of the 
 city would not be a bloodless one. There were 
 gloomy forebodings. Many consultations did the 
 Christians hold and many were the prayers offered 
 at the mercy-seat. 
 
REBELLION AT AMOY. 
 
 151 
 
 It needed all the shrewdness of a Chinaman’s 
 nature to pray just right — not so much as it regarded 
 God, but as it regarded man. The sympathy of the 
 people was largely with the rebels, while the rebels 
 were warm friends of foreigners and of the mission- 
 aries, and seemed to be very favorable to Christian- 
 ity. To pray against such an army was a difficult 
 thing for the Chinese Christians. The mandarins 
 were opposed to foreigners, to missionaries and their 
 religion, so that to pray for the national government 
 was a severe tax for the faith of the converts. But 
 as the missionaries had taught them to respect and 
 pray for their rulers, the people did not know what 
 else to do. The missionaries wisely said as little as 
 possible about the rebellion. Quietly attending to 
 their duties, they left the affairs of the nation in the 
 hands of others, looking to God to overrule all for 
 the good of the people and the furtherance of his 
 cause. 
 
 At last the imperial fleet sailed into the harbor 
 from the south and, passing around Ko-long-su, a 
 small island in the harbor and half a mile west of 
 the city, anchored at the mouth of a creek north of 
 the town. An army landed and encamped near the 
 walls of Amoy. The rebel fleet was anchored in 
 front of the city and not far from the anchoring- 
 place of the mandarin vessels. After the army had 
 landed the imperial fleet hoisted anchor, and, sailing 
 down toward the rebel vessels, discharged a broad- 
 side at them ; then, sailing off to the westward, 
 
152 
 
 CIIOII LIN. 
 
 it came back to its anchorage again. As soon as 
 wind and tide permitted the rebel fleet hoisted an- 
 chor, and, sailing toward the enemy’s fleet, fired a 
 broadside and came back to its anchoring-ground. 
 Day after day, if wind allowed, was this saluting, 
 for it proved little more, kept up. Now and then 
 a ball struck a vessel, more by accident than because 
 of correct aim, and usually the result of each broad- 
 side was a bloodless victory, though to which side 
 it would have been hard to tell. The rebels, not 
 having enough men to garrison the city and at the 
 same time keep up the battles on the water, were 
 forced to gather on board their junks when the tide 
 and wind suited, and after the brief fight hurry 
 ashore to be ready to repel any attack that might 
 be made on land. 
 
 The real fighting, though, was done from the 
 walls of the city and the decks of the vessels when 
 the guns were silent. This was done not with can- 
 non or musket, nor yet with arrow nor dart, but 
 with the weapon that of all kinds the Chinese sol- 
 diers know so well how to handle — the tongue. 
 With their tongues sailors and soldiers kept up, 
 when near enough to be heard, an almost ceaseless 
 fire. Every kind of evil name of which they could 
 think — and Chinese can think of a great many — - 
 they called the opposing forces. Had it been possi- 
 ble for hard names to kill or even wound, then 
 there would soon not have been a soldier to handle a 
 gun nor a sailor to hoist an anchor either in defence 
 
REBELLION AT AMOY. 
 
 153 
 
 of or for the capture of the city. No name seemed 
 so well suited to the rebels, in the opinion of the 
 mandarins, as “ Ang-thau Chhat” (“red-headed 
 robbers”), while the rebels all agreed in calling the 
 other side “ Kwoan Chhat” (“mandarin robbers”). 
 
 Their guns not being of the best nor their courage 
 the greatest, this method of warfare suited both sides, 
 and for six weeks it was continued on the water, 
 while the mode of fighting on land was not very 
 different. The imperial soldiers would come near 
 enough to the city to allow their musket-balls to fall 
 short of the walls, and the rebels on the fortifications 
 fired back with the same bloodless effect. 
 
 One morning very early there was a great com- 
 motion within the walls as the rebel soldiers marched 
 out and through the city and down to their vessels. 
 They embarked in. sight of the imperial fleet, hoist- 
 ed anchor and hurriedly sailed away, leaving behind 
 some of their number who had for different reasons 
 been delayed. The government vessels remained at 
 anchor and did nothing whatever to hinder the es- 
 cape of the rebels. As soon as they left the city the 
 mandarin army marched in and took possession. 
 
 Now began a massacre. The capturing forces at- 
 tacked the few rebels they found and cruelly butch- 
 ered them. Every one else who seemed to offer 
 resistance was at once killed, while many a one, 
 neither soldier nor rebel, was without any reason 
 murdered. It was necessary for the credit of the 
 victors to report to Pekin that after a long siege the 
 
154 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 city of Amoy had been taken, but only taken after 
 a terrible battle in which a great number of the 
 enemy were killed. The greater the number of 
 slain the more would seem the courage of the con- 
 querors. The rebels were cruel, but the mandarin 
 soldiers were far more so. It is not the truly brave, 
 but the cowards, who are cruel. 
 
CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 MRS. LEE FINDS THE LIFE-GIVING GOD. 
 
 T HE news of the capture of Amoy by the rebels 
 reached Tay Soa the same day. The Tay Soa 
 passenger-boats hurried away from the city as soon 
 as they could, and reported that an immense num- 
 ber of rebels had captured Amoy and driven away 
 the government soldiers. Proof of this soon fol- 
 lowed, as the government fleet was before long seen 
 to sail around to the north of Amoy Island. 
 
 Some were well pleased to know that the rebels 
 had come so near and had so easily driven out the 
 hated mandarins, while a few were troubled. They 
 did not wish to see the government overthrown, and 
 asked only for peace. They had seen enough of 
 the clan-wars, or battles between the people of dif- 
 ferent families and villages, and thought that if 
 such small wars proved so destructive to property, 
 a war between the whole government and a large 
 army of rebels would be worse. But a great many 
 did not care. They had little to lose, and war 
 might give them a chance to gain something. 
 
 Chinese know very little about true patriotism or 
 love of country. While they believe theirs to be 
 
 155 
 
] 56 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 the best country of the world, they do not deem the 
 mandarins the best rulers. They know that many 
 are dishonest, cruel and care little for the country 
 or the people if themselves may but gain plenty 
 of money. While there are officers in China, and 
 probably many, who are true patriots, most of the 
 people, at least of the lower and middle classes, be- 
 lieve that their rulers love money more than any- 
 thing else ; nor are they far wrong. Why should 
 they think otherwise? The people themselves love 
 money even more than Americans do — can more be 
 said? — and they judge their rulers by themselves. 
 
 The capture of Amoy gave the people of Tay 
 Soa much to talk about and the timid ones many 
 an anxious thought ; but when the boats went safe- 
 ly to and from Amoy after the rebels had posses- 
 sion, their fears slowly passed away. After the de- 
 feat of the government soldiers in the battle of 
 A-Mung-Kong those who were friendly to the 
 rebels were not slow to speak. They prophesied 
 that soon the government of the whole country 
 would change hands and that the rebel leader would 
 become emperor. It was said that the rebels were 
 enemies of the gods, and that they worshiped a for- 
 eign god, and if successful would force all the Chi- 
 nese to give up the worship of their gods. 
 
 “ If they are enemies of the gods,” said Choh 
 Lin’s grandmother, “ then the mandarins will de- 
 stroy the long-haired* robbers. Any people who 
 
 * When China was conquered by the Mantchu Tartars, about 
 
FINDING THE LIFE-GIVING GOD. 
 
 157 
 
 fight the gods fight against themselves, and should 
 be overthrown.” 
 
 “They may be overthrown,” spoke Chi Lap (this 
 was before he had gone to Amoy), “ but it will be 
 because they have not enough soldiers, rather than 
 because they have not enough gods to help them. 
 Gods that cannot take care of people when there is 
 peace will not be likely to do so when there is war.” 
 
 “ You are a bad boy,” replied the old lady 
 angrily ; “ I only wonder that the gods let you live 
 at all. I hope that they will teach you to speak 
 better of them, and that — that — that they will over- 
 throw the rebels and let you, and such as you, see 
 that the gods are mighty.” 
 
 When the news of the retreat of the rebels reached 
 Tay Soa the old lady was happy. She said that the 
 gods had at last shown whom they would help. Chi 
 Lap had little to say, though he did not believe that 
 the gods of China had much to do with the failure 
 of the rebels. He only wondered why they, who 
 had so successfully held the city, did not fight a 
 battle before giving it up. 
 
 It was some time after the mandarins had recap- 
 tured Amoy that Chi Lap went to the city to be- 
 come a peddler. Perhaps the removal of her son 
 
 two hundred and fifty years ago, the people were ordered to 
 shave their heads, and only allow the hair on the crown to grow 
 long and be braided in a queue as now. The Tai-Ping rebels 
 did not shave their heads, but allowed the hair to grow long • 
 hence they were often spoken of as “the long-haired rebels” 
 and “ long-haired robbers.” 
 
158 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 gave Mrs. Lee a new idea. In Tay Soa and the 
 villages near considerable cotton cloth, or muslin 
 — more than was used by the people — was woven, 
 and some of it was sold elsewhere. Mrs. Lee saw 
 that some was taken to Amoy for sale, and thought 
 that she might try to make a little money in this 
 way. This seemed much easier than working in 
 and around the village wherever she could find em- 
 ployment. 
 
 She bought some cotton cloth from her friends 
 and started one morning in a passenger-boat for 
 Amoy. She had been to the city before, and had 
 no difficulty in finding a sale for her goods. Sell- 
 ing for a fair profit, she determined to try again, 
 and soon had quite a trade. But she bought more 
 than cloth ; she also took eggs and poultry, as well 
 as other things, for sale in Amoy ; and after a while 
 one and another of her friends in Tay Soa had her 
 make purchases in the city for them. As she made 
 a profit on what she bought as well as on what she 
 sold, she could thus comfortably support herself 
 and her family. 
 
 Chi Lap, being now in the city, took care of him- 
 self, so Mrs. Lee had only four instead of five to 
 support. Choli Lin, however, was unable to go to 
 school, much as he wished to learn, because he was 
 needed at home while his mother was away, nor 
 were they yet rich enough to get along without his 
 help in gathering fuel and oysters and other articles 
 of food. 
 
FINDING THE LIFE-GIVING GOD. 159 
 
 Tay Soa was on a bay that became bare at low 
 tide, so that boats were compelled to go out and 
 come in with high water, and were thus obliged, as 
 tides came about an hour later every day, to start 
 sometimes very late in the day and again very early 
 in the morning. Nor could they leave Amoy un- 
 less the wind was favorable until the tide ran toward 
 Tay Soa. Even if they did go homeward before 
 the tide suited, they must wait some distance from 
 home until there was enough water in Tay Soa Bay 
 to sail up to the landing. Hence passengers were 
 often obliged to stay in Amoy several hours, and if 
 a very strong north-east wind blew they had to stay 
 a day or more in the city. 
 
 One day Mrs. Lee, after having sold her goods, 
 while waiting for the boat to start, took a walk 
 through the city. She had heard that foreigners 
 lived in the city, and she wanted to see one of their 
 homes. Having friends in Amoy, she persuaded 
 one of them, who lived not far from the home of 
 the American missionaries, to take her to the place. 
 Accompanied by a little girl, the two women went 
 to the house of the missionaries. It was a Chinese- 
 built house, somewhat changed and enlarged. The 
 missionaries lived in the second story, while on the 
 ground-floor was a chapel. The chapel-door stood 
 open as the two approached, but no one was in the 
 room. It was full of benches, and Mrs. Lee ex- 
 claimed as they entered, “ Oh, see how many seats 
 the foreigners have ! How many of them there 
 
160 
 
 CHOH LIN 
 
 must be ! What a large room ! how high and 
 light ! But what is that at the other end ?” 
 
 Her friend could not give very satisfactory an- 
 swers to her questions, but suggested that this was 
 perhaps a “ worship-hall.” 
 
 “ What !” spoke Mrs. Lee, “ is this where the for- 
 eigners worship their gods? or do they keep the 
 tablets of their ancestors here? I would like to 
 see their gods ; but where are the foreigners ?” 
 
 Her friend had heard of the chapel and worship, 
 but could not say anything about it from what she 
 had seen. While they were talking the Chinese 
 chapel-keeper appeared, and, greeting them respect- 
 fully, asked what they wanted. 
 
 “ Oh, nothing,” replied Mrs. Lee ; “ we only came 
 for amusement.” 
 
 “ This is not a place for amusement,” said the 
 man, “ but a place to hear the doctrine.” 
 
 “Very well, then, we will hear the doctrine,” 
 spoke Mrs. Lee, though she did not know what was 
 meant by “ the doctrine.” Like all other Chinese, 
 she was anxious to see and hear everything. 
 
 The chapel-keeper invited them to be seated, and 
 then began to tell of the doctrines of the Bible. At 
 first none of the three were interested, but as the 
 good man told the story of Jesus, new to Mrs. Lee, 
 her attention was drawn, her eyes were fixed on the 
 speaker, and, almost breathless, she listened to catch 
 each word as it fell from his lips. It was a new, a 
 strange doctrine, but it awoke in her mind all those 
 
 O 7 
 
FINDING THE LIFE-GIVING GOD. 161 
 
 old longings for the life-giving God. She asked 
 few questions at first, yet seemed to drink in every 
 word. She was surprised, astonished, yet delighted, 
 to hear this doctrine. 
 
 After a while the speaker stopped, as he said, “ I 
 cannot make this as plain as the missionary can. I 
 am like one who has been blind all his life, and then 
 suddenly finds his eyes opened to the brightness of 
 noonday. My eyes are dazzled with the light. I see, 
 I wonder, I am delighted, but dazzled. I can only 
 tell little, yet that little shows how much light there 
 is. The missionary himself will soon be down to 
 preach the doctrine, and he will make it all plain 
 to you. He was born in the light and has ever 
 lived in it, and knows ten thousand times more 
 than I do. Come back again soon and hear him 
 speak.” 
 
 Mrs. Lee went away determined to return as soou 
 as the missionary came. Her heart was full. Her 
 friend did not seem to care to talk of the new doc- 
 trine, but Mrs. Lee could speak of nothing else. It 
 was as if her thirsty soul had at last found the water 
 for which she had longed so many years. As she 
 thought of what the chapel-keeper had said the 
 feeling of gladness began to give place to one of 
 sorrow. That story of Christ’s suffering for sinners 
 • — for all the sinners of the world, and for herself 
 as well as others — was one that she could not un- 
 derstand. She did understand the suffering and the 
 love, but how could Christ know about her? If it 
 ll 
 
162 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 were true, and this foreign God really knew about 
 her, and then died to save her, surely she must be 
 a great sinner; and how much he must love ! How 
 much he must have loved mankind to die for them ! 
 How different this story from the stories of their 
 gods of China ! How different this God must be 
 from those of her country! They were only will- 
 ing to give favors after they had been well paid for 
 it, and too often they took all they could get and 
 gave nothing in return. This God gave his best 
 first, and to the worst as well as to the best of man- 
 kind, and then kept giving favors afterward to all, 
 only asking in return that people should love and 
 trust and serve him. 
 
 Before the time for service came Mrs. Lee was at 
 the chapel waiting. When the missionary appeared 
 she had little thought about his strange dress or his 
 appearance, but only of the doctrine she hoped to 
 hear. When the hymn was given out she listened 
 intently. The missionary began by saying, “Now, 
 great family, come let us sing and praise God.” 
 When the singing began Mrs. Lee thought she had 
 never heard anything like it. It certainly was very 
 different from the chanting and singing of the Chi- 
 nese that she had heard. The singing, however, 
 was not of the best. That did not matter to Mrs. 
 Lee ; she was not a singer herself, yet that singing 
 pleased her. When she saw that many others sang, 
 she wanted to join, but did not dare let her voice 
 attempt it, though her heart sang with the rest. She 
 
FINDING THE LIFE-GIVING GOD. 163 
 
 felt that her heart could join in the prayer, and she 
 did pray with her whole soul. As the good mis- 
 sionary thanked God for Ids mercy toward sinners 
 in sending his only Son to die for them, she felt 
 that he was uttering her own thanks ; and then as 
 he told God of their sinfulness and begged for par- 
 don, she felt that the missionary was praying her 
 own prayer. Those strange, wonderful words which 
 he read from a book that he called “God’s book” 
 went to her heart. Mrs. Lee’s interest did not 
 lessen with the sermon. It was a simple statement 
 of the truths of the gospel : it told of man’s sinful- 
 ness, of the trouble and sorrow that sin caused, and 
 what ruin it would at last bring to the soul ; it told 
 how the world failed to find any remedy for sin, 
 and then told of Jesus the great Saviour from sin. 
 
 Doubtless, God directed the preacher to present 
 just that truth ; it certainly was what Mrs. Lee 
 needed and what she had longed for for years. It 
 told her of the life-giving; God ; it taught her also 
 that she needed another life — a life that this God 
 alone could give, for sin was working death in her. 
 
 At last Mrs. Lee had found the God she had 
 sought so long, and it was the God of foreigners ! 
 At once she determined to make him her own God. 
 It seemed now as if she were in a new world. The 
 darkness in which she had been groping was gone ; 
 instead of being lost, and not knowing where to go 
 or what to do, she saw a plain path before her. It 
 is true, she could see only a little way in that path, 
 
164 
 
 CHOH LTN. 
 
 but she could see the path, and she was sure it was 
 the right one. Seeing the path, she had only one 
 thought — to enter it at once. 
 
 After Mrs. Lee had learned this much and thought 
 it over she began to understand how little she did 
 know. One thing she saw — while it surprised her, 
 yet it gave her confidence in the missionary : he 
 seemed to know all there was in her heart. She 
 was certain he had not seen her before, but that he 
 knew her feelings, and had told them, was just as 
 certain ; so she felt sure that he would be able to tell 
 all she needed to know. Afterward, in speaking of 
 that first sermon and the talk of the chapel-keeper, 
 she said, “ Among the tens of thousands of people 
 whom I have met, I never before met any that 
 knew what was in me; but these men,” meaning 
 the chapel-keeper as well as the missionary, “ have 
 told me what was in my very bones.” 
 
 When the service closed she was obliged to hasten 
 to the boat, but it was with a determination to come 
 affain soon and hear more of the new good doctrine. 
 Part of her business in Amoy at this time was to 
 buy, for others as well as herself, incense-sticks, 
 idolatrous paper and other things used in idol- and 
 spirit-worship; but after hearing the talk of the 
 chapel-keeper and the sermon of the missionary she 
 determined not to buy anything for idol-worship 
 nor to have anything whatever to do with idolatry, 
 or with the worship of the spirits of the dead. On 
 the boat she could hardly help telling the people 
 
FINDING THE LIFE-GIVING GOD. 165 
 
 what she had heard, but as it is not considered 
 proper for a woman to speak much in the presence 
 of men, she kept her thoughts to herself. 
 
 She was sure that her children and mother-in-law 
 would be as glad to hear about the new religion as 
 she had been. She pictured to herself their sur- 
 prise and joy when they heard of this God who so 
 loved the world, and for their own sakes too, and 
 not for the good he could get from them. 
 
 After reaching home she first showed her pur- 
 chases, thinking it would be all the better to wait 
 to tell about the new God until all were quiet. 
 After she had shown all her purchases the mother- 
 in-law asked, “ Where are the incense-sticks, paper 
 and other things for offering to the gods and to the 
 spirits of the dead?” 
 
 “I have brought none,” replied Mrs. Lee; “I 
 did not buy any. We will no longer need such 
 things ; they will be of no use to us any more.” 
 
 “No use?” said the old lady in amazement; 
 “ what do you mean ?” 
 
 “ I mean,” answered Mrs. Lee, “ that we have 
 found the true God and will no longer worship 
 idols.” 
 
 “‘The true God’!” repeated the grandmother ; 
 “of course ours are the true gods. Why, then, did 
 not you bring the things with which to worship 
 them ?” 
 
 “ I did not bring them because I have found a 
 better way of worshiping the true God. The gods 
 
166 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 of our fathers are not the true gods, but I know 
 the true God now. He is the life-giving God 
 whom I sought so long in vain in all the temples. 
 He is the one we need. I am so glad that we 
 know about him now ! Listen while I tell you.” 
 
 Then she told what she had heard, expecting to 
 
 find her mother-in-law as much interested as she was. 
 Choh Lin listened eagerly, and his sister was atten- 
 tive too, and seemed rather pleased than otherwise ; 
 but the grandmother, instead of listening with 
 pleasure, grew displeased, and then angry, and would 
 hardly allow her daughter-in-law to finish before she 
 said angrily, “ Is that the god you have found ? It 
 is a foreign god, and you have been telling one of 
 the false stories of the foreigners. If they have 
 gods, we do not want them. We will not have 
 
 them. You shall not worship them. You must 
 
 not teach the children anything about them or their 
 doctrine. I will not allow it.” And then, as if 
 fearful that she had shown too much anger, for she 
 was becoming a little careful of what she said to 
 Mrs. Lee, she continued in a milder tone, “The 
 gods of the Middle Kingdom are the gods for us ; 
 the worship of the fathers should be our worship. 
 If there are better gods than our own, our fathers 
 would have found it out long ago. Be assured that 
 they found the best there are, and taught their chil- 
 dren to worship them.” 
 
 Mrs. Lee was surprised, disappointed, sad, and 
 for a moment almost angry, and would have given 
 
FINDING THE LIFE-GIVING GOD. 167 
 
 a sharp reply had not her mother-in-law spoken 
 more mildly at the last. She replied in a gentle and 
 almost pleading voice, “ But this doctrine went to 
 my heart as a bird to its nest, and is sitting there. 
 It is just what I have wanted to hear, but none of 
 our priests or people could tell me. I have longed 
 for this ever since the cruel relatives killed me and 
 I was brought back to life again. It is the doctrine 
 of the heart.” 
 
 “ Yes,” replied the other, angrily, “ and your 
 longing brought on us all the trouble we have suf- 
 fered. It has robbed me of my son and his chil- 
 dren of their property. You have been unfaithful 
 to the gods, and we have all suffered for that un- 
 faithfulness. Do not bring on us greater trouble by 
 deserting the gods of our people altogether.” 
 
 Choh Lin’s sister, who was usually quiet, could 
 not hear her mother so unjustly accused, even by 
 the grandmother, without some reply. “ Grand- 
 mother,” said she, “ mother was faithful to the gods 
 before father died, and afterward she did all she 
 could to serve them. Not until her husband and 
 her property were taken away, and she was almost 
 robbed of life, did she cease her faithful worship of 
 the gods. And even then she did not desert the 
 gods ; she only sought the one who had brought her 
 back to life.”’ 
 
 “ You girls don’t know anything about such 
 things,” replied the grandmother petulantly. 
 
 Choh Lin, who had listened with close attention 
 
168 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 to his mother’s story, felt hurt at the rebuke of the 
 grandmother, and as soon as she had answered his 
 sister he asked, “Grandmother, did the gods take 
 my father away? and did they allow the relatives 
 to rob us of our property ?” 
 
 “ Of course they did,” replied she sharply. 
 “ They punish those who desert them.” 
 
 “ But mother did not desert the gods, grand- 
 mother. She went to the temple and prayed very 
 often when my father was sick. I remember about it, 
 and she prayed and offered the gods many sacrifices 
 afterward, too, asking them to take care of us and 
 keep the relatives from taking away our property; 
 yet her prayers were not answered. We lost all, 
 even though she begged the gods so much to take 
 care of us. Grandmother” — and he spoke slowly 
 — “ the gods deserted mother ; they deserted us all, 
 and not we them.” 
 
 The old lady looked with amazement at the boy, 
 and then said, “ Have the evil spirits entered our 
 family ? What will come next ?” Saying this, she 
 walked hastily away. 
 
CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 PERSECUTION. 
 
 M RS. LEE soon made another visit to Amoy 
 and to the mission-chapel, where she heard 
 more of the truth. She found business calling her 
 oftener to the city now than formerly, and each time 
 she visited the chapel to have a talk with the chapel- 
 keeper or missionary if it were not time for service. 
 There was no more earnest listener than she when 
 the gospel was preached, nor any inquirer more at- 
 tentive to what was said in the inquiry-meetings 
 which she attended. Rapidly she learned the truth, 
 and soon became able to teach others. 
 
 Mrs. Lee was ready to talk of the new religion 
 to any people whom she met, but soon learned that 
 it was wisdom to say nothing to her mother-in-law. 
 The old lady became excited and angry whenever 
 the gospel was referred to, and often forbade Mrs. 
 Lee to speak to any one in the family of the new 
 religion. The daughter, however, listened atten- 
 tively and eagerly when her mother spoke of the 
 Saviour. When the two were alone, then more 
 questions were asked by the younger, not a few, 
 
 169 
 
170 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 however, being unanswered until Mrs. Lee had 
 made another trip to the city. 
 
 Choh Lin had become at once interested in the 
 gospel, nor was he afraid to talk of the new religion 
 even in the presence of his grandmother, though he 
 soon learned that it was best to keep silence on the 
 subject when she was near. The story of the love 
 of Jesus for men had won the heart of the boy, and 
 he was eager to know more about the Saviour. He 
 watched anxiously for the return of his mother 
 from the city ; and often had more questions to ask 
 about what she had learned from the missionaries 
 than what she had seen and done while there. 
 
 When Chi Lap, on his visits home, heard about 
 the gospel, he too listened with interest, and was 
 pleased ; but his thoughts were so full of money- 
 making in Amoy that he had more to say about 
 that than about the new religion. A dread seemed 
 to come over him after a while lest the people in 
 the village should persecute them for being Chris- 
 tians, and he urged Choh Lin to say nothing about 
 the gospel to others, and even begged his mother 
 not to tell the neighbors that she had determined to 
 become a Christian. 
 
 “ It is all right ,” said he, “ to pray to the foreign 
 God — he is much better than the gods of China — 
 but pray to him when others do not see you, and 
 don’t neglect the worship of the idols entirely. The 
 people will not care how much you worship foreign 
 gods as long as you do not desert their own.” 
 
PERSECUTION. 
 
 171 
 
 Choh Lin refused to be entirely silent, and his 
 mother would tell her friends of the life-giving 
 God ; nor did she stop with that : she urged them 
 to take him as their God. 
 
 The grandmother made every effort to lead her 
 daughter-in-law back to idolatry and to the worship 
 of the spirits. She tried to persuade Mrs. Lee to 
 give up her Amoy business, hoping in this way to 
 keep her from the influence of the missionaries. 
 She forbade her daughter-in-law going to the chap- 
 el, and threatened her with severe punishment if 
 she dared disobey. Mrs. Lee was not a woman to 
 be hindered by threats from doing what she believed 
 to be her duty as well as her right; so she continued 
 her business in Amoy and her visits at the chapel. 
 There were no Christians near Tay Soa, nor was there 
 any Christian service nearer than Amoy. In addi- 
 tion to the morning and evening worship, there was a 
 preaching-service each day in the chapel there, and on 
 the Sabbath there were several services in the same 
 place. One of these was an inquiry-meeting, where 
 all who wished to know more of the gospel were 
 questioned about their knowledge and plainly taught 
 the truth. As it was not proper, according to Chi- 
 nese custom, for the younger women to meet with 
 the men, Monday afternoon was set apart as a time 
 for special service for the women. Mrs. Lee learned 
 very soon of this woman’s meeting, and attended it 
 whenever she could, instead of the Sabbath service. 
 The missionaries, noticing that she was almost al- 
 
172 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 ways present on Monday instead of on Sunday, 
 asked why she did not attend the Sabbath service, 
 since it was allowable for women of her age to meet 
 with the men. 
 
 “ I thought that w r as the men’s Sabbath,” replied 
 she, “and Monday the Sabbath for the women.” 
 
 When told that women did not meet with the 
 men because a part of the chapel had not been par- 
 titioned off for their use, and that the Monday af- 
 ternoon meeting was intended for the young women, 
 who could not meet with the men, and that the first 
 day of the week was the Sabbath for all, she said 
 that she would be there afterward on the first in- 
 stead of the second day of the week ; nor did she 
 spend many Sabbaths after that away from Amoy. 
 Usually she started for the city on Saturday, and 
 returned on Monday to her home. On these trips 
 she took with her not only her food, but fuel with 
 which to cook it. The mother-in-law, noticing soon 
 that Mrs. Lee made a point of visiting Amoy once 
 every seven days, suspected that it had something to 
 do with the worship of the foreign God, and tried 
 to stop her trips to the city. She even forbade Mrs. 
 Lee to take food along. Choh Lin, who heard his 
 grandmother forbid his mother to take food or fuel, 
 was so anxious to have her learn more of the gospel 
 that he hid some of the wood gathered each week, 
 and on Saturday carried it on board the passenger- 
 vessel for his mother’s use in the city : he even car- 
 ried rice on board, so that his grandmother would 
 
PERSECUTION. 
 
 173 
 
 not suspect that Mrs. Lee was going to the city. 
 They could not long keep it a secret from the old 
 lady : she was made sure by others where her daugh- 
 ter-in-law went and what she did in the city. If, 
 for any reason, Mrs. Lee did not go to Amoy to 
 spend the Sabbath, she held a service at home with 
 her two children, who were becoming almost as 
 much interested in the gospel as their mother. 
 They had learned to pray, they refused to work on 
 the Sabbath, and were trying to live Christian lives 
 as well as they knew how. 
 
 When their mother was away the two tried to 
 keep up a Sabbath worship, though the old lady, 
 taking: advantage of Mrs. Lee’s absence, sought to 
 lead the children back to idolatry. 
 
 “ Grandmother,” said Choh Lin one day, “ you 
 don’t know about this foreign God ; you will not 
 let mother tell of him, and no one else has ever 
 told you ; how can you tell whether or not he is 
 good ?” 
 
 “ The gods and the religion of our fathers are 
 good enough for me,” she replied ; “ our ancestors 
 believed in them and died in that faith ; why should 
 not I? Beware of this foreign religion; it will 
 some day bring ruin upon those who heed it.” 
 
 “Grandmother,” answered he, “mother has wor- 
 shiped the gods of the Middle Kingdom; she now 
 worships the God of the foreigners ; she has had a 
 chance to try both. She likes the God of the for- 
 eigners best. Whom are we to follow — the oue 
 
174 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 who has tried both sides or the one who has tried 
 only one ?” 
 
 “ You haven’t seen the end of this worship of a 
 foreign God,” replied the old lady. “ Let your 
 mother beware when the gods visit their anger 
 upon you.” 
 
 The persuasions and warnings of his grandmother 
 had little etfect upon the boy. The doctrines his 
 mother taught on her return from the city made 
 him the more anxious to become a Christian, but 
 there was one oft-repeated appeal from the grand- 
 mother that was not without its etfect : “ I am soon 
 going to the spirit-world,” said she, “and what will 
 my spirit do for food and clothing if my grand- 
 children refuse to care for it? I must live and 
 starve, yet starve and live. The other spirits, en- 
 joying plenty provided by faithful relatives, will 
 think that I have been very bad to be thus deserted 
 by my own children. I will be deserted, shunned, 
 hated and made an outcast in the spirit-world ; and 
 all because my children desert the religion of their 
 fathers. I will suffer, suffer, suffer, and all because 
 my children have deserted me; yet they say they 
 love me. Is this, can it be, love? No, no; my 
 worst enemy could not do more.” 
 
 It needed all the mother’s faith and knowledge 
 to keep her children from turning back to supersti- 
 tion and idolatry when they for the first time heard 
 this appeal. The Chinese believe that their com- 
 forts in the next life depend on their friends and 
 
Mrs. Lee, 
 
 Page 175, 
 

 
 
 
PERSECUTION. 
 
 175 
 
 relatives in this. Not only do they believe that 
 their souls are fed and clothed by the gifts of their 
 friends in tbis world, but that the respect and honor 
 their spirits receive from their friends in the unseen 
 world depend on the attention shown by relatives 
 in this. The people may doubt the power of the 
 gods, and even ridicule them, but none of them 
 ridicule the worship of spirits : to that idolatry all 
 are faithful. 
 
 As Mrs. Lee continued to attend the chapel-ser- 
 vice at Amoy, and refused again and again to give 
 anything for idolatrous feasts or the worship of the 
 spirits of the dead in Tay Soa, the people became 
 excited and even angry at her. They feared that 
 the gods and the spirits of the dead would not only 
 punish her and her family, but the whole village, 
 for such wickedness. Some visited and talked with 
 Mrs. Lee, begging her to return to the religion of 
 the place and not bring calamities on the whole vil- 
 lage. When they asked if she worshiped the for- 
 eigners’ God, she said she did, and, further, that he 
 was the only true God. Instead of trying to excuse 
 herself, she urged them to take this as their God. 
 She said that the religion of the foreigners was like 
 medicine to the sick soul. 
 
 “ Yes,” said one, “ it may be like medicine, but 
 a medicine that poisons. It will be like opium, 
 making you feel happy at first, but it will rob you 
 of all you have. If you turn away from the gods 
 and the spirits of the dead, you will soon see how 
 
176 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 they will turn away from you. When calamity 
 comes, what will you do ?” 
 
 “ Do gods and spirits in the Middle Kingdom 
 keep calamity away?” asked she. 
 
 “ Certainly they do,” was the answer. 
 
 “ Then why did not they keep calamity away 
 from me when I did serve them ? Instead of car- 
 ing for me when I was the most faithful, they let 
 my husband die and let others take away all of my 
 property, and finally left me and my children to 
 starve. I do not see how they can bring on me 
 much worse calamities for deserting them than they 
 allowed to come on me when I was faithful to 
 them.” 
 
 “ Sol Law Chim * is right,” spoke an old woman 
 who stood by. “She lost everything while obey- 
 ing our gods, and why should she continue to serve 
 them? They took all that she gave, and then took 
 the presents of her enemies and allowed them to 
 rob her.” 
 
 This woman was a warm friend of Mrs. Lee, and 
 had already learned from her much about the gos- 
 pel ; indeed, was half inclined to give up the wor- 
 ship of the gods herself. 
 
 “ Right or wrong,” said one of the elders of 
 the village, “Sol Law Chim must do her share to- 
 ward paying for the idols’ feasts and ceremonies of 
 the village. If she stays in Tay Soa, she must do 
 
 * Chim means “ wife or widow of — and Sol Law Chim means 
 “ wife or widow of Sol Law.” 
 
PERSECUTION. 
 
 177 
 
 as we do, and care for the temples and the worship 
 of the ancestral tablets. This is not a foreign vil- 
 lage, and we do not mean to have foreigners live 
 here, nor will we permit you to observe their re- 
 ligion, either.” 
 
 Mrs. Lee remained firm against all their persua- 
 sions, and then they resorted to threats. “ We will 
 drive you from our village,” said one. 
 
 “You cannot do that,” was her reply, “because 
 I own my house.” 
 
 “ Your relatives will take that away,” answered 
 another. 
 
 “Then I will appeal to the mandarins,” was her 
 reply. 
 
 “ They will not help you,” said one of the elders 
 of the village. “ You lose all your rights by giving 
 up the religion of your people.” 
 
 “ Then I will pray to the great and true God 
 whom I serve,” spoke Mrs. Lee determinedly, “ and 
 He who saved Daniel even in the lions’ den will 
 take care of me.” 
 
 “ Your God may be strong in his own country, 
 but he can do nothing in the Middle Kingdom, 
 where he will have so many gods against him.” 
 
 “ He is not the God of a single country, but of 
 the whole world,” replied Mrs. Lee. “He made 
 the world and all that is in it. He is the only true 
 God.” 
 
 “ Well,” spoke one in a conciliatory tone, “ he 
 may be a very great God, and there may be no 
 12 
 
178 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 harm for you to worship him, but don’t give up the 
 worship of the spirits of the dead.” 
 
 “ Why should I worship them?” she asked. 
 
 “ Because they are mighty, and can give great 
 favors and bring great evils upon us.” 
 
 “Mighty!” replied she in contempt, “and yet 
 they cannot take care of themselves. You believe 
 we must give them house, clothing, food, and even 
 drink, in the spirit-world. They are perfectly help- 
 less; how, then, can they help or injure us?” 
 
 Determined to bring the matter to a test, one of 
 them asked, “ Will you help pay for the food to be 
 given to our ancestors at the ancestral feast ?” 
 
 For a moment Mrs. Lee was silent; then she said 
 calmly, “ No, I don’t believe it can do them any 
 good whatever ; they are entirely beyond our power, 
 and I do not mean to worship them nor care for 
 their wants. I don’t believe I can really do any- 
 thing for them.” 
 
 “ What !” spoke one, “ have you entirely given 
 up the worship of our ancestors for an unknown 
 god of foreigners?” 
 
 “ Yes,” was her reply ; “ he is the true God, the 
 only one. I have given up all others for him, nor 
 will I again worship our ancestors. The foreign 
 God shall be my God.” 
 
 “ If she deserts our gods and our ancestors, she 
 deserts us,” said one, “ and becomes a foreigner. 
 Let her go; let foreigners care for her in time of 
 famine, watch by her when she is sick, bury her 
 
PERSECUTION. 
 
 179 
 
 when she is dead, weep at her grave and care for 
 her forsaken spirit. She is ours no longer and 
 with contempt they were about turning away. 
 
 But others were not so willing to leave Mrs. Lee: 
 if the gods did not punish, they felt it to be their 
 duty to do so, and for a time it seemed that her life 
 was in danger. Fortunately, milder counsels pre- 
 vailed, and the people decided to leave Mrs. Lee to 
 herself, counting her as a foreigner and an outcast. 
 
 Her relatives were not so easily persuaded to 
 leave Mrs. Lee to herself. They had already heard 
 of her deserting the worship of their ancestors, but, 
 not knowing just how the village elders would look 
 on that desertion, they were not in a hurry to visit 
 her. They knew full well that if their robbery of 
 her property were brought before the mandarins 
 they would be made to suffer. Besides, the stories 
 of what foreign ships of war and soldiers had done 
 to different parts of China made them look on for- 
 eigners with dread; yet they felt that something 
 must be done after they learned of Mrs. Lee’s 
 public decision. Being superstitious, they believed 
 that the spirits and gods would punish all for the 
 neglect and the sin of one. They visited Mrs. Lee, 
 and in a polite way drew out her opinions and pur- 
 poses. At first they gently advised her to give up 
 the foreign god, but when she insisted on choosing 
 for herself they became more determined, harsh and 
 angry. They commanded her to have nothing more 
 to do with foreigners, to give up the worship of the 
 
J80 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 foreign god, and threatened her with terrible pun- 
 ishment if she refused. Mrs. Lee told them, as she 
 had told others, that she meant to be a Christian, 
 and no words of theirs nor threats should turn her 
 from that course. Seeing her calmness and deter- 
 mination, they thought that perhaps the foreigners 
 would help her, so they dared do nothing more than 
 threaten. They called her by every name of con- 
 tempt they could think of. 
 
 To call a married woman or widow in China by 
 her maiden name as well as her given name is re- 
 garded as one of the greatest insults that can be 
 given to a woman : these relatives called her by 
 both, and added another term whose meaning 
 seemed to contain in it all the contempt and dis- 
 grace that words could heap upon Mrs. Lee. They 
 went in front of the ancestral tablets, and, kneeling 
 there, begged the spirits to make her an outcast, 
 hated, despised by all, and then to heap upon her 
 all the punishment and sorrow they could give. 
 From the ancestral tablets they went to the idol 
 temple, and there again they bowed in prayer before 
 the gods, begging them to punish with sufferings 
 and curses the woman who had deserted the religion 
 of their country and the spirits of the dead. Hav- 
 ing done all they dared, they left Mrs. Lee and 
 treated her as an outcast who had no more claims 
 on them than the dogs of the streets. 
 
 All this Mrs. Lee bore meekly and patiently. 
 She had learned what the Saviour said about those 
 
PERSECUTION. 
 
 181 
 
 who are deserted of friends for his name’s sake, and 
 she learned that there is a blessing given for all the 
 sufferings endured. Though the mother-in-law re- 
 mained bitterly opposed to Christianity, she would 
 not turn against her daughter-in-law. Mrs. Lee 
 was so kind and faithful that the old lady could not 
 help loving her. She could not but see that the 
 foreign religion, instead of making her daughter- 
 in-law careless of her family, had really made her 
 more thoughtful and careful to attend to their 
 wants. Yet she continued to oppose Mrs. Lee’s 
 religion, and used every means in her power to in- 
 fluence the children against the mother’s faith and 
 to train them up as idolaters. The kindness of 
 Mrs. Lee, however, her faithful life, and, more than 
 all, the new doctrine, influenced the children more 
 than the grandmother’s warnings. 
 
 Steadily Choh Lin gained a knowledge of the 
 truth, and the more he knew about it the more he 
 loved it. Yet he did not seem to understand that 
 he was a sinner with a sinful nature, needing a new 
 heart and the grace of God to help him live a dif- 
 ferent life. To him the true God was merely a 
 greater one than any in China and very different 
 from all, but one whom he might serve or not as 
 he chose. He, however, did not hesitate to let it be 
 known that he had taken the foreign God as his 
 own and had given up all other worship. When 
 the villagers and the relatives turned against his 
 mother, they turned against him too. Even the 
 
182 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 boys who had been his friends and companions, 
 those who had fought with and for him in many a 
 battle, now turned against him. It was unpopular 
 in the village to say or do anything kindly to Choh 
 Lin or his mother. The boys were only too ready 
 to put into acts the words that they heard grown 
 people speak. Those who had been enemies of 
 Choh Lin before, but had not dared to injure him 
 as they wished on account of his relatives and 
 friends, now made him suffer. Many a time the 
 poor fellow heard them hooting at him in the street 
 and calling out, “ Hoana !” (“foreigner”), “ Hoana 
 kia!” (“foreigner’s child”), and sometimes they 
 even shouted, “ Hoana kui !” (“ foreign devil ”). 
 They would not play nor walk with him, and hard- 
 ly spoke to him. If they could trip him or push 
 him down, enough of them were ready to do it. 
 If he gathered wood on the shore, they would steal 
 it or rob him of his oysters. Sometimes, when he 
 w'as carrying water from a spring to his home, they 
 came behind, and when he had nearly reached the 
 house threw sand into the pail, or if he set it down 
 to rest they kicked it over, thus compelling him to 
 co acain for water. They tried to set the docs on 
 him, threw stones and sticks at him, and annoyed 
 him in every way possible. If he happened along 
 when they were arranging some plan for sport, they 
 at once stopped and said, “ Here comes this foreign- 
 er child; he must not know anything about it. Let 
 him go to his own people; he don’t belong here.” 
 
PERSECUTION. 
 
 ] 83 
 
 Few men had kind words for him; all seemed to 
 treat him as though he were a worthless dog, who 
 was permitted to live only because no one cared to 
 take the trouble of putting him out of the way. 
 
 Yet it was not always so, nor did every one treat 
 him with unkindness. Jip longed to be friendly, 
 and when able showed Clioh Lin no little good-will, 
 but dared not let others know it. To have played 
 with Choh Lin or to have been seen in company 
 with the friendless boy would have been to hear 
 others say, “ There is another foreigner! He is be- 
 coming a foreigner like Choh Lin. Keep away 
 from them both. They will make us foreigners 
 too.” 
 
 When Chi Lap came home and saw how unkindly 
 his mother and brother were treated — his sister being 
 nearly grown, according to Chinese custom was not 
 allowed to go away from her home — he felt troubled 
 and urged them to give up the outward worship, so 
 as not to allow the people to know that they served 
 the foreigners’ God. Yet he was unwilling that 
 they should become idolaters again. He listened 
 himself with no little pleasure to the doctrine, and 
 seemed glad that his mother, brother and sister were 
 trying to follow the new religion ; but he did not 
 understand why they were obliged to let anybody 
 know about it. He was making a living for him- 
 self, and able to help his mother a little, but he 
 feared that if it were known in the city that his 
 mother and brother were Christians it would injure 
 
184 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 his business ; so he begged them to be like others 
 outwardly and keep their religion hidden. 
 
 But neither Chi Lap’s entreaties nor the threats 
 of the village people had any effect on Mrs. Lee or 
 Choh Lin. They had learned that Christianity was 
 not only something of the heart, but that it must be 
 shown out in the life. 
 
CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 IN AMOY. 
 
 M RS. LEE became well known in the chapel at 
 Amoy. One day a missionary asked whether 
 she had any family. She told him about her family 
 and about Chi Lap being in the city. The mission- 
 ary said he would like to see her son. 
 
 Chi Lap appeared in the chapel soon after. It 
 was not the first time he had gone there. He too 
 was interested in Christianity, but afraid to let it be 
 known lest it should injure his business. This time 
 he happened to be in the chapel when his mother was 
 there. After service she called him to the mission- 
 ary and introduced him as her son. As no one but 
 the missionary seemed to notice him, he remained, 
 and the more he heard the more he wanted to hear. 
 
 This missionary had a little girl who was an in- 
 valid, and he needed some one to wait on her. 
 Pleased with the boy, he offered to hire him. Chi 
 Lap was earning money, but not rapidly ; besides, 
 he was not sure of making: a living for the future 
 at his business, as many other boys were engaged 
 in it; so he was glad to accept an offer of regular 
 wages and a home, but more still was he pleased to 
 
 185 
 
186 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 be with the missionary where he might hear the 
 gospel. 
 
 The missionaries had asked Mrs. Lee about Choh 
 Lin too, and whether she wished to give him an 
 education. 
 
 “ Yes,” said she, “ I should be glad to have him 
 learn, but cannot afford to pay what the teacher 
 charges.” 
 
 They told her of the mission-school where chil- 
 dren were taught for nothing, and said that if Choh 
 Lin really wanted to study, and she would bring 
 him to Amoy, he might attend the school there. 
 Though delighted with this offer, Mrs. Lee hardly 
 knew how to have her two boys away while she re- 
 mained at Tay Soa. After planning for a while, 
 she decided to hire rooms at Amoy and live there 
 herself with Choh Lin, and leave her mother-in- 
 law and daughter at Tay Soa if unwilling to move 
 to the city. 
 
 When she first told Choh Lin of her plan the 
 boy was almost wild with joy. He could hardly 
 wait to get ready for school. He cared not only for 
 that and to be in the large city, but was pleased to 
 think that he would be with the missionaries and 
 could hear the gospel for himself. Had he had his 
 own way, Choh Lin would have started for Amoy 
 the next morning. He little thought that a boy 
 might need better clothes for school, and would 
 need more than one suit. He had had very little 
 in the way of new clothing of late years. 
 
IN AMOY. 
 
 187 
 
 Choh Lin’s longing to become a learned man that 
 he might be a rich one came back with double force 
 now that he saw so good a chance to get an educa- 
 tion. He was anxious to learn the truth and be- 
 come a Christian, but did not think yet of using his 
 learning for doing good with it. He wanted to be 
 rich, that he might buy as many good things as he 
 could use. 
 
 Choh Lin could talk of very little besides Amoy 
 and the school. He asked his mother all kinds of 
 questions, far more than she could have answered 
 had she been at the school herself. She knew little 
 about it — so little, indeed, that her answer usually 
 was, “ I don’t know.” 
 
 The grandmother was not pleased with the idea 
 of Choh Lin going to the school of the foreign 
 teachers, and would gladly have kept him at Tay 
 Soa. Far rather would she have him grow up in 
 ignorance than learn from people who believed a 
 foreign religion. It was useless for her, however, 
 to try to keep Choh Lin. She would have felt less 
 troubled if her grandson had been going to live 
 among heathen ; but to be among Christians and 
 away from her own influence, to be with his mother 
 alone, who would do everything possible to make 
 him an enemy of the gods and spirit-worship of 
 China, — this was almost more than the old lady 
 could endure. Mrs. Lee had urged her mother-in- 
 law to go to Amoy, but in vain. She would not 
 listen to such a proposal. She had lived at Tay 
 
188 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 Soa so many years that she could not think of going 
 away now. Probably she had a secret fear of meet- 
 ing the missionaries, lest they should turn her, as 
 they had done her daughter-in-law, away from the 
 religion of China. 
 
 Those were long days to Choh Lin that came be- 
 tween the decision and the moving to Amov ; aside 
 from the desire to see and live in a city, and the wish 
 to be at school, was the anxiety to get away lest 
 another famine should come, causing more suffering 
 and starvation. But there was another feeling still 
 that made him wish to leave: he had few friends 
 now since he had become a worshiper of the true 
 God, and he longed to be where people did not 
 hate and persecute, and cry out, “ There goes a for- 
 eigner’s child.” 
 
 He had heard his mother talk so much of the 
 chapel and the people who gathered there to wor- 
 ship, of the singing, the prayers and the preaching, 
 that he felt anxious to attend the chapel too. He 
 was eager to meet the Christians, and most of all 
 the missionaries, and to tell them that he also wor- 
 shiped the true God. 
 
 At last the day for moving came. INTot many 
 boats were needed to bear their goods to Amoy. 
 Two strong men could probably have carried all 
 their furniture and everything. Mrs. Lee left most 
 of her property at Tay Soa, intending to buy the 
 few things needed when she reached Amoy. 
 
 It was a grand day to the country boy when he 
 
IN AMOY. 
 
 189 
 
 reached the large city. He was delighted at the 
 many sights before him. It seemed that he had 
 not in all his life seen so many boats as lay at an- 
 chor or were sailing around in the harbor, and some 
 of them were such immense vessels ! The war- 
 junks appeared to be awful, with their flags flying 
 and the great cannon reaching their long necks and 
 open mouths out toward him from the decks of the 
 vessels. The merchant-junks, with high sterns and 
 gaudy paintings, with carved work and horrid 
 (though to him grand) pictures, were mighty ves- 
 sels. As they lay at anchor, with their huge black 
 eyes on either side of the bow looking out upon the 
 water, they seemed to the boy as great giants who 
 were merely resting before going out on the ocean 
 to beat down the waves with their immense bulk. 
 Farther away from the landing where the Tay Soa 
 boats stopped lay the foreign-built ships. These, 
 so far away, appeared to be wonderful giants with 
 their tall masts and many crosstrees. More won- 
 derful still was the great city, reaching about a mile 
 along the harbor and stretching nearly as far back 
 from the water. The crowds of vessels surprised 
 him, the multitudes of houses astonished him, and 
 the many new and strange sights kept him in a 
 fever of excitement and wonder. He hardly lis- 
 tened to anything his mother said, and when the 
 boat anchored and the time came to go ashore he 
 was so interested in looking that he could scarcely 
 think of stepping into the small boat. 
 
190 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 At the landing they were met by Chi Lap. The 
 older brother was pleased at the curiosity of Choh 
 Lin, and proud to be able to tell him about the 
 many new things that appeared; but he cautioned 
 Choh Lin not to ask too loud nor seem to be too io> 
 norant, lest the people find out that he was nothing 
 but a country boy. 
 
 “‘ Nothing but a country bov’!” repeated the 
 younger brother. “ Certainly, I am a country boy, 
 and I came from Tay Soa, a place that is as good 
 as any in the Middle Kingdom.” 
 
 “Shih! shih!” spoke Chi Lap in a low voice; 
 “don’t say anything about Tay Soa. It is a good 
 place, but then it is not Amoy.” 
 
 “Thung-a! ti thung-a! Ti but but! Ho chiah ! 
 Bell boe thung-a?” cried a boy as he came along 
 with a tray or basket of sweetened fruits and candies. 
 (“Sugared things! sweet sugared things! Sweet, 
 very, very sweet! Good eating. Will you buy 
 sugared things?”) Seeing Choh Lin, he came to 
 him and said, “ Good young friend, here are just 
 what you like, the sweetest kind of fruits and can- 
 dies. Even the bright country does not have any 
 as sweet and good. Will you buy? They are so 
 cheap! I am really almost giving them away. 
 These,” holding up some, “ are worth five cash — 
 yes, ten cash — apiece, but I will sell them to you 
 at a single cash each. You will never get any as 
 cheap up in the country.” 
 
 Choh Lin was ready at once to spend a few cash 
 
IN AMOY. 
 
 191 
 
 to take advantage of such a bargain, but Chi Lap 
 said quietly yet decidedly as he motioned Choh Lin 
 not to buy, “Em boe ” (“not buy”), and hurried 
 his brother on. 
 
 “ Why did not you let me buy ?” asked the 
 younger; “they were so cheap.” 
 
 “‘Cheap’!” repeated Chi Lap. “ I used to sell 
 those same things five for a cash. He saw that you 
 were from the country, and thought that you did 
 not know much. Be careful how you act and wliat 
 you buy. Almost every one will charge you five 
 times as much as a thing is worth if they see that 
 you don’t know.” 
 
 The two boys were soon at Choh Lin’s future 
 home. It was very small, with only two little rooms, 
 and very dark ones at that, but about as good as 
 the homes of many poor people in the city. It 
 took only a short time to get their household goods 
 in order. Chi Lap, on account of his mother and 
 brother moving to Amoy, had a holiday and spent 
 
 it with them. As soon as the work was done the 
 
 • 
 
 two brothers went out for a walk, Chi Lap intend- 
 ing to show Choh Lin the chapel, mission-house 
 and school. It was Saturday, and there was no 
 school, so the boys could go into the schoolroom 
 without interfering with the scholars. Chi Lap got 
 the key and showed his brother around. They met 
 the missionary as they were going about, and Chi 
 Lap at once introduced Choh Lin, who hardly knew 
 what to say when addressed. 
 
192 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 It is so common for the Chinese to greet one 
 another with the questions, when they meet as 
 strangers, “ How old are you ? and have you eaten 
 yet?” that Choh Lin expected of course that the 
 missionary would ask how old he was, so he an- 
 swered as politely as he could, “ Chap-jee hay ” 
 (“ twelve years ”). 
 
 But the missionary had said he was glad to see 
 him, and then asked when he and his mother came 
 into the city. Choh Lin, a little too excited to no- 
 tice the question, supposed that it was the regular 
 one, and answered, “Chiah-pa” (“eaten enough”). 
 
 The missionary smiled, and after a few pleasant 
 words went on, leaving the two to look around far- 
 ther. 
 
 Choh Lin felt troubled when his older brother 
 told him what the missionary had asked, and won- 
 dered if he would think ill of the new scholar. 
 
 “Don’t fear,” said Chi Lap; “the missionaries 
 are the kindest and best men in the world, and are 
 the wisest too. They know almost everything. 
 They even know what we mean when we tell them 
 just the opposite. The other servants say that mis- 
 sionaries can see into our hearts and almost know 
 what we think, only they can’t always tell when 
 people cheat them. They know everything about 
 the badness of the heart except when it is shown in 
 bargains.” 
 
 Choh Lin was greatly pleased with his visit to 
 the school. Chi Lap told him that as they would 
 
IN AMOY. 
 
 193 
 
 be able to go to the chapel-service the next day, 
 there would be no need now of visiting that room. 
 
 Choh Lin was with his mother in the chapel 
 among the first at the morning worship. He took 
 the hymn-book offered him, and was proud to let it 
 be known that he knew quite a number of the char- 
 acters (or words) in it. When the hymn was given 
 out he could find it; nor was that very difficult, as 
 there were only thirteen in the book. Thirteen 
 hymns, however, were enough for Choh Lin. That 
 first one was not sung as well as it would have been 
 in a church in America, but far better than Choh 
 Lin had ever heard singing. God accepted it as 
 praise, no doubt, for it was sung heartily and the 
 people meant what they sang. That singing was 
 worship; Choh Lin came there to worship God, so 
 he tried to join in the song. Softly and in a low 
 tone he followed the others, readily catching the 
 simple tune; each note seeming a step by which the 
 boy’s heart went up to God. Then the reading of 
 the Bible was like opening the door to allow him to 
 approach and listen to the Almighty, while the 
 prayer appeared to be God coming out to listen 
 while all united through the leader in talking to 
 him. 
 
 The newness of the service attracted the boy, but 
 the solemnity of the worship, and yet its simplicity, 
 drew his heart out toward God. Choh Lin was not 
 yet a heart-Christian, nor did he really know what 
 it was to be one. He had only changed gods when 
 13 
 
194 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 he gave up idolatry. He did not know about a 
 change of heart, and about the need of the Holy 
 Spirit to bring about that change ; but the Spirit of 
 God was leading him, though he did not know it. 
 
 That first Sabbath in Amoy was a happy day for 
 the country boy. New things met him everywhere 
 and pleased him, but nothing so pleased and satis- 
 fied him as the services in the chapel. These made 
 this the best day he had ever seen. How glad he 
 was that he had come to Amoy ! But there was 
 one thing that gave him trouble, and that was what 
 he was asked and what he learned in the inquiry- 
 meeting. So many things the missionary asked of 
 which he had never thought, and many things also of 
 which he had never heard, that the boy was amazed. 
 He was sorry, too, to be obliged to answer again 
 and again that he did not know. Each time, how- 
 ever, the missionary kindly explained the question 
 and its answer. At the close of the meeting Choh 
 Lin felt that there was something in the new relig- 
 ion that he had not learned — something deeper than 
 he had yet felt ; and the prayer that the missionary 
 gave him — to pray that the Holy Spirit would show 
 him his sin and lead him to Christ — he resolved to 
 offer very often, and to keep praying until his heart 
 was all clean and right before God. He longed to 
 be able to read the Bible, that he might know more 
 about the Saviour and how to please and serve 
 God. 
 
CHAPTER XX. 
 
 IN THE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 E ARLY Oil Monday morning Choh Lin was 
 ready for school. Indeed, long before the time 
 he wanted to start, but was told by his mother to 
 wait. When permitted to go he started eagerly for 
 the school, which was only a little distance away. 
 He took no dinner-basket nor yet books. He could 
 come home for dinner, and the books would be fur- 
 nished by the school. His courage, however, oozed 
 out at the ends of his fingers by the time he had 
 reached the schoolroom. When he saw the strange 
 faces and the wise-looking teacher he almost wished 
 himself back at Tay Soa. Scholars and teacher 
 were strangers to him. Fortunately, the mission- 
 ary was there, and at once saw Choh Lin. He in- 
 troduced the boy to the teacher, said a few kind 
 words, and then left. 
 
 Choh Lin hardly knew where his tongue had 
 gone when the teacher asked him questions, but 
 succeeded in finding it before the teacher had waited 
 too long for answers. 
 
 When the school was called to order a seat was 
 given him, a chapter from the Bible read, a prayer 
 
 195 
 
196 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 offered by the teacher, and the work of the day be- 
 gan. There was the same noisy study on the part 
 of the boys, and some had the same lessons that he 
 had heard recited at Tay Soa. But another book 
 was studied, and that was the Bible. Each one was 
 taught to read and commit it to memory. Choh Lin 
 was glad to study the holy book. Not only did he 
 study; he thought of what he learned, and many a 
 passage was kept in mind to ask his mother about 
 afterward. Besides the usual studies of the Chinese 
 schools and the Bible the boys were taught some- 
 thing of geography and arithmetic : they were also 
 taught a catechism of Bible truths; for this, while 
 it was a school to fit the scholars for useful lives, 
 was meant primarily to teach them of the Bible and 
 the Saviour in the hope that they would become 
 Christians. 
 
 Some of the boys studied just because they must, 
 while others were anxious to learn all they could. 
 Choh Lin set himself at once to study, because he 
 meant to get the good of it in the future. The 
 teacher noticed his studious habits and praised him 
 for trying to do so well. 
 
 “ Some -day,” said he, “you may be a learned 
 man and a preacher of the gospel.” 
 
 This was praise that Choh Lin did not care for. 
 He did not wish to become a preacher ; indeed, had 
 not thought of it at all. Had the teacher said that 
 some day he would become a graduate and a rich as 
 well as great man, Choh Lin would have been far 
 
IN THE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 197 
 
 more pleased. He, however, learned to like the 
 quiet, kind and good teacher, and was ready to listen 
 and take his advice. He did not understand how 
 some boys could deceive the teacher as they did. 
 When the teacher was not looking they began whis- 
 pering or playing, but as soon as his eye was on 
 them they pretended to be busy with their studies. 
 It was strange to Choh Lin that boys in a school 
 where they were taught of the true God and from 
 the Bible should do this. He soon learned that 
 not all boys who know about God serve him faith- 
 fully. 
 
 Choh Lin did not find the boys as friendly as he 
 hoped. At recess, when all had an opportunity to 
 talk, the others seemed to forget that a strange boy 
 was among them. Some did come to him and ask 
 where his home was, but when they learned that he 
 was from a little village off in the country, they did 
 not seem to care much more for him. Hone asked, 
 as he hoped they would, whether or not he were a 
 Christian, and none seemed to care much about any- 
 thing but play. He gradually became acquainted 
 with the boys, yet did not like them as much as he 
 had hoped. They called him a country boy, and 
 said that he was green ; they ridiculed his country 
 ways and made sport of many things he did. 
 
 City people in China think themselves brighter 
 and better than those who live in the country. They 
 speak of country people as green. Perhaps they 
 are right, yet green things, unless painted, are live 
 
198 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 things. The country is the place where good things 
 grow, and were it not for the country city people 
 would soon die. Country people can live without 
 the city, but city people cannot live without the 
 country. 
 
 For a while Clioh Lin took their ridicule kindly, 
 yet could not see why he was the worse for having 
 lived in the country. He knew that inside of him 
 he was as real a boy, and just as able to study or to 
 work, as any city boy. He was right. It is not so 
 much the place in which he lives that makes the 
 boy as it is that which is in him. A diamond is 
 no less a diamond because found in the sand of the 
 river-bed, nor is a boy the less worthy because he 
 happens to have had his home where there is an 
 abundance of grass, trees and ground. If Choh 
 Lin did not know as much of the city, he knew far 
 more of the country than the boys who ridiculed 
 him ; and he was really wiser than those who had 
 lived all their lives where there was little to be seen 
 except stone pavements and brick-and-mortar walls. 
 
 “ I may be green,” said he one day when the boys 
 were ridiculing him, “but I would rather be that 
 than dry. Dry things are dead things. Dry 
 weather brings drought and famine and starvation 
 and death.” 
 
 “You don’t know anything,” replied one of the 
 boys, “and that is the reason we laugh.” 
 
 “ That may be,” answered Choh Lin, “ but I 
 mean to learn. I do know one thing, and that is 
 
IN TEE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 199 
 
 that the great men of past ages say that we must 
 not laugh at the mistakes of people, but help cor- 
 rect them.” 
 
 “ What do you know about the men of past 
 ages?” asked a boy. “They died long before you 
 were born.” 
 
 “Men die, but their sayings live,” replied Choh 
 Lin ; “ so our teacher told us.” 
 
 Not once, but often, did the others try to tease 
 the country boy ; usually he was too good-natured 
 to become angry. 
 
 One of them asked him one day, “ Is it true that 
 the people at Tay Soa are so green that before they 
 are allowed to come to the city the village elders 
 order them to be put out in the sun for three or 
 four days to dry?” 
 
 “ Is it true,” asked Choh Lin in reply, “ that 
 when city people go out into the country the man- 
 darins are obliged to show them the cows, lest when 
 they see them out iu the fields they would think 
 them lions and tigers and be frightened to death ?” 
 
 “ Why is it that you country people are so brown- 
 skinned, and we of the city are so white ?” asked one. 
 
 “ I suppose it is for the same reason,” replied 
 Choh Lin, “ that farmers hide their plants when 
 first set out in the sun — because they are so weak.” 
 
 “Do you think we city people are weaker than 
 you in the country?” asked a boy indignantly. 
 
 “ I only answered Kioug’s question,” replied 
 Choh Lin quietly. 
 
200 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “ If we are weak,” spoke Kiong, “ we are strong 
 enough to buy all the good things and sell them for 
 the benefit of the country people, who otherwise 
 would have nothing but what they raise on the 
 land.” 
 
 “ I can tell why country people are all brown,” 
 said another boy : “ they are so homely that the sun 
 is ashamed to see them, so it paints their faces 
 brown, and some almost black.” 
 
 “ Perhaps that is the reason,” replied Choh Lin, 
 “ yet the sun is willing to look into the faces of coun- 
 try people. But because the city people are so full 
 of trickery and dishonesty he turns away from them 
 and allows them to grow pale.” 
 
 “ We are no more dishonest in the city than you 
 in the country,” said the boy angrily. “You bring 
 stale eggs to the city and sell them for fresh, and 
 old fowls for young chickens. Then you fill their 
 craws with wet sand, so that we buy a pound or two 
 of sand for the same price that we pay for chicken- 
 meat.” 
 
 “ I know that country people are not always hon- 
 est,” answered Choh Lin, “ but they must cheat to 
 try to keep near their city brothers. Yet it is too 
 bad to see that the country people are falling so far 
 behind that they are losing sight of their friends in 
 the city. We cannot learn such things as quickly 
 as you. Cheating is like fire: it goes slowly among 
 green things, but eats up everything that is dry.” 
 
 The first morning of school, when the teacher 
 
IN THE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 201 
 
 prayed, Clioh Lin at once bowed his head and put 
 his hands before his face. The next morning, look- 
 ing up a moment at the others before closing his 
 eyes, he saw that some heads were not bowed. 
 While there were not a few who sat with faces cov- 
 ered by their hands, others were looking around the 
 room, and two or three were whispering. He did 
 not know which was the right way for boys to act, 
 nor did he dare ask. He wanted to worship as boys 
 should, and, thinking over the matter for a while, 
 determined to watch, and the boys that seemed to 
 be the best he believed to be the ones who took the 
 right way to pray. He soon learned that those who 
 sat with bowed heads and listened to the teacher’s 
 prayer were the safe ones to follow. 
 
 He learned how to act not only during time of 
 prayer, but at all times, and gradually his “green- 
 ness ” passed away. But he did not lose the hearty 
 good-nature and happy boyishness of the country, 
 though he became as polished as any in the school. 
 He was really polished : soft things may be made 
 smooth, but it is the hard and the solid only that 
 can be polished. Choh Lin had some of this hard 
 grit in his character, and the teacher, as well as 
 the missionaries, saw that he would not only bear 
 polishing, but that it would be worth while to 
 do it. 
 
 Gradually he won the respect of his teacher and 
 the missionaries. While most of the boys learned 
 to like him, others became jealous and tried to annoy 
 
202 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 him long after the rest gave up teasing him about the 
 country. These accused him of making presents to 
 the teacher to win his favor. Choh Lin had made 
 a short visit to Tay Soa after being some months in 
 school, and brought several presents from the coun- 
 try for his friends and the teacher. Iu vain did 
 Choh Lin deny that he had done this to gain favors 
 from the teacher ; it was enough for the few that he 
 had given him presents. The boy said that it was 
 their duty to show respect to their teacher, and that 
 was all his present was meant for. The great diffi- 
 culty with these boys was that they were too lazy to 
 study, and did not like to hear Choh Lin praised 
 for success and themselves blamed for not doing' 
 well. More than that, they did not like to see the 
 missionaries take so much more notice of this coun- 
 try boy than of themselves. Their dislike in time 
 became almost hate, and they were eager to find 
 something against the boy. 
 
 One day, as he was coming out of the schoolroom, 
 some one behind pushed him against another in 
 front. That one, Ivok, turned angrily and struck 
 Choh Lin, saying as he did so, “ You green country 
 boy, cannot you come out of school without trying 
 to push others over?” 
 
 The blow was so unexpected that Choh Lin, 
 without taking time to think, struck back, and re- 
 ceived a blow in return. This would have led to a 
 fight had not the teacher heard the disturbance and 
 come to the door. He was surprised to see his fa- 
 
IN THE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 203 
 
 vorite pupil striking another, and sharply rebuked 
 Choh Lin. Too much confused to reply, the boy 
 walked away. This gave those unfriendly to him 
 an opportunity to say unkind things for the teach- 
 er’s ears. 
 
 Choh Lin saw that he had lost favor with the 
 teacher, and feared that the missionaries, if they 
 heard of the trouble, would send him away from 
 school. He wanted to explain to his teacher and 
 beg him not to tell the missionaries, but dared not. 
 He resolved, however, that he would not strike any 
 one again, no matter how great the provocation. 
 
 Some time after this the teacher’s pen and also 
 some papers from his desk were missing; among the 
 papers was a record of misbehavior of some of the 
 scholars. Choh Lin happened to be absent from 
 the school the day that the loss was discovered. All 
 the other scholars denied having been to the teach- 
 er’s desk, and said that they had seen nothing of 
 either pen or papers. The teacher determined to 
 find out if any one had taken the pen and paper, and 
 examined the desk of each boy. He found nothing 
 of the missing record, but did find some of the 
 paper and the pen at Choh Lin’s place. The teach- 
 er was greatly troubled at this discovery, though he 
 said very little about it to the scholars. They, 
 however, had seen him take the pen and papers 
 from Choh Lin’s desk. The good man hardly 
 knew whether to tell the missionaries or to wait 
 and have a talk first with the boy. He waited un- 
 
204 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 til the next day, determined to give Choh Lin a 
 chance to explain before telling the missionaries. 
 
 Choh Lin was at school early the next day, aud 
 the teacher asked him about the pen and papers. 
 When told where they had been found, the boy re- 
 plied, “ An enemy has done this. I have not taken 
 the pen or the papers. Why should I ? The mis- 
 sionaries are good to invite me to their school ; 
 should I repay them by stealing from the teacher 
 they so kindly furnish, and who has himself been 
 so kind to me? More than that, the Lord in the 
 Ten Commandments says, ‘ Thou shalt not steal.’ I 
 am trying to obey and serve that Lord ; why should 
 I, then, prove myself so unfaithful to him ?” 
 
 The honest look of the boy would have convinced 
 almost any one but a Chinaman that Choh Lin was 
 telling the truth. But the teacher was so used to 
 the deceitful ways of his people, and knew so well 
 how a look of honesty can be assumed by them, 
 that he was not convinced of the boy’s innocence. 
 “ We will see,” he said. “ It is almost time to be- 
 gin school ; we will talk of it some other time.” 
 
 “ Please do not tell the pastors,” pleaded Choh 
 Lin; “ they will drive me from the school; then I 
 must go back to my native village to live again 
 among the heathen. There I cannot learn to read, 
 nor are there any Christians with whom I may wor- 
 ship. There is no Sabbath there, no Bible, no God. 
 Please don’t send me back ; I want to be a Chris- 
 tian. I did not steal.” 
 
IN THE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 205 
 
 The kind-hearted teacher was almost convinced 
 of Choh Lin’s honesty, and agreed to say nothing 
 about the matter to the missionaries. Some of the 
 scholars, knowing where the pen and papers had 
 been found, were ready to believe Choh Lin a thief, 
 though some insisted that his enemies had put the 
 articles there, and they were ready to say who had 
 done it, too. 
 
 A few days after this the chapel-keeper, who also 
 took care of the schoolroom, overheard some boys 
 say that Choh Lin had stolen the teacher’s pen and 
 some papers and hid them in the desk. 
 
 “What!” said he, “Choh Lin stolen pen and 
 papers? That cannot be. He is an inquirer and 
 don’t steal.” When told the whole story, the 
 chapel-keeper, who was a great friend of Choh Lin, 
 said, “I can tell all about that. I found some 
 pieces of paper and a pen on the floor one night ; 
 the paper was by a mouse-hole ; perhaps the mouse 
 had carried the rest into his hole. I picked them 
 up and put them by Choh Lin’s seat. I saw that 
 he had no pen, and thought if this were not his he 
 would see that the owner got it. He is a boy whom 
 we all can trust. You will find it out some day, 
 too, and be sorry that you called him a thief now.” 
 
 The chapel-keeper’s explanation was given to the 
 teacher and to the scholars, and Choh Lin was again 
 in favor. Even those who did not like him could 
 find nothing now to say against him. His kindness 
 and readiness to help others gradually won almost 
 
206 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 all of the scholars as his warm friends; and when 
 they learned that his father had once been rich they 
 were the more ready to respect and honor him. 
 Yet a few of the boys watched him closely, not so 
 much to find fault in him as to keep him from 
 seeing and telling of their faults. 
 
 It has already been said that few vices are so 
 common in China as gambling : boys as well as 
 men are passionately fond of it. They are ready 
 to try games of chance for almost anything. Some 
 would probably even be willing to take a chance or 
 two at a church fair if they lived in America. One 
 day after school a boy appeared in the street with a 
 quantity of preserved fruit. He had also a bam- 
 boo-cup, or tube made of bamboo-wood, open at one 
 end, the other closed by the joint. In this cup were 
 twenty or twenty-five small splints of bamboo, pro- 
 jecting out of the cup. These were numbered on 
 the ends which were hidden. He invited the 
 school-boys to try their fortune for some of his 
 fruit. By paying a single cash, he said, they might 
 get the value of five cash in fruit if they drew a 
 lucky number from the cup. When the boys saw 
 how much fruit might be got for one cash, several 
 were eager to try. The owner, after shaking the 
 cup with the splints, reached it out to the boy who 
 gave him one cash. The boy drew one of the 
 splints, but the number was a wrong one, and the 
 owner of the fruit said, “ You will have to try 
 again ; that didn’t draw anything.” 
 
IN THE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 207 
 
 One of the other boys handed a cash, drew a stick, 
 and the number proved to be the right one. 
 
 “ Here are your fruits,” said the owner, giving 
 him five times as much as one cash could buy else- 
 where. 
 
 The lucky purchaser, munching his fruit and 
 looking disdainfully on the others who had not 
 dared to venture, said, “ See what I got for a single 
 cash ! You boys might have fruit in plenty if you 
 were not afraid to try your luck.” 
 
 His success induced others to try, and many cash 
 slipped quickly into the pocket of the fruit-seller. 
 While a few drew prizes, the most of the cash were 
 given for nothing. 
 
 “Why don’t you try it?” said Kok to Choh Lin. 
 “Don’t you like fruit?” 
 
 “ Yes,” replied he, “ but I don’t want to get it in 
 that way.” 
 
 “Why not?” was asked. 
 
 “ Because it is gambling,” answered Choh Lin. 
 
 “It isn’t gambling,” said one; “it is only buying 
 fruit and taking the chances of getting it.” 
 
 “It is gambling,” spoke another, “and just the 
 kind we school-boys are forbidden to engage in.” 
 
 When the fruit-seller heard that they were school- 
 boys belonging to the foreign school, he hurried 
 away, lest the foreigners should complain to the 
 mandarins of his keeping a fruit-gambling stand. 
 He knew very well that it would take all of his 
 gains to buy off the mandarins, who would be glad 
 
208 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 enough to arrest a boy for promoting gambling. 
 They would thus seem to be very active in having 
 . the laws respected ; and yet those very mandarins 
 would probably join in gambling with men if they 
 could do it without being discovered. 
 
 The next day at school there was some talk 
 among the boys about gambling for fruit. The 
 teacher overheard this. At noon he called Choh 
 Lin to him and asked, “ Were any of you boys 
 gambling yesterday ?” 
 
 Choh Lin, unable to say no, unwilling to say yes, 
 not caring to tell tales of the others, was silent. 
 The teacher saw this silence, and understood it to 
 mean not only the guilt of the other boys, but of 
 Choh Lin. 
 
 “ So you have been gambling ?” said he. “ Do you 
 not know it is against the rules of the school, and 
 that it is a sin against the Church and the law of 
 God ? You are an inquirer and wish to be a Chris- 
 tian. Don’t think that you can be one and gamble 
 too. The Bible says you cannot serve God and 
 Mammon ; and gambling is the worst kind of 
 Mam mon-worsh i p.” 
 
 “ I have not gambled,” replied the boy, “ and do 
 want to be a Christian ; I am trying to be one and 
 obey God.” 
 
 “Who of the boys were gambling?” asked the 
 teacher, “ for I see that there has been gambling 
 done.” 
 
 Questioned closely, Choh Lin at last told about 
 
IN THE MISSION-SCHOOL. 
 
 209 
 
 the gambling, and he would not have been like the 
 Chinese if he had steadily refused to tell who did 
 try their chances. 
 
 That afternoon the teacher, after a serious talk 
 about the crime aud sin of gambling before the 
 whole school, questioned the boys as to who had 
 been engaged in it. He asked the guiltv ones so 
 closely that, though some denied and others con- 
 fessed, all felt sure he knew who some of the guilty 
 ones were, and some were certain that Choh Lin 
 had told. The gamblers were punished, and they 
 blamed Choh Lin for it. For a while this made 
 him less popular, but the feeling wore away. Tell- 
 ing tales is not despised in China as it is with us. 
 When the boys were told how the teacher had found 
 out, some asked Choh Lin why he did not tell a 
 falsehood about it ; others said that he had done 
 right ; and there the matter ended. 
 
 14 
 
CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 TRYING TO BE A CHRISTIAN. 
 
 W HEN in his native village Choh Lin thought 
 himself a Christian. He had given up wor- 
 shiping idols and the spirits of the dead, prayed to 
 the God of the foreigners and kept the Sabbath 
 day ; so he thought himself as good a Christian as 
 anybody. His mother had tried to teach him that 
 he and all others are sinners, but since the Chinese 
 language has no words that give the Bible idea of 
 sin and sinners, the boy had very little notion of 
 sin. He supposed that he had merely displeased 
 the foreign God by choosing Chinese gods, and now 
 that he had changed gods he thought all had been 
 made right. Yet he did not feel satisfied. That 
 first Sabbath in the mission-chapel had opened his 
 eyes to many things of wh'ch he had never thought. 
 He had been like one walking by the light of a lan- 
 tern in a dark night, seeing a few things near, but 
 only darkness beyond. Then the moon, rising, 
 showed many other things, but all dimly. The 
 teaching his mother had given was like the lantern- 
 light, and that of the chapel was as moonlight. 
 Choh Lin was beginning to see much, but dimly. 
 210 
 
TRYING TO BE A CHRISTIAN. 
 
 211 
 
 His mother had told him that there was only one 
 God, and yet that there was a Father and a Son and 
 a Holy Spirit. How there could be only one, and 
 yet three, he did not understand. He had learned 
 from her that God would not have any to worship 
 him who served other gods. Yet he did not under- 
 stand that God wanted not outward but heart wor- 
 ship. Mrs. Lee had told him that he must trust 
 in Jesus, the Son of God, but Choh Lin could not 
 understand this. His great need was to know him- 
 self — to know what a sinner he was and how help- 
 less without an almighty Saviour. Hot less did he 
 need to know God, and that he is so pure and holy 
 that he cannot accept the service of a sinner who 
 does not approach him through Christ. 
 
 Choh Lin learned rapidly that first day in the 
 chapel, but still more did he learn at the inquiry- 
 meeting. He was beginning to see the darkness in 
 which he had lived. How the light came more and 
 more brightly, and Choh Lin felt more and more 
 thankful that he was allowed to see, and he was 
 anxious to see more. His prayer that the Holy 
 Spirit would show him his sins was answered, and 
 what the language of his country failed to tell the 
 Spirit made known to his heart. He began to see 
 what sin is — how it blinds the eyes of the soul and 
 hardens the heart and unfits it to enjoy good. He 
 saw, too, how it stains the soul, so that it is unfit 
 for God’s company and service, and unfit to enjoy 
 and unable to receive the blessings that God offers. 
 
232 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 He saw that the sinful soul is not only bad, but a 
 place in which bad things grow — that evil is con- 
 stantly springing up there as weeds in a garden. 
 He saw, too, what sin had done for him and made 
 him do against God. When he thought of the 
 many times he had offended God and done the 
 things that even his own heart told him he ought 
 not to do, he began to understand what a sinner he 
 had been. 
 
 He did not long need to pray to be shown his 
 sins. They arose all around him ; quietly as fog 
 appears, so they appeared. From fog they changed 
 to clouds — black clouds, loaded with rain and wind 
 and thunder. What if they should burst? In a 
 moment they would overwhelm him. What should 
 he do? where could he go? Helpless, he was al- 
 most hopeless. In fear and distress he prayed for 
 mercy. He felt the need of a Saviour now, and an 
 almighty one. Earnestly he prayed the prayer 
 given by the missionary, to be shown Christ as his 
 Saviour. 
 
 That prayer, too, was answered. It was daybreak 
 now, and daylight came swiftly. Full light shone 
 into the soul of the Chinese boy. The bright sun 
 rose. Jesus, the Sun of righteousness, sent his glo- 
 rious light into Choh Lin’s soul, and, lo ! the dark 
 clouds of sin vanished. No thunder-peal nor light- 
 ning-flash nor storm was near; instead, all was peace 
 and beauty. How happy Choh Lin was ! He 
 seemed in a new world. It was a new sun that 
 
TRYING TO BE A CHRISTIAN. 
 
 213 
 
 shone over head, and the clouds in the sky were 
 more beautiful than he had ever seen them, while 
 the gray rocks of the hills of Amoy appeared to be 
 set in green and gold. The far-olf hills were the 
 same that he had often seen, but never had they 
 been so beautiful. He could now sit by the hour 
 and admii'e them. Now they were God’s hills; 
 those rocks were Gods rocks ; the clouds aud sun 
 were his too ; and that God was his heavenly 
 Father, the one who loved him — so loved him that 
 he gave his only-begotten Son to die that he might 
 live. How delightful the thought that the great 
 God loved him and had forgiven his sins ! More 
 than that, God would take care of him always, and 
 after a while take him to live in heaven. 
 
 Happy Choh Lin! He had found Christ, and 
 his soul was full of joy. He had heard of the love 
 of God from the first time his mother had been to 
 the chapel, but not until now did he understand it. 
 He had heard of men in China who had sold them- 
 selves to die that they might get money to support 
 their families; he had heard of great men, too, who 
 had given their lives for the good of the people; 
 but that was unlike the love of God in Christ. 
 Those men died for their own, for those who loved 
 them, but Jesus died for his enemies. Those were 
 only men ; Jesus was God. They died, and then 
 did no more; Jesus died, but that was only the be- 
 ginning of what he did. He was always trying to 
 save men. He seemed never to grow weary of 
 
214 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 waiting and trying to save. It was a new story of 
 love, a wonderful story, and never grew old. 
 
 Choh Lin wondered that others did not love to 
 listen to it, nor could he understand how the people 
 could hear it again and again and yet not care about 
 the Saviour. He did not think that the Holy Spirit 
 had made him see his need, and then had led him 
 to Christ, and was now making him see so much to 
 love in the Saviour. People who see nothing in 
 Jesus to love often wonder why Christians think so 
 much of him. This is not because Christians are 
 blinded, but because others are. God’s people never 
 see anything in Jesus that is not there, but others 
 fail to know and love Christ because they are blind 
 and their hearts are closed to him. A blind man 
 cannot see beauties, no matter how plain they are ; 
 but if he does not see them, that is no proof that 
 the beauties do not exist; it only proves him blind. 
 We pass by strangers every day without a thought 
 of love, yet when we become acquainted with those 
 same strangers we may love them with all our 
 hearts. So people are blind to Christ’s beauty be- 
 cause to them he is a stranger. When the Holy 
 Spirit opens their eyes and makes them acquainted 
 with Christ, then they love him as they can love no 
 other being. 
 
 Choh Lin had now found Christ, but did not 
 know what difficulties a Christian must meet. 
 When persecuted in Tay Soa for being a worshiper 
 of the foreigners’ God, he longed to be among Chris- 
 
TRYING TO BE A CHRISTIAN. 
 
 215 
 
 tiaus. But he did not find everything as pleasant 
 at Amoy as he had hoped. He meant to live a 
 good life, but found that there are other things than 
 outside persecutions to hinder. In school were 
 many little trials hard to bear; so even in his home 
 and among his best friends he found troubles. Nor 
 were his troubles all from without. His heart had 
 them. They seemed to live and grow and multiply 
 there. After he learned in the inquiry-meetings 
 what he needed, he thought that as soon as he found 
 the Saviour all his troubles would end. Now that 
 he had found Christ, he was perplexed to know that 
 the difficulties in the way of living a Christian life 
 did not disappear. While he had little difficulty 
 with his studies, he had all the more with the other 
 pupils of the school. 
 
 Then there were troubles in the street. Boys 
 called him a green country boy, a foreigner’s child, 
 and said that he was obliged to leave his native vil- 
 lage because the people would not have foreigners’ 
 children there. It is true that this kind of perse- 
 cution did not last, but there was a trouble that did 
 not end, and that was in his own heart. Evil 
 thoughts arose; they came just when he least ex- 
 pected them. Poor Choh Lin ! He began to be- 
 lieve himself a hypocrite. He became at times 
 wretched, nor did he know what to do. Again the 
 evil thoughts left him, and for a while everything 
 went well — so well that he became proud of him- 
 self. He felt that he was becoming very good, 
 
216 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 better than other Christians. Suddenly there would 
 come a change. Before he had time to see his dan- 
 ger lie was guilty of some sin, and then was as 
 wretched as he had been proud before. 
 
 Choh Lin learned before long that his own evil 
 heart, aided by Satan, was the cause of much of 
 this difficulty. When he learned how I’aul was 
 tried by the “ law in his members” warring against 
 “ the law in his mind,” so that he could not do the 
 things he would, he learned to be more on his guard. 
 Knowing now the danger, he escaped it far oftener 
 than before. Although Choh Lin did not always 
 do the best he knew, yet he did try to do right, and 
 tried hard. Sometimes his evil nature got the better 
 of him, and then came sad times of repenting. 
 However, he gained in the resistance to evil habits 
 and temptations. He was regularly at the inquiry- 
 meetings, and his answers to the questions of the 
 missionaries showed that he was gaining in knowl- 
 edge. The missionaries did not yet admit him to 
 the membership of the Church ; they did not feel 
 sure that he was a Christian, and thought it safer to 
 allow him to wait than to have him become a mem- 
 ber too soon. The Chinese inquirers learn so soon 
 to repeat from memory the answers to the questions 
 at the inquiry-meetings that the missionaries are 
 often uncertain whether or not they have become true 
 Christians, and therefore postpone admitting them 
 to the full communion of the Church. This practice 
 of deferring admittance to church-membership has 
 
TRYING TO BE A CHRISTIAN. 
 
 217 
 
 proved to be a wise one. The missionaries have 
 continued it only in cases where it seems best. 
 But these inquirers are not regarded as outside of 
 the Church family; instead, they are at once taken 
 into many of its privileges and receive special care 
 and training. 
 
 When his mother was received Choh Lin also 
 wished to join the Church; yet, believing that the 
 missionaries knew best, he waited patiently. At 
 last the time came when he was to be received into 
 the communion of the Church. It was a happy 
 day to the young Christian. He could now stand 
 before all the world as a follower of Christ. Not 
 without prayer and a deep feeling of unworthiness 
 did he come before the officers of the Church for 
 the final examination, and then seat himself among 
 the members to partake of the bread and wine. 
 How earnestly he listened to every word of the 
 missionary ! How full of meaning to him was that 
 communion service! He saw his Saviour in and 
 through the whole service ; it seemed as if Jesus 
 were really there and saying to him, “ This is my 
 body broken for you. This cup is the new testa- 
 ment in my blood, which is shed for you.” The 
 soul of Choh Lin was communing with Jesus, and 
 he enjoyed a feast. As he went away it was not to 
 leave the communion behind him; by it he had 
 been drawn nearer the Saviour. 
 
 If he had before been careful not to do anything 
 wrong, lest he be kept out of the Church, he was 
 
218 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 even more careful now lest he dishonor the Church 
 and his Saviour. That he did nothing wrong none 
 will suppose — he certainly did fail to do right many 
 times — but on the whole he lived a Christian life. 
 He was one of the youngest, if not the very young- 
 est, member of the Church, being only fifteen years 
 old, and because of his youth was the more closely 
 watched by Christians, with a desire to help him ; 
 and he was as closely watched by the heathen, with 
 a desire to hinder him. His schoolfellows were 
 ready to notice any wrong he might do and report 
 it to others. He had not an easy life, yet found a 
 strong Arm to help him do right, and a loving 
 Saviour to pity and pardon when he did wrong. 
 
 There came to Clioh Lin a trial that he hoped 
 had been left at Tay Soa. He suffered want. His 
 mother, who had been able to support one family at 
 Tay Soa from her business, was not able to support 
 two, even though containing only the same persons. 
 It cost more to live at Amoy ; she had the rent to 
 pay, besides, in the city, and Choli Lin was unable 
 to help by hunting fuel or food. Mrs. Lee, rather 
 than let her mother-in-law suffer, often went with- 
 out food herself. Clioh Lin’s wants were cared for 
 as well as she was able, but he was hungry many a 
 time. Sometimes he wondered why the Lord did 
 not send them food as he did to Elijah, or make an 
 abundance of a little as Christ did : but, again, he 
 felt that when the Lord was ready their wants 
 would be supplied. 
 
TRYING TO RE A CHRISTIAN. 
 
 219 
 
 Chi Lap helped his mother and brother a little in 
 their time of need. His wages in the mission fam- 
 ily were more than he needed to supply his wants, 
 and he gladly gave them all he could spare. He 
 did not remain long in the mission family. A mer- 
 chant offered him much larger wages, and he ac- 
 cepted the position after talking the matter over 
 with the missionary. He now hired a small house 
 on the island of Ko-long-su, opposite and near 
 Amoy, where he, his mother and brother lived in 
 comfort. Choh Lin now could see that God had 
 only tried their faith, and felt that he could not be 
 thankful enough for prosperity. 
 
CHAPTER XXII. 
 
 BUSINESS OFFERS. 
 
 D URING their time of poverty in Amoy, Choh 
 Lin continued at school. At times he talked 
 to his mother and brother of trying to earn a living, 
 but they urged him to keep at school, promising to 
 do their part now in supporting him, and saying 
 that when he became learned his turn would come 
 to help them. So anxious was Mrs. Lee that he 
 should continue studying that she would have 
 starved herself rather than see him go into business. 
 She had a purpose in all this, though she kept it hid- 
 den. She wished to see her youngest son a learned 
 man, not that he might become an honored scholar, 
 but that he might preach the gospel that had brought 
 light and gladness to her dark soul. For this she 
 hoped and prayed, and for this she was ready to 
 make any sacrifice. 
 
 Choh Lin liked to study, nor had he lost the de- 
 sire of being learned that he might become rich ; 
 but there had arisen in his heart another desire : it 
 was to be learned that he might do good. The love 
 of Christ was gradually conquering all other love, 
 and making the young Christian think more of 
 220 
 
BUSINESS OFFERS. 
 
 221 
 
 others than of self. But if any thoughts of be- 
 coming a regular preacher of the gospel entered the 
 mind of Choh Lin, they did not stay there long at 
 a time. 
 
 Though living on the island of Ko-long-su and 
 going to and from school, he saw much of the city 
 and people of Amoy and learned much about the 
 foreign merchants there. He saw Chi Lap in the 
 employ of one and making money rapidly, and 
 could not help wishing to be in the employ of for- 
 eigners too. Chi Lap was soon promoted, and had 
 an increase of salary. When he talked to his 
 younger brother of money-making, Choh Lin could 
 not keep down the longing to be in business. He 
 had already far more education than his older 
 brother, and could not help thinking that he might 
 soon receive a larger salary than Chi Lap. About 
 this time one of the missionaries otfered Choh Lin 
 a place in his family as servant at good wages. The 
 boy wanted to accept at once, but there arose in his 
 heart the feeling that if he did he would not be 
 able to do so much good as he might by continuing 
 at school. This, together with the urging of his 
 mother and brother that he stay at school, made 
 him refuse the otfer. 
 
 Hot long after a foreign physician in Amoy, who 
 had noticed the bright boy, offered him a place not 
 only as errand-boy, but as an assistant in his office. 
 The doctor told him that he would pay good wages, 
 far more than he could earn at other work. When 
 
222 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 Choh Lin seemed unwilling to accept, the doctor 
 offered him twenty dollars a month as salary. 
 Twenty dollars a month! This was more money 
 than the boy had ever owned at one time, and far 
 more than he dared hope to earn for years to come. 
 He could hardly believe his ears, and asked again. 
 
 “ Yes, I will give you twenty dollars a month/’ 
 said the doctor. “That is more than six times as 
 much as a workingman can earn ; and I will give 
 you that to begin with ; then as soon as you learn the 
 business I will increase the salary. You are just 
 the kind of boy I want. Some day you may be- 
 come a foreign doctor yourself, and then you can 
 make your fortune.” 
 
 Choh Lin could hardly give any answer. The 
 offer was so large that it seemed impossible to be- 
 lieve it real. The doctor, however, convinced him 
 that he was in earnest, yet gave the boy time to 
 think of it and to consult the missionaries about 
 it. 
 
 As money in China will buy about twelve times 
 as much as in America, this offer was equal to near- 
 ly three thousand dollars a year here. It was a 
 great temptation to a boy who had lived in poverty 
 and almost starved for lack of money to buy food. 
 Eagerly he hastened home to tell of the wonderful 
 offer, expecting, of course, that his mother and 
 brother would urge his acceptance. 
 
 Chi Lap was pleased and proud of his younger 
 brother, yet could not help showing his disappoint- 
 
BUSINESS OFFERS. 
 
 223 
 
 ment as he said, “Of course the little brother must 
 accept. There is a fortune in it. Such offers do 
 not come often ; yet I wanted to see him a learned 
 man first.” 
 
 “ I do not see why he should accept,” said Mrs. 
 Lee. “ You are earning enough to support us all 
 now; we have enough to eat and drink and wear. 
 I do not wish to see Choh Lin go into business yet. 
 Let him wait until he has been longer at school.” 
 
 “Mother, I have been a long time at school, and 
 can read and write well; why should I not begin 
 now to earn money? You and Chi Lap have taken 
 care of me so long that it is time for me to earn 
 something. I may never get so good an offer 
 again.” So spoke Choh Lin as he wistfully looked 
 from Chi Lap to his mother. 
 
 “ There is a better offer waiting your answer,” 
 replied the mother. 
 
 “A better offer! What is it?” inquired Choh 
 Lin eagerly. “ I have heard of nothing else.” 
 
 “ It is this,” replied Mrs. Lee, slowly quoting 
 from the Bible as well as she could remember : 
 “‘There is no man that shall leave house and land 
 and father and mother, for my sake and the king- 
 dom of heaven, who shall not receive in this life a 
 hundred-fold more, and in the world to come life 
 everlasting.’ There,” continued she, “ is the offer 
 of our Lord to you, Choh Lin. It has been wait- 
 ing for you to accept. It is a great deal larger than 
 that of the physician. Which will you take?” 
 
224 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 Suddenly a glimpse of the meaning of his mother 
 flashed on the boy’s mind, and he asked, “ Do you 
 mean that I must give up this good otfer for Christ’s 
 sake, mother?” 
 
 “ Yes,” was the reply. 
 
 “ But how must I do it for him ? Cannot I serve 
 him as well in the doctor’s office as in any other 
 way? Besides, shall I not have plenty of money 
 with which to do good?” 
 
 “You cannot preach the gospel in the doctor’s 
 office.” 
 
 “ Preach the gospel !” spoke Choh Lin in sur- 
 prise. “ How did you know that I thought of be- 
 coming a preacher?” 
 
 “I did not know it, but, my boy” — here the 
 mother’s voice trembled — “ I have prayed that you 
 might become a preacher. For that I have hoped 
 and struggled — yes, and have starved myself too — 
 that you might keep at school to prepare for that 
 work. The Lord has been very good. He has 
 spared both of my boys to me ; he has sent the 
 teachers to tell me of the life-giving God and of a 
 Saviour; and I have wanted to give one of my boys 
 back to his service. The Lord has done so much 
 for us that I hoped we could spare one of our fam- 
 ily for his service, to prove that we are willing to 
 do something for his cause.” 
 
 “ Do you mean that Choh Lin is to become a 
 preacher?” asked Chi Lap. 
 
 “Yes; I have hoped and prayed that he may,” 
 
BUSINESS OFFERS. 
 
 225 
 
 was the mother’s answer. “ We have found the 
 Saviour, and it seems but just to our people that 
 we should do something to tell them of a Saviour 
 too.” 
 
 “ But I can give money to educate and support 
 another preacher,” replied Choh Lin. 
 
 “ Where is the man?” asked Mrs. Lee. “ While 
 we are waiting to find him many may perish with- 
 out hearing of the Saviour; but Choh Lin might 
 tell them. Yes, he might, only he wished to earn 
 money. While he was earning money the souls 
 were lost. ‘ What shall a man give in exchange 
 for his soul ?’ ” 
 
 Choh Lin was silent, and Mrs. Lee, after a few 
 moments’ waiting, continued: “ Wait, my son ; don’t 
 decide just yet. Think a while of what the Saviour 
 did for you, and ask what he would have you do 
 for him. Pray to be shown the way. It may be 
 that I am wrong; the Lord knows best what you 
 can do for him. Look to him, and he will show 
 the way. Whatever you do, first ask the mission- 
 aries about it.” 
 
 His mother’s talk was so earnest that Choh Lin 
 could not help thinking of what she said. He 
 prayed as well as thought over the offer; he asked 
 the missionaries, too, but he asked with such an un- 
 certain tone, as if himself half decided to continue 
 at school, that they at once advised him to go on 
 with his studies. 
 
 Hardly daring to go against his mother’s earnest 
 
 15 
 
226 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 wish, and more than half convinced that she was 
 right, Choh Lin decided to decline the offer of the 
 doctor. At times afterward he felt that he had done 
 right, and at others felt sorry that he had refused so 
 good an opportunity. He did not yet see clearly 
 his duty to preach the gospel; rather, he could not 
 at once give up the idea of becoming a rich man. 
 The spirit of self-denial for Christ was gradually 
 taking possession of his heart. 
 
 This was not the only offer that Choh Lin had. 
 He was becoming well known and quite a favorite 
 among the foreigners. Since his brother proved so 
 good a business-man they thought that the younger 
 brother would be likely to be equally good. For- 
 eigners were making money very rapidly then, and 
 were willing to pay large salaries to Chinamen 
 whom they could trust. The fact that Choh Lin 
 was in the mission-school and had been much with 
 foreigners, and thus had learned their ways, made 
 him the more desirable. Then he was a Christian 
 and an honest boy or young man; that made him 
 worth more than twice the amount many foreigners 
 were willing to pay to a heathen. So much better 
 and more trusty are the Christian than the heathen 
 Chinese that it was not an uncommon thing when 
 the writer lived in China for heathen to steal cer- 
 tificates of character of Christians and use them as 
 an almost sure way of getting employment. 
 
 A most tempting offer came to Choh Lin from a 
 foreign merchant some time after that of the doctor 
 
BUSINESS OFFERS. 
 
 227 
 
 had been refused. A merchant in Amoy who knew 
 the young student well, wanted to start a branch of 
 his business in the island of Formosa, and looked 
 around for a trusty Chinaman to put at the head of 
 it. One day he invited Choh Lin to his office and 
 offered him a position as clerk at a salary of fifty 
 dollars a month. After he became sufficiently ac- 
 qnaiuted with the business, the merchant said, he 
 wanted him to start a branch of it in Formosa and 
 take a share in the profits in addition to his salary. 
 
 This was an offer that few Chinamen, even in 
 those days of large salaries, received. To us the 
 offer may not seem a large one, but, remembering 
 the value of money in China, the offer was equal to 
 six thousand dollars a year here. Such a salary, 
 for a schoolboy not yet eighteen years old, was a 
 very large one. 
 
 No wonder that Choh Lin was compelled to pray 
 long and earnestly before he could decide to reject this 
 opportunity. He had, however, been led to think 
 more of preaching the gospel since he had declined 
 the doctor’s offer. When he told the missionaries 
 of these opportunities, they could not ask him to 
 refuse. They wished him to study for the ministry, 
 but could not urge him to decline so tempting an 
 offer. They told him that he must do as he thought 
 best, but urged him not to think alone of money. 
 They spoke of the need of preachers, and told him 
 of the Lord’s reward to his faithful servants. They 
 said also that they wished him to study, and would 
 
228 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 be very glad if he decided to give his life to the 
 ministry. They said that they could never afford 
 to give one-fifth part as much money as the mer- 
 chant promised, yet they would give him enough, 
 when a preacher, to provide for his wants; and, 
 further, if he should decide to become a preacher, 
 they would allow him money enough now to defray 
 his necessary expenses. They made no tempting 
 offers, but merely said that the Lord would reward 
 him in the end if he gave up anything for the 
 Lord's sake. 
 
 “How much do you allow young men while 
 studying, and how much after they become preach- 
 ers?” asked Choh Lin. 
 
 “We will allow you two dollars and a half a 
 month while studying,” was the answer, “ and when 
 you preach the allowance will depend on your ex- 
 penses— from four to eight dollars a month. But 
 we do not wish you to preach for the sake of 
 making money. If that be your object, we do not 
 want you at all. We only want those who are anx- 
 ious to save their countrymen, and who are willing 
 to make sacrifices for Christ. We do not pay 
 preachers for their work and sacrifice ; the Lord 
 does that when the work is done. We only keep 
 them from want while at work. Souls are worth 
 a sacrifice. Has not our Saviour done enough to 
 make us willing to do a great deal for him and for 
 the souls he loves and died to save ?” 
 
 After talking the matter over further, the mis- 
 
BUSINESS OFFERS. 
 
 229 
 
 sionaries advised Choli Lin to think and pray over 
 the offer of the merchant, and to think and pray as 
 earnestly over his duty, before deciding to accept or 
 decline the opportunity for business. 
 
 Had the offer been made a few months earlier, it 
 would have been accepted, but now Choli Lin hesi- 
 tated. He was much better able now to think of 
 the ministry than he had been then. He had been 
 growing iu a spirit of self-denial ; he had also 
 learned more of the love of Jesus, and had given 
 himself more fully to the Saviour; in short, he 
 lived nearer the cross than he had done, and was 
 better able to think of his duty to Christ and to his 
 fellow-men. Dollars did not seem to him quite as 
 large now as before : the more he thought of Christ 
 and of souls the smaller did money seem in com- 
 parison. 
 
 When alone, Choh Lin weighed the two offers — 
 the one of the merchant and the other of the mis- 
 sionaries. Here was an offer of fifty dollars a 
 month now, and soon to be increased ; and in a few 
 years he would be a rich man. He would be able 
 to live well and would be honored by all. 
 
 On the other hand was the offer of two dollars 
 and a half a month, or just one-twentieth of the 
 merchant’s offer. It is true the two dollars and a 
 half might be increased to four, or even eight, pos- 
 sibly to ten, dollars in a few years, but he could 
 never expect to receive more. So, at the very most, 
 being a preacher, he could not expect to receive, 
 
230 
 
 CIIO II LIN. 
 
 after years of preparation, more than one-fifth of 
 what he was offered now by the merchant. 
 
 Then the work. He would as a merchant’s clerk, 
 and soon as overseer of the business, have regular 
 hours for work, and when they were over he would 
 have nothing to do; he might rest and do as he 
 chose. As a preacher his work would never be 
 done; day and night he must be burdened with care 
 and anxiety as well as work. He must economize 
 in every possible way — live in any house, no matter 
 how poor, that the mission was able to provide for 
 him. More than that, he must go wherever he 
 might be sent, live among strangers, and probably 
 have no permanent home. As a merchant he would 
 have a comfortable home, enjoy all luxuries and be 
 almost entirely his own master. Then, too, if a 
 merchant, he would be respected by everybody, but 
 as a preacher he would be despised by his people as 
 trying to overthrow the religion of his fathers and 
 set up instead that of the hated foreigners. He 
 would be mocked, insulted, abused, and possibly 
 killed, for preaching a foreign religion. 
 
 Thus did Choh Lin look at the two offers, but 
 did not stop there. There came second thoughts. 
 “ True,” said he to himself, “ I will be honored, 
 have an easy life and become rich ; but I must die 
 some day. What then ? What good will honor, 
 luxury and wealth do me when I am dead ? Then 
 I must meet the souls of my countrymen whom for 
 a fortune I now propose to neglect. I will have 
 
BUSINESS OFFERS. 
 
 231 
 
 gained the fortune only to lose it then, and will ne- 
 glect the souls now to lose them then too. I must 
 meet the Saviour who gave himself for me, and I 
 must meet him empty-handed. I will have nothing 
 to show for my life. Then I will see that all the 
 honors and rewards of an eternity have been given 
 for a little ease, a little honor, a few thousand dol- 
 lars, during the short life of earth. If I become a 
 preacher I must remain poor and unhonored, per- 
 haps despised; my life will be a hard one, but it 
 will soon end. Then what? No more poverty or 
 toil or disgrace. Then will begin riches, reward, 
 rest, glory. Then Jesus will say, ‘Inasmuch as ye 
 did it unto the least of these, ye did it to me.’ 
 Then he will say, ‘Well done, good and faithful 
 servant ; be thou ruler over many things ; enter thou 
 into the joy of thy Lord.’ And all this for eternity, 
 never to end ! Can it be that I ever thought of 
 entering man’s service when God wanted me? — of 
 looking for dollars as my pay when God offers im- 
 mortal souls? — of giving all my life for time when 
 an eternity is waiting for it? Have I been so 
 blinded? Do I know so little of Jesus, so little 
 of the true Christian life? I begin to see and know 
 — yes, and mean to begin to do too. No, I will not 
 be a merchant. Dollars cannot buy me. I belong 
 not to this world, but to eternity, and for that I will 
 live. Yes, I will be a preacher.” 
 
 When Choh Lin made known his decision, all 
 his friends except the missionaries and his mother 
 
232 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 thought him foolish. They tried to persuade him 
 to accept the merchant’s offer, but in vain. He 
 said little in reply, but quietly told the merchant 
 that he could not accept, and the missionaries that 
 he was ready to begin his study for the ministry. 
 
 When Choh Lin declined the offer the merchant 
 made it to Chi Lap. It was at once accepted, and 
 the older brother was on the road to riches. After 
 learning the business of the merchant in Amoy, Chi 
 Lap was sent to Formosa. There he rapidly rose 
 in honor. He proved himself an excellent business- 
 man, and not only made money for his employer, 
 but became rich himself. Before he was thirty 
 years of age Chi Lap was regarded as a rich man. 
 But riches proved dangerous. Wealth led him into 
 sin. He was disciplined by the Church for wrong- 
 doing, and seemed almost an outcast from his Chris- 
 tian brethren. For years he lived away from the 
 Church and, it is to be feared, away from God. 
 Disease slowly weakened his strength and misfor- 
 tune gradually diminished his riches. It is true, 
 he repented of his folly and became a penitent and. 
 we trust, a faithful Christian, but too late to remedy 
 the evil of his life. Saddened, disappointed and 
 amid the shadows of dishonor through his unfaith- 
 ful life, he sank into the grave. For ten years he 
 had enjoyed his riches, but before he was forty years 
 of age he left a half-wasted fortune, a dishonored 
 life, to tell of the failure he had made. 
 
CHAPTER XXIII. 
 
 A NEW RELATIVE. 
 
 E go back in our story to the rebellion in 
 
 * ' Amoy, to tell of a man who may already be 
 known to some of Choh Lin’s friends. 
 
 When the imperial army encamped north of 
 Amoy, the people in a small village near became 
 frightened, and, leaving their homes, Sought refuge 
 in the city. Some of these found their way to the 
 mission-chapel and there became acquainted with 
 the missionaries. The strangers received so kindly 
 a welcome that they looked upon the foreigners as 
 true friends, and at once were ready to listen to 
 what they had to say. The gospel was something 
 new and pleased them ; but when they learned that 
 the object of the missionaries was to persuade people 
 to give up the worship of the gods, and especially 
 of the spirits of the dead, they were less attentive. 
 Some of them, however, had become too much in- 
 terested to stay away from the chapel. Among 
 these was a young man named Jap Han Chiong. 
 He was a bright, active, though quiet and modest 
 young man, and greatly respected by the people of 
 his village. 
 
 233 
 
234 
 
 CII01I LIN. 
 
 When peace was restored in the city the strangers 
 were anxious to return to their home. Before start- 
 ing they sent Han Chiong to the mandarins to ask 
 if it would be safe to go back. The Rev. Dr. Tal- 
 mage of the American mission, who had won the 
 confidence of the refugees, was asked to accompany 
 the young man. The two were politely received bv 
 the government officers, but were told that as it was 
 uncertain what the rebels would do, it would be 
 better for the strangers to remain a while longer in 
 Amoy. 
 
 When Dr. Talmage and Han Chiong came back, 
 old Mr. Jap showed great pleasure at the interest 
 the foreigners had taken in himself and friends, 
 and spoke to the missionary about the Christian 
 religion. He said it was good, and just the religion 
 for the young people of China. He even asked Dr. 
 Talmage to make a Christian of Han Chiong. 
 
 Day after day the old man’s interest in the for- 
 eigners and their religion deepened, and lie wished 
 that his son might become a Christian. In one of 
 his talks with the missionaries about Han Chiong 
 the question was asked of Mr. Jap, “ Why do not 
 you become a Christian ? If these doctrines are so 
 good for your son, why should not they be good for 
 his father?” 
 
 “ They are good, very good,” replied the old 
 man, “ but I am too old to accept them now. 
 When a man is seventy years of age it is time 
 for him to think of the spirit-world and the pres- 
 
A NEW RELATIVE. 
 
 235 
 
 enee of his fathers there, but not to change his 
 religion.” 
 
 When told that he was not too old to seek the 
 true God and give himself to the Saviour, he con- 
 tinued, “ It is too late for me now to begin to serve 
 the foreign God. My feet have so long trodden in 
 the old that they cannot now begin to walk in the 
 new path. But the feet of Han Chiong are not yet 
 hardened by the long walk; let him turn to the new 
 path. It will be easy for him to walk in the new 
 way. It is the best way. Had I known of it ear- 
 lier I would be far along in the path, but it is too 
 late now. My sun is near the western mountains ; 
 if I change from one to the other way now, the sun 
 may set before I have learned the new road. If the 
 darkness should come upon me when in neither 
 way, what could I do ? There would be no hope, 
 no place for my spirit.” 
 
 Though unwilling to change his religion, yet Mr. 
 Jap was regularly at the chapel-service. He cared 
 less and less for superstitious customs and idol-wor- 
 ship, and, though unwilling to own it, he was slow- 
 ly giving up all for Christ. Before he went back 
 to his village he was an inquirer after the truth, 
 and when he left Amoy for his home he left it de- 
 termined to be a Christian. His wife, who was 
 also old, was nearly as much interested as he in 
 Christianity, and some time after they reached the 
 village they both were received into the Church, 
 and with others became the first members of what 
 
236 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 is now the Chinese Christian church of O Kang. 
 Old Mr. Jap lived to the very unusual age in China 
 of ninety years, and the last twenty were spent in 
 the service of Jesus. 
 
 Han Chiong was more ready to listen to his 
 father’s advice than Mr. Jap supposed. From the 
 first he was interested in the gospel and anxious to 
 learn about Christianity. He gradually let it be 
 known that he too was ready to give up the old for 
 the new religion ; and when his father and mother 
 became members of the Church their son was with 
 them. 
 
 Han Chiong was too active and able a man to 
 remain long hidden in his native village. Not a 
 great while after he left Amoy he returned to the 
 city to engage in business there. He at once joined 
 himself to the Christians, and became known as one 
 of the most active and faithful of all. 
 
 A few years after he moved to Amoy, the church 
 founded there by the American missionaries, one of 
 the first organized churches in China, had grown so 
 large that it was thought best to divide it, and the 
 second church was formed. Han Chiong was cho- 
 sen an elder in this organization. Not long after 
 the new church was formed the native Christians 
 of the two churches, advised by the missionaries, 
 came to the decision that they were able to support 
 pastors of their own. Often was the matter talked 
 of and prayed over, and the way seemed clear for 
 the churches to move forward ; but the question was, 
 
A NEW RELATIVE. 
 
 237 
 
 Who shall be chosen as pastors? There was not a 
 native Christian in or around Amoy fitted for the 
 office. It was finally decided that the members of 
 each church should meet and choose pastors from 
 the native Christians, and then have these men 
 study with the missionaries until fitted to become 
 regular ministers. 
 
 The meetings were solemn ones. The members 
 felt that it was a very serious undertaking to choose 
 men all untried to become their spiritual guides. 
 Not less anxious were the missionaries that this 
 first effort of the Chinese Christian Church to take 
 care of itself should start successfully, but more 
 anxious were they that the guiding hand of God 
 should be plainly seen in the new undertaking. 
 
 “Whom shall we choose?” was often and anx- 
 iously asked, and gradually the answer came to one 
 after another. When the meetings were held the 
 anxious prayers and earnest looks told more of the 
 interest all had in the result than the uncertainty 
 about the men to be chosen. When the vote was 
 taken, Mr. Lo, an elder and one of the best men 
 of the first church, was chosen as its pastor, and 
 Jap Han Chiong was chosen to become pastor of 
 the second church. 
 
 Both men felt unfit for the work to which they 
 were called, but, like true men and faithful Chris- 
 tians, said that they would do the best they could 
 in the office to which the Lord seemed through his 
 Church to call them. 
 
208 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 The two began at once to study for the ministry, 
 and were in a few years ordained and installed pas- 
 tors of the churches that had called them. After 
 some years of devoted work Pastor Lo was called 
 home to enjoy the rest and reward that the Lord 
 gives his faithful servants. Pastor Jap, as Han 
 Chiong is now called, still remains, after more than 
 twenty years of faithful, successful service, the loved 
 and honored pastor of the second church of Amoy. 
 He was probably the first ordained native pastor in 
 China, and thus is the oldest pastor, though not the 
 oldest man, among the many pastors of China. For 
 twenty years has Han Chiong proved that a Ch i Ha- 
 inan can win and hold the love of a Christian peo- 
 ple, hold the respect and confidence of unbelieving 
 as well as Christian foreigners, and live a blessing 
 to the church that loves to call him pastor. 
 
 A tjaiii we go back in the story. After Mrs. Lee 
 rnovEd to Amoy she learned that her mother-in-law 
 was trying to bring about a marriage between Choh 
 Lin’s sister and a young man in the country. The 
 old lady felt much troubled that at least one of her 
 grandsons and her daughter-in-law had deserted the 
 religion of their fathers, and determined, if possible, 
 to keep the granddaughter from going the same 
 way. She did not know that her granddaughter 
 was already trying to live a Christian life. Being 
 a young woman now, according to Chinese custom 
 she could not go to the temple nor to any idolatrous 
 gatherings, and she always excused herself from the 
 
A NEW RELATIVE. 
 
 239 
 
 idolatrous practices that could be attended to in the 
 house. She did not hide from the old lady her 
 wish to be a Christian, but as anything said in favor 
 of the foreign religion only caused an outburst of 
 anger, the girl soon learned to say little about it. 
 
 The grandmother felt sure that only one thing 
 was needed to draw the young woman back to idol- 
 atry, and that was to marry her into a heathen 
 family. So every effort was put forth to bring 
 about an engagement. The people of Tay Soa 
 were ready and willing to help the old lady, and 
 urged that it was time the young woman were en- 
 gaged. Very many girls were married much 
 younger than she, and for the grandmother to wait 
 until the mother was ready to make a suitable 
 match for her daughter was unwise. She was so 
 bound up with the foreign religion that she would 
 hardly give her daughter’s interest a thought. 
 
 A suitable man having been recommended, the 
 old lady, without letting Choh Lin’s mother know, 
 began bargaining at once for the marriage of the 
 young girl. News fortunately reached Mrs. Lee at 
 Amoy in time, and she hastened to Tay Soa, and at 
 once put a stop to the proposed engagement. 
 
 Not long after it was told the mother that old 
 Mrs. Lee was again trying to marry the girl to 
 another young man. This, too, was prevented, but 
 Mrs. Lee felt that her mother-in-law was not en- 
 tirely in the wrong. It was time that a husband 
 were found for the daughter, and if the mother and 
 
210 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 brothers did not attend to it, the grandmother must. 
 More than this, Mrs. Lee knew that as soon as the 
 engagement was made the grandmother could do 
 nothing more to prevent it. An engagement in 
 China is almost as binding as marriage itself ; indeed, 
 in some cases more so. A husband for not a very 
 good reason may be divorced from his wife, but an 
 engaged man must have a good cause for refusing 
 to marry the woman to whom he is engaged. The 
 woman lias little choice or power in either case. 
 
 Mrs. Lee determined to select a husband for her 
 daughter, but she could not so easily decide on the 
 man. She would not marry her to a heathen, nor 
 did she wish an ordinary workingman, even though 
 a Christian, if a better one could be obtained. 
 Christian men of any kind were not plenty, and of 
 those not married there were very few. Fortu- 
 nately for her, young Mr. Jap was not only unmar- 
 ried, but not even engaged. 
 
 This was not so strange, as China has any quantity 
 of young and old bachelors, though it is a rare thing 
 to find a woman over twenty who has never been 
 married or eno-aa-ed. For this there are two rea- 
 
 o o 
 
 sons: many Chinamen have more than one wife, 
 and there are not as many women as men in that 
 country. While no doubt as many girls as boys are 
 born, the cruel custom of killing many of the infant 
 girls has not yet been abolished. 
 
 Han Chiong was the man Mrs. Lee chose, but 
 the question was not yet settled. Would he choose 
 
A NEW RELATIVE. 
 
 241 
 
 the same way ? Of course he could not call to see 
 young Miss Lee, nor even see a photograph of her, 
 but some one might tell him about her and learn 
 his opinion.- Like most men in China, Han Chiong 
 wished a wife if able to pay for a good one. He 
 was told that Miss Lee was a good and desirable 
 young woman, and that her mother would not ex- 
 pect much money in return. Gradually the bargain 
 was made, and it was at last fully settled that Choh 
 Lin and Han Chiong were to be brothers- in-law. 
 
 None were more pleased with this than Choh Lin 
 and Chi Lap, while old Mrs. Lee was as angry as 
 the boys were pleased. Yet she could do nothing 
 to prevent the engagement and marriage. Mothers 
 have more authority than grandmothers over their 
 own children, and the old lady could only grumble 
 and show her displeasure by angry words and sour 
 looks. 
 
 Mrs. Lee was anxious to have the wedding; take 
 place as soon as possible, in order that she might 
 induce her mother-in-law to move to the city. 
 Business was so poor that she was unable to support 
 two separate families from her scanty income, and 
 she urged the grandmother to come to Amoy. Old 
 Mrs. Lee refused. She was angry that her daugh- 
 ter-in-law had led the whole family from the relig;- 
 ion of China, and was unwilling to do anything to 
 please her; but, more than this, she was afraid that 
 by going to Amoy she would in some way come in 
 contact with Christianity and be unable to resist its 
 16 
 
242 
 
 CIIOH LIN. 
 
 power. The only way of safety was to remain 
 away from Amoy and from Christian influence. 
 While her hatred to Christianity did not lessen, her 
 outspoken opposition to it greatly decreased. She 
 could not help seeing that its influence on her 
 daughter-in-law and grandchildren made them more 
 kind to her ; yet the old feeling against them for 
 deserting; the religion of their fathers remained. 
 After a time she acted as though willing that tliev 
 should be Christians if she were allowed to retain 
 her religion. Though Mrs. Lee failed to induce 
 her mother-in-law to move to Amoy, another in- 
 fluence brought about the desired result. 
 
 There had been trouble for a long time between 
 the people of Tay Soa and those of a few villages 
 some distance away. For perhaps a hundred years 
 this trouble had been handed down from father to 
 son, sometimes quiet and slumbering, and again 
 breaking out into active enmity, terminating in 
 battles and bloodshed. About the time that Mrs. 
 Lee effected the engagement of her daughter there 
 were signs of this trouble being aroused again, and 
 rumors reached Tay Soa of a purposed attack on it. 
 The old lady now began to listen with more will- 
 ingness to suggestions for her removing to Amoy. 
 When it became quite probable that Tay Soa would 
 be attacked she consented to go to the city. She 
 had seen some of these fights, and dreaded seeing 
 another. She even urged her daughter-in-law to 
 hasten the arrangements for moving, and only felt 
 
A NEW RELATIVE. 
 
 243 
 
 content when she saw Tay Soa in the distance over 
 the stern of the vessel that was taking her to Amoy. 
 No one was more happy than Choh Lin to have 
 his grandmother and sister with him. Now, as the 
 family were together, it seemed that he had all he 
 could wish. 
 
 But there came a break in this ceaseless flow of 
 joy. The time for his sister’s wedding came all too 
 soon for him, and far too soon to please the grand- 
 mother. It greatly grieved old Mys. Lee to see 
 that the old heathen wedding-ceremonies were given 
 up for the simple ones of the Christian Church. 
 The missionaries, however, had not advised chang- 
 ing the customs that had nothing to do with idol- 
 atry and worship of the spirits, and the grand- 
 mother consoled herself with the parts that were 
 left, and hoped that some day the people would see 
 the need of bringing back the rest. 
 
 Young Mrs. Jap went at once to live with her 
 husband, and Choh Lin found that he had two 
 homes again. Between him and his brother-in-law 
 there arose a friendship that increased with years, 
 and that will last as long as the love of eternity 
 endures. 
 
CHAPTER XXIY. 
 
 BECOMING A PREACHER. 
 
 HOH LIN, having decided to continue his 
 
 studies, gave himself little further thought 
 about business. He had occasionally visited his 
 old home, and now made another visit before begin- 
 ning to study in earnest. Since he had become a 
 student and dressed better and came from the large 
 city, he was treated with more respect than when he 
 lived at Tay Soa. People had heard of his success 
 in his studies, and also of the business offers he had 
 received. Old friends congratulated him on his 
 splendid prospects. 
 
 “ Five hundred dollars a month,” said an old 
 man to him, “and then in a few years to be man- 
 darin in Formosa! What an offer! You’ll be 
 rich in two years — yes, rich in a month ! If I had 
 five hundred dollars I would be rich now. How 
 can it be possible?” 
 
 “Not five hundred dollars a month, Uncle Ton,” 
 replied Choh Lin, laughing, “but fifty.” 
 
 “ Oh, I heard it was five hundred,” spoke the old 
 man. “No matter; fifty dollars a month is a great 
 sum of money. We think it a large sum here for 
 
BECOMING A PREACHER. 
 
 245 
 
 a man to earn by a year of work. Bat then to be 
 mandarin in Formosa! That is wonderful! You 
 will be able to gain many thousand dollars by that 
 office.” 
 
 “‘Mandarin of Formosa’?” said Choh Lin in 
 surprise. “ What do you mean?” 
 
 “Are you not to be a mandarin there in a few 
 years?” asked the old man. “ Was not that prom- 
 ised too?” 
 
 “‘Mandarin’?” repeated Choh Lin; then, as the 
 truth came to him, he said, “Oh, it was not to be 
 mandarin, but to take charge of business there, that 
 I received an offer.” 
 
 “ Well, how did you get the offer?” inquired the 
 old friend. 
 
 “ Through the foreigners.” 
 
 “ I knew you would not lose by attending the 
 foreign schools and caring for the foreign religion. 
 It was wrong to harm you and your mother for 
 worshiping the foreign God. If people can make 
 money by serving another god, why should they 
 not do it? When you are rich, Choh Lin, don’t 
 forget your old friends in Tay Soa.” 
 
 “ Perhaps I’ll never be rich,” was the young 
 man’s reply. 
 
 “ Never be rich on fifty dollars a month and at 
 the head of business in Formosa! Why will you 
 not be rich ?” 
 
 “ Because I have declined the offer and do not 
 mean to be a merchant.” 
 
246 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “ What! not mean to be a merchant?” cried the 
 old man in surprise. “ What do you mean to be ?” 
 
 “ I mean to study and become a preacher of the 
 true religion.” 
 
 “ What true religion ?” 
 
 “The religion of the one great and true God — 
 the religion that the foreigners brought.” 
 
 “ Do you mean to lose the chance to become a 
 rich man in a year that you may tell people of a 
 foreign religion?” Then, thinking for a moment, 
 he continued, “ Do the foreigners hire you to do 
 it?” 
 
 “They want me to do it, and will pay me,” an- 
 swered Choh Lin. 
 
 “Oh, I see: they give more than the business- 
 foreigner. How much do they give?” 
 
 “Two dollars and a half a month while I am 
 studying, and as soon as I am able to preach they 
 will give me more, perhaps eight dollars.” 
 
 “Two dollars and a half now, eight after a 
 while!” spoke the old man — “fifty dollars now, 
 perhaps five hundred after a while! Does your 
 foreign religion teach you such folly as that?” and, 
 without saying any more, the old man turned away 
 disgusted. He told the story to others and said 
 that the foreign religion made people crazy. 
 
 Choh Lin’s real friends in Tay Soa urged him 
 not to give up his good chance in business, and 
 warned him against preaching the new religion. 
 They said it would bring him trouble and death, 
 
BECOMING A PREACHER. 
 
 247 
 
 and would probably bring calamity on his native 
 village. Others ridiculed, and were ready even to 
 persecute, him. But the few who had become inter- 
 ested in the gospel said nothing. 
 
 Choh Lin soon returned to Amoy. The warn- 
 ings of friends, the ridicule of enemies, were hard 
 to bear, but it was far worse to listen to the coaxing 
 and threats of the old grandmother. 
 
 The theological seminary in which Choh Lin 
 studied was very different from our ideas of such 
 a school. It was one small, dark room, with a few 
 benches and desks. There was no library, but the 
 one great and best Book was there. There were, 
 however, a few books and an old map or two from 
 A merica. 
 
 Besides Choh Lin, there were four or five other 
 young men studying for the ministry or to be teach- 
 ers, and two or three older ones who spent some 
 time in the^ city studying, but were most of their 
 time in the country preaching. 
 
 The professors were a Chinese teacher and two 
 or three young missionaries. These latter, though 
 learned men, were not well enough acquainted with 
 the language of the people to be able to give young 
 Chinamen the best of training for the ministry. 
 
 It w r as a humble seminary in which Choh Lin 
 prepared for the ministry, but that humble school 
 has grown, until now it can be fairly dignified by 
 the name of a theological seminary. The work it 
 has already done is having an effect on the city and 
 
248 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 the country around Amoy, but that work has only 
 begun. Long after Choh Lin and those men who 
 were its first professors shall have joined the com- 
 pany of the blessed the theological seminary at Amoy 
 will reach the greatness of its power. Then the 
 work of those modest young missionaries will be 
 shown to be the truest and wisest statesmanship 
 with which foreigners have blessed China. 
 
 Choh Lin’s whole heart was in his studies: he 
 hardly took time to rest, and the result of over- 
 study was soon seen. He grew thin and a trouble- 
 some cough appeared. Still, he kept at work. 
 Though the missionaries warned him to study less 
 and take more exercise, he kept at his close appli- 
 cation. After a while there came alarming symp- 
 toms: there were slight hemorrhages, as it was sup- 
 posed, of the lungs. Choh Lin was now alarmed, 
 and listened to the advice of his teachers and took 
 more rest. But the cough continued, and it seemed 
 that consumption would soon take the young man’s 
 life. 
 
 A foreign physician ordered him to give up study 
 altogether and leave the city. He advised Choh 
 Lin, instead of going away to another country, to 
 go with the fishing-boats sailing from Amoy out 
 on the ocean and become a fisherman. This was a 
 strange prescription, but the doctor saw that the 
 young man needed air, exercise and something to 
 keep him from study. 
 
 It was a severe trial to Choh Lin, but as the mis- 
 
BECOMING A PREACHER. 
 
 249 
 
 sionaries said he must obey the physician’s order, 
 and his mother and brother agreed to it, he became 
 a fisherman. It was a hard life, to be tossed on the 
 waters in a little vessel, to live with rough men on 
 poor food, to sleep in a dirty, wet boat, and, worse 
 than all, to be obliged to work hard and to risk the 
 dangers of the ocean. Many times he wished him- 
 self ashore in the seminary or in his own home. 
 Many times, too, he wished that he had listened to 
 the missionaries and not studied so hard. He be- 
 lieved more than ever that the missionaries were 
 wise men. He determined to follow their advice 
 in future. But it proved hard advice before long. 
 
 The change of air and ways of living, as well as 
 the constant exercise, soon proved the wisdom of 
 the physician’s advice. The cough lessened, his 
 appetite returned and he grew stout and rugged. 
 As soon as he felt better he went to the missionaries 
 on his return from one of the fishing- voyages and 
 asked to be taken back to the school. It was a 
 trial to be told that he had not yet grown strong 
 enough, and that he must go back to the fishing- 
 boat. He obeyed, though far from willingly. 
 These fishing-trips became more anti more unpleas- 
 ant to him, and he could not understand why he 
 must continue them, for to himself he seemed well. 
 Not until he had been a fisherman for a whole year 
 did the physician say that he might return to his 
 studiel, and not until that permission was given did 
 the missionaries welcome him back to the seminary* 
 
250 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 It was a long and tedious year for Choh Lin 
 among the fishermen. Perhaps he thought then of 
 the business opportunities he had refused; perhaps 
 he longed to be in business, instead of being a stu- 
 dent and again losing his health. If he did have 
 such longings, he kept them secret. But some of 
 his friends, especially those at Tay Soa, thought 
 that he would have been wiser had he gone into 
 business instead of wasting his strength in study. 
 His grandmother said that he was sick because he 
 had deserted the religion of his fathers, and that 
 the gods had sent the illness as a punishment. She 
 further said that the gods would take his life if he 
 continued to serve the foreign God. When he came 
 back restored and strong, old Mrs. Lee felt sure that 
 she was right, for as soon as her grandson gave up 
 study and left the missionaries he became better. 
 She begged her daughter-in-law not to let him go 
 back to school to die. 
 
 Bugged, healthy and happy, the young man went 
 back to the seminary more satisfied than ever that 
 the foreigners were wiser than his own countrymen. 
 Probably not a Chinaman would have told him to 
 go to fishing for his health, but the foreign doctor 
 had ; obeying, he was now well. Great are the for- 
 eigners! thought Choh Lin. 
 
 But higher thoughts were iu his heart. Iu all 
 he believed that God had been present, and that 
 divine mercy had spared and restored him to health. 
 Yes, even though a foreigner had advised his going 
 
BECOMING A PREACHER. 
 
 251 
 
 with the fishermen, it was God who had brought 
 that foreigner to China. God had sent the mission- 
 aries there to teach him and his countrymen the 
 way to Christ. This was the greatest of mercies, 
 and Choh Lin determined to prove his gratitude by 
 giving himself more entirely to the service of God. 
 
 He began his studies with new zeal, but with 
 more wisdom. He took more rest, and found him- 
 self better able than before to study. But a new 
 way of resting from study was ordered by the mis- 
 sionaries. The students were sent off occasionally 
 to the mission-stations to preach on the Sabbath. In 
 this way they had variety in their work, as well as 
 an opportunity to use the knowledge they had 
 gained. They also learned how to preach by prac- 
 ticing preaching; they saw, too, something of the 
 work they would soon be set apart to do. 
 
 Choh Lin was happy, yet full of fear, when told 
 to go off to one of the mission-stations on Saturday 
 and aid the helper there to preach on the next day. 
 It is true he had addressed small meetings, but he 
 had not preached to a regular Sabbath audience. 
 He had often thought and studied what to say when 
 he did preach. He had longed for the time when 
 he might preach, and now, before he had expected, 
 it had come. He started for the station with some 
 fear, and yet with a little pride too. He had been 
 praised often, and it would have been strange had 
 he believed that all who praised him had told false- 
 hoods. Though not without pride, he felt that he 
 
252 
 
 CIIOH LIN. 
 
 was to speak the Lord’s words. Idle prayed that 
 the right words might be chosen and so presented 
 that the people could not but hear and believe. 
 Perhaps there was a feeling of expectation that the ’ 
 people would listen with wonder at the eloquence 
 of the speaker, and then would be so impressed by 
 what he said that they would be unable to turn 
 away from the truth. If he expected to see his 
 hearers weep as they listened and then cry, “ What 
 must we do to be saved?” he would not have been 
 very unlike some other young preachers. 
 
 When he began to preach the audience looked at 
 the young speaker with no little interest. His fine 
 form, pleasing manner and pleasant voice, as well 
 as his youth, held their attention for a while, nor 
 were they without interest in the words he spoke. 
 But after a time some faces turned from him, and 
 here and there a man was looking at his neighbors, 
 talking to the one next to him, looking up to the 
 ceiling, turning over the leaves of the hymn-book, 
 and one or two were asleep. The conduct was much 
 like that of a congregation in an American church, 
 only in our country it would be a Christian audience ; 
 Choh Lin’s was mostly heathen. It would have been 
 very discouraging to the young preacher had there 
 not been some who listened attentively to the whole 
 sermon. At its close the young man felt not a little 
 discouraged to find that his words had seemingly 
 ^ad little effect. lie did not think that they were 
 as seeds in new ground — that his hearers were hea- 
 
The Chinese Preacher. 
 
 Page 253. 
 

BECOMING A PREACHER. 
 
 253 
 
 then men with hearts little prepared for the truth. 
 He expected to reap a harvest at once from the seed 
 sown. 
 
 Though disappointed, the young preacher was 
 learning a lesson of faith ; he was also learning that 
 it is not by might nor by power, but by the Lord’s 
 Spirit, that souls are converted. He was disap- 
 pointed, but not discouraged ; he only determined 
 the more to continue preaching. 
 
 In these preaching-excursions he did not think 
 that all his work was done when from the pulpit he 
 told the people of a Saviour. Before and after ser- 
 vice, sitting in the little chapel with only one or two 
 hearers, he often preached more effective sermons 
 than from the pulpit itself. One and another lis- 
 tened attentively as he told the old story, though 
 new to them, of a Saviour’s love. Some were 
 deeply interested, and asked many questions and 
 seemed anxious to learn more. But others, as soon 
 as he told them to give up the worship of the spirits 
 of the dead and their own evil ways, did not care 
 to hear anything more about this new religion. 
 
 Many times was he asked, “ What are you telling 
 these things for?” “ How much do the foreigners 
 give you for teaching their religion ?” “ What will 
 they give me to become a follower of their gods?” 
 More than one offered to become Christians if Choh 
 Lin would ensure them positions, a chance to make 
 money. But the people could not understand why 
 foreigners should teach their religion to others, and 
 
254 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 even pay men to do it, when there seemed no way 
 of making money by it. They would not believe 
 that it was done from love to Christ and anxiety 
 for souls. Many believed that there was some de- 
 ception hidden, and that preaching the gospel was 
 only another foreign way of getting money from 
 the Chinese. In vain Choh Lin tried to explain ; 
 people would not believe. They knew that they 
 would not do such things for nothing; they knew, 
 too, that other foreigners were always trying to 
 make money, and so believed that missionaries had 
 some selfish purpose. Many, therefore, listened in 
 great doubt to the young preacher. 
 
 “ Ah, yes,” said one, “you may be in earnest — so 
 you must be, or the foreigners would discharge you 
 — but you are yet young and the foreigners have not 
 let you see what they mean to do. Have any of 
 our mandarins or great men become worshipers of 
 the foreign God ? They know more than we, and 
 see that it is not wise to desert the religion of our 
 country. When they listen and follow this new 
 religion, then we will think about it.” 
 
 These and many other objections might have dis- 
 couraged the young preacher had there not been 
 another side to the work. His own heart was full 
 of joy as he told men of a Saviour. He knew that 
 he was doing the work the Lord intended him to 
 do. Then, too, there were some who not only lis- 
 tened, but asked to know more. They came each 
 time he preached. They showed that they believed 
 
BECOMING A PREACHER. 
 
 255 
 
 what he said, and wished to find a better God than 
 they knew in their country. 
 
 Gradually did Choli Lin engage more and more 
 in preaching. Sometimes, when the regular preach- 
 ers were ill or obliged to go away on preaching- 
 tours, the students were sent to take their places, and 
 sometimes they stayed a week or two at these sta- 
 tions. During the summer season most of the time 
 of the students was spent in the country at these 
 stations. On their return from their work each 
 young man had learned something and had some- 
 thing to ask the teachers. 
 
CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 CHI LAP AND THE GRANDMOTHER BECOME 
 CHRISTIANS. 
 
 rTl HOUGH Chi Lap had for a long time attended 
 -A- chapel-service and was often in the inquiry- 
 room, yet he had not confessed Christ publicly when 
 his grandmother came to Amoy. He was a praying 
 young man and tried to live right, but he had not 
 given himself to Christ. He feared that he might 
 suffer by becoming a Christian, and he waited. 
 
 Shortly after his sister and grandmother came to 
 Amoy urgent business called Chi Lap to his native 
 village. He had heard that the enemies of Tay Soa 
 had sent soldiers down to watch the village, and 
 knew that it would be difficult to pass these men in 
 safety ; yet he resolved to try it. Instead of taking 
 the regular route, he landed some distance below the 
 place, determining to walk the rest of the way and 
 enter the village from an unusual direction. 
 
 When he approached the town he saw, to his sur- 
 prise and terror, that it was surrounded by the en- 
 emy, who seemed to be besieging the place. Not 
 having yet been noticed by the soldiers, he stopped 
 and hid while he thought what was best to be done. 
 
 256 
 
CHI LAP AND THE GRANDMOTHER. 257 
 
 His business was urgent; he must try to enter Tay 
 Soa, yet to do so might make him a prisoner of the 
 besieging army. If known to belong to the Lee 
 family, he would be held until a price was paid by 
 his friends for his ransom. 
 
 Chi Lap was proud and not lacking in courage. 
 He wanted to be known as a man who did his duty ; 
 so he was unwilling to turn back. He said to him- 
 self, “This business must be attended to; it is my 
 duty to go ahead and do it, yet I shall probably be 
 captured, for I cannot pass the soldiers without 
 being seen. But if I go back people will call me 
 a coward ; they will say I cannot be trusted with 
 business, and it may cause me to lose my place. 
 There is one thing I can do, and that is pray to the 
 foreign God. The foreign teachers say that he can 
 do great things ; mother and Choh Lin say so, too, 
 and I partly believe it. Why should not I ask him 
 to help me now? If he is so great and so willing 
 to hear prayer, why will he not help me and keep 
 those soldiers from harming me? I will try him, 
 and if he does hear and save me I will after that 
 become his servant.” 
 
 Chi Lap knelt down and prayed in a low voice 
 that he might be saved from the enemies of Tay 
 Soa and be brought back in safety to Amoy. How 
 well he prayed none can now say. 
 
 When he arose from his knees it was with a de- 
 termination to trust to the foreign God and go for- 
 ward. Steadily, but with anxious heart, he walked 
 17 
 
258 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 toward the village and the soldiers. Without say- 
 ing a word, he passed the line, expecting every mo- 
 ment to be stopped and taken prisoner. The men 
 looked at him as he came up, talked about him — at 
 least so Chi Lap supposed — but said not a word to 
 him, and quietly allowed the young man to pass by 
 into the village. Not until he reached it and saw 
 that he was not yet in the hands of the enemy did 
 he breathe freely. When he found himself com- 
 paratively safe he could hardly help kneeling down 
 to thank God for hearing his prayer. 
 
 His friends praised his bravery, saying that he 
 would become a great general, since he dared, alone 
 and unarmed, to walk up to and pass an array of 
 hostile soldiers. Chi Lap thought that if they 
 could have heard his heart beat and known his feel- 
 ings when he passed the enemy his friends would 
 not call him brave. Yet he was really courageous. 
 True bravery is not absence of fear, but going for- 
 ward in the way of duty in spite of fear. 
 
 Chi Lap said nothing to the people of Tay Soa 
 about his prayer, nor yet of his determination to 
 become a Christian. He knew how his mother and 
 brother had been persecuted by them for worshiping 
 the God of the foreigners, and he had no wish to 
 endure their persecution. He was brave enough to 
 face the enemy, but not brave enough to confess 
 Christ to his friends. He had prayed to be pro- 
 tected from the one, but had not asked God for 
 help to meet the other. 
 
CHI LAP AND THE GRANDMOTHER. 259 
 
 He finished his business as soon as he could and 
 took the first opportunity to go by boat to Amoy. 
 The enemies did not keep as close a watch on the 
 water as they did on the land, and it was possible for 
 boats to come and go at night. When he reached 
 Amoy he told his story, with no little gratitude to 
 God for his care over him, and at once confessed 
 that he meant to be a Christian. 
 
 “ God heard my prayer,” said he ; “ why should 
 I not serve him? He alone kept those soldiers 
 from harming me. Because of his care I am free ; 
 so I belong to him.” 
 
 There was a marked change in Chi Lap after 
 that. He soon joined the Church, and for years 
 was an active and faithful member of it. When he 
 had been for some time in Formosa, and had grown 
 rich, then he was led into temptation and fell before 
 it, as we have learned, yet, we trust, not in a final 
 fall. 
 
 To his dying day Chi Lap could give no other 
 explanation of his escape from the soldiers than 
 that God heard his prayer and took care of him ; 
 nor can the author give any other. The God who 
 shut the lions’ mouths so that they should not hurt 
 Daniel could control the soldiers so that they let 
 the young man pass their lines. F Call upon me in 
 the. day of trouble, and I will deliver thee, and thou 
 shalt glorify me :” Chi Lap tried that promise and 
 found it good. 
 
 The object of the soldiers in besieging Tay Soa 
 
260 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 was to frighten the people and force them to pay a 
 price to be let alone, rather than to kill them. If 
 the villagers could not be forced to do this, then the 
 enemy would attack the village and try to carry 
 away prisoners, to be held until a price should be 
 paid for their freedom. 
 
 We leave Chi Lap now and turn to the grand- 
 mother. When she came to Amoy it was with 
 many a secret vow that she would not become a 
 Christian. She determined not to have anything to 
 do with Christians, and not to go to a chapel where 
 the foreign religion was taught. She even resolved 
 not to speak to a missionary, and, if possible, not 
 to allow one of them to speak to or see her, lest in 
 some way they should lead her to change her religion. 
 
 “Why should I change?’’ said she to herself. 
 “ My religion is good enough for me, and it satis- 
 fied my fathers. As they lived I will, and as they 
 died so will I die.” 
 
 Yet there came to her mind the sad questions, 
 “Who will care for my spirit when I am gone? 
 Who will feed and clothe it? Who will care for 
 the spirits of my dead ancestors? What shall I 
 say when I meet them in the spirit-world, and they 
 ask me why they are neglected ? Can I tell my son 
 that his children .and his wife left the religion of 
 the Middle Kingdom for that of foreigners? Must 
 I say that this happened while I was living?” 
 
 Such sad thoughts made old Mrs. Lee determined 
 to try to win back her grandchildren to idolatry, 
 
CHI LAP AND THE GRANDMOTHER. 261 
 
 and made her more willing to go to Amoy, where 
 she might influence them. 
 
 At Amoy she was a stranger. Being in a Chris- 
 tian home, there was little opportunity for her to 
 become acquainted with heathen women, but she 
 often met Christian people. As Christian women 
 were few, they were the more in each other’s com- 
 pany. Knowing the feelings of the elder Mrs. Lee 
 toward the gospel, these said very little to her about 
 it, but they spared no pains to make her feel con- 
 tented in her new home. Before long, in spite of 
 her determination to have nothing to do with Chris- 
 tians, the old lady learned to like her new friends. 
 She was specially pleased that they said so little 
 against the religion of China and seemed willing 
 that she should worship as she chose. 
 
 Some time after leaving Tay Soa she became ill. 
 This illness increased until her recovery was doubt- 
 ful. Christian women came in to see and care for 
 her. They treated her as if she were a mother. 
 Any delicacy that might tempt the appetite was 
 brought in and she was coaxed to eat it. Day and 
 night kind friends watched by the old lady, doing 
 all in their power for her comfort. They occasion- 
 ally spoke to her about the true God, yet were kind 
 and gentle in telling her of a Saviour, saying little 
 to offend. They constantly prayed for her salva- 
 tion, though usually when she did not hear. The 
 younger Mrs. Lee, however, could not hide her anx- 
 iety for her mother-in-law, nor could she help at 
 
262 
 
 CHOII LIN. 
 
 times praying by the old lady’s bedside. But it 
 was so gently done that old Mrs. Lee was not at 
 all offended. Indeed, the continued kindness of all 
 made her lose her hatred of Christianity, and she 
 was willing that they should pray for her recovery. 
 
 To her it was a mystery why these people should 
 care so much for a stranger, an old woman, and 
 poor too. When she asked they answered that 
 this was their duty as taught by the Christian re- 
 ligion ; they did it because they were trying to obey 
 God. No explanation, however, would at first sat- 
 isfy old Mrs. Lee, and again and again she asked 
 her daughter-in-law, “ Why do they do these things? 
 Why are they so kind? I can never pay them; I 
 have no money. I am no relative of theirs, not 
 even an acquaintance from whom they may some 
 day expect a reward. I am only a poor old woman 
 who must soon go to the spirit-world, and can in no 
 way return their favors here. True, I may in the 
 spirit-world, and gladly will I do all I can there for 
 such kind friends. Yet it is strange why they are 
 so good to me.” 
 
 Once, when the younger Mrs. Lee said that all 
 was done from love to Christ, the old lady replied, 
 “ That may all be, but people in the Middle King- 
 dom do not love the gods so much as that. They 
 love and serve the gods to receive something, but 
 what does the foreign God care for me? I don’t 
 pray to him ; I never serve him. What good will 
 he do them for their care of me ?” 
 
CHI LAP AND THE GRANDMOTHER. 263 
 
 Beiu * told that the God of the foreigners eared 
 for all, and even loved those who did not serve him, 
 the old lady was surprised, though she had no doubt 
 heard the same truth before, and said, “ What ! care 
 for and even love those who are not his friends, who 
 never worship him? That cannot be; gods never 
 do that.” 
 
 Slowly this idea entered her mind and filled her 
 with wonder at the difference between the God of 
 the foreigners and the gods of the Chinese. She 
 was scarcely less surprised to notice, sick as she was, 
 that the women who watched by her occasionally 
 kneeled beside the bed when they thought her asleep 
 and in a low voice prayed for her recovery. “ Why 
 should they pray that I may get well ?” she asked 
 herself. “ Why do they wish me to live? If I do 
 not die, some one else must. Death will have his 
 full share; if not the old, then he takes the young; 
 and if I am spai’ed some of their own relatives, or 
 even themselves, may be taken.” 
 
 She did not die. After a while she began to im- 
 prove, and slowly recovered her health. When 
 able to talk more she was ready to converse with 
 Christians about their religion. She was glad to 
 talk with Choh Lin and his brother, and seemed to 
 have lost all wish to win them back to idolatry. 
 
 One day Choh Lin said to her, “ Grandmother, 
 you often asked why our friends were so kind to 
 you, a stranger. I’ll tell you : it was because God 
 has changed their hearts.” 
 
264 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “ Why did he change their hearts ?” she asked. 
 “ Do those whose hearts are changed ever speak evil 
 words or have evil thoughts ?” 
 
 “Yes, grandmother,” answered he ; “sometimes 
 they do, hut it is because they do not ask God 
 to keep them from evil or do not trust enough in 
 him. They are like plants that droop when they 
 have no water. Christ is the Christian’s water of 
 life.” 
 
 “ Don’t they hate their enemies any more ?” she 
 asked. 
 
 “No. The Lord says we must love our enemies, 
 bless them that curse us and do good to them that 
 use us badly.” 
 
 “ Is that too in your religion ? It is not in ours. 
 We hate those who hate us ; yes, and keep hating 
 even after we go to the spirit- world,” she added in 
 a lower voice. After they had talked for a while 
 she continued : “ Our religion is to do to others as 
 they do to us ; the foreign religion is to do to them 
 as we wish they would do to us.” Then she mur- 
 mured, “Yes, it is a good religion. It is good to 
 the sick and to the stranger; it has been good to 
 me.” Choli Lin thought her asleep, but she was 
 thinking aloud. 
 
 As she grew better she was the more ready to lis- 
 ten while others talked about the Saviour. She 
 often asked questions and became more and more 
 interested. She was glad to have others pray with 
 and for her, yet for some time seemed unwilling to 
 
CHI LAP AND THE GRANDMOTHER. 265 
 
 ask them to do so. One day she said to those at- 
 tending her, “ That is a good doctrine about loving 
 those who do not love you. If more obeyed it this 
 world would be much more happy than it is now. 
 Who first taught it ?” 
 
 “ God himself/’ was the reply. 
 
 “ It must have been a God who could think of 
 such things ; men think only of getting, not of giv- 
 ing — of rewarding evil for evil, and sometimes evil 
 for good, rather than good for evil. None but a 
 God could have given such a religion to man, and 
 I want to know about that God.” This was said 
 as if at last she had broken through a great barrier 
 that restrained her. She then continued : “ That 
 God has been very good to me. When I came here, 
 a stranger, he sent you to care for me ; you, who are 
 his people, did more for the old stranger than sisters 
 would do. None of those who worship the gods of 
 the Middle Kingdom have cared for me. The gods 
 I have served for so many years have deserted me, 
 while the God of foreigners has cared for me. Yes, 
 he has heard the prayers of his people, and has saved 
 my life and is restoring me to health. He is the 
 God whom I will serve.” 
 
 From this time old Mrs. Lee was a changed 
 woman. She no longer hesitated to ask the way to 
 the Saviour. 
 
 None were more glad than were Choh Lin and 
 his mother to welcome the old lady among those 
 who worshiped the true God. Mrs. Lee felt now 
 
266 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 that her joy was nearly full. Her three children 
 were Christians, her favorite son was studying for 
 the ministry, and now the old mother-in-law was 
 seeking Christ. Patiently had Mrs. Lee borne un- 
 kind treatment and bitter words; earnestly, con- 
 stantly and hopefully had she prayed for her mother- 
 in-law’s conversion ; now her patience was rewarded, 
 her prayers were answered. All through those years 
 the younger Mrs. Lee had believed that her prayers 
 would be answered, yet the delay had been a great 
 trial to her faith. Now that faith obtained its re- 
 ward, she felt that she could not be thankful 
 enough. Many times did she, with tears of joy, 
 tell how good the Lord had been to her, and urge 
 others to trust him more. 
 
 When old Mrs. Lee was able to go out, the first 
 place she wished to visit was the chapel, where from 
 the preacher she might hear the gospel. She took 
 delight in worshiping with God’s people and telling 
 in the inquiry-meeting what the Lord had done for 
 her. “ I want to be with the people of the God 
 who did so much for me when I did not love him,” 
 said she to the missionary. “ I want to be with 
 them, not for what I can get, but for what I want 
 to give them. They are always doing me good, 
 while I can do nothing in return. I am only a 
 beggar, vet it is not hard to beg from loving brothers 
 
 OO 7 J O O 
 
 and sisters who only wish to know what I need. 
 Best of all is it to receive such goodness from a God 
 who is willing to call a poor worthless old woman 
 
CHI LAP AND THE GRANDMOTHER. 267 
 
 like me daughter. It is a good religion ; it is the 
 one I need.” 
 
 Gradually the old lady learned the true way. 
 She was old, her mind worked slowly; it was diffi- 
 cult for her to unlearn many things that for a life- 
 time she had been learning, and more difficult still 
 to overcome the evil habits of a lifetime. But she 
 gained, and the change in her became great. After 
 instructing her for some time the missionaries bap- 
 tized and received her into the Church. 
 
CHAPTER XXYI. 
 
 CHOH LIN MARRIED AND A PREACHER. 
 
 I T must not be supposed that because this is a 
 true story it is to have in it nothing of love and 
 marriage. Love is a part of life, therefore writers 
 who wish to make their fictitious stories real tell of 
 love. But too often their tales seem as if love 
 were the only thing worth telling about in this 
 world. God made us to love and be loved in this 
 world, but that is not the only object of life. Those 
 who make it such make their lives failures as far as 
 others are concerned, and often failures as far as 
 their own happiness is concerned. Those who live 
 for doing good will be more loved and happier than 
 those who think only of loving and being loved. 
 
 The Chinese believe that children should love 
 their parents and parents their children, and admit 
 that husbands and wives should love each other; 
 yet they do not believe it wise or well for young 
 people of opposite sexes to love each other at all 
 until engaged. With them engagement for mar- 
 riage comes first — love afterward, if at all. People 
 in China, as a rule, do not marry because they love, 
 268 
 
MARRIED AND A PREACHER. 
 
 269 
 
 but because it is the custom and because they wish 
 homes and families of their own. 
 
 In America it is the custom for each man to carry 
 a watch. He who can gets a gold one, but many 
 must content themselves with one of silver, while a 
 few own nothing but a nickel watch, and some are 
 too poor to own a watch at all. It is somewhat so 
 in China with marrying. Men get wives if they 
 can, and the best they can afford, but some are too 
 poor to own a wife, while some own several. Men 
 are not so anxious there to marry rich wives, be- 
 cause a daughter does not usually take with her a 
 share of her father’s wealth beyond the presents 
 given at the wedding. After marriage a woman 
 loses most of her claim on her father’s family. She 
 belongs to her husband and to his family, and is 
 even treated at times by her own relatives as if 
 dead. 
 
 Men do not always make their own choice; on 
 the contrary, the parents or friends of young men 
 and boys frequently choose the wife and complete 
 the engagement. This is often done without con- 
 sulting the one most interested. Some day the 
 young man is told that he is engaged to be married 
 to a young lady whom he may never have met. He 
 usually takes it as a matter of course. The young 
 lady is rarely consulted. She is engaged, or sold, to 
 a stranger, often with little more regard to her feel- 
 ings than if she were a horse or a cow. 
 
 The time for engagements varies, some being 
 
270 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 promised in marriage only a short time before the 
 wedding, and others are engaged in their youth. It 
 is not an unusual thing for parents to engage their 
 infants, and these engagements last. 
 
 Marriages in China, it can readily be seen, are 
 not always happy; too often they are wretched. 
 
 When Choh Lin was fifteen years of age, and 
 before he had decided to become a preacher, the 
 older brother of a young girl in the city visited 
 Mrs. Lee and tried to make arrangements with her 
 for the engagement of Choh Lin to his sister. The 
 girl was intelligent, rather pretty, of good dispo- 
 sition and of a family fully equal to that of Choh 
 Lin, and, moreover, was a professed Christian. 
 Mrs. Lee knew that she would be likely to make 
 a suitable wife for her son. The fact that she had 
 been brought up as a Christian made her the more 
 acceptable to Mrs. Lee. Besides, Choh Lin was now 
 approaching manhood, and it was fully time that 
 a wife should be chosen for him. But his mother 
 was unable to pay for a wife for her son, so she 
 frankly told the man that she could not afford to 
 give what would be expected as engagement-money. 
 
 “ We do not want any money now,” was the an- 
 swer. “ You will be able when your sons are earn- 
 ing more to pay, and we will wait. We want a 
 (rood husband for our sister.” 
 
 But Mrs. Lee, while satisfied with the girl, was 
 unwilling to bind herself to pay, so the engagement, 
 was not made. 
 
MARRIED AND A PREACHER. 
 
 271 
 
 Shortly after this a near relative of another girl 
 in the city called on Mrs. Lee, and broached the 
 subject of the marriage of Mrs. Lee’s son. 
 
 “Yes,” said Mrs. Lee, “Chi Lap is old enough, 
 and should have a wife, but he is so busy now that 
 he cannot take time to select a wife. Besides, he is 
 rapidly rising in business and will some day be a 
 rich man ; then he can afford to get a much better 
 wife than now.” 
 
 “ ‘ Rising in business ’ ?” spoke the visitor in sur- 
 prise. “Has he left school? Why did he stop?” 
 
 “ He has not been at school for some years,” re- 
 plied the mother. 
 
 “ Oh, I was speaking of your younger son,” said 
 the woman. “He has had no wife chosen for him 
 yet, has he?” 
 
 “No, he is quite young and there is no hurry,” 
 answered Mrs. Lee. “It will be time enough to 
 select a wife when he has decided on the business 
 he is to follow ; besides, I do not wish to see him 
 married before his older brother.” 
 
 “One need not interfere with the other,” replied 
 the woman. “ There are enough beautiful and cul- 
 tivated girls for both, and many families who would 
 be glad to marry their daughters to your sons.” 
 
 After flattering Mrs. Lee for a while the woman 
 proposed that Choh Lin be engaged to her relative. 
 
 “ I am too poor now,” replied Mrs. Lee, “ to 
 make arrangements for the marriage of my younger 
 son. He must wait until we are richer.” 
 
272 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “ We do not ask much money,” said the woman ; 
 “ if you will only promise your son, a small amount 
 of money will be enough to satisfy us for losing our 
 relative.” 
 
 Mrs. Lee nevertheless refused to make the en- 
 gagement until better able to pay the amount usu- 
 ally expected, and the woman left disappointed. 
 
 Choh Lin was a bright youth, a good student and 
 gave promise of being a learned and noted man ; so 
 he was regarded as a desirable husband. Such a 
 young man could not fail to have offers of a wife, 
 and even have them repeated. In a year or two 
 the man who first offered his sister to Mrs. Lee as 
 a wife for her younger son called asain and urged 
 the suit for his sister. Believing that Choh Lin 
 would bring no little honor to his wife and to her 
 family, the brother of the young lady made unusual 
 offers. 
 
 At the engagement a price is fixed for the bride, 
 part of it to be paid then and the rest at the wed- 
 ding. This price varies according to the wealth, 
 beauty, rank, intelligence and many other qualifica- 
 tions of the bride. It may vary, too, if more than 
 one man wishes the same maiden. Her relatives 
 can then demand a high rate, since the demand is 
 more than the supply. 
 
 The brother and mother of the young lady were 
 so anxious to get Choh Lin that they offered her to 
 Mrs. Lee for thirty dollars — a very low price for 
 such a desirable wife — and further agreed to wait 
 
MARRIED AND A PREACHER. 273 
 
 for all the money until the wedding, and then, if 
 Choh Lin were unable to pay all, they would take 
 even less. 
 
 The bargain was finally made, and Choh Lin, 
 when about sixteen years old, was engaged to be 
 married. The engagement, once made, could not 
 be broken without incurring shame and disgrace. 
 The fact that he was engaged to be married gave 
 Choh Lin but little care. He did not call to see 
 the young lady — that, in Chinese society, would 
 have been regarded as very improper — nor did he 
 write to her or receive messages from her. The 
 two were almost strangers, and such they must 
 remain until the wedding-day. He had, however, 
 seen her as a little girl in school when he first came 
 to Amoy. If he gave the subject much thought, it 
 was that of satisfaction that there was one less care 
 for him now : a wife had been chosen, and it only 
 remained to fix the wedding-day, and, when that 
 arrived, be married. It was not a matter of love 
 at all, but of business, and he was told that the 
 business had been well done, a good bargain made; 
 why should he worry himself? 
 
 When he was twenty years old the wedding-day 
 came. It was a day of festivity and gladness to 
 Choh Lin and to his fellow-students, but less a time 
 of festivity to the bride. 
 
 Since her engagement her mother and brother 
 had died, and she was left to the care of more dis- 
 tant relatives. While her friends took charge of 
 
 18 
 
274 
 
 CIIOH LIN. 
 
 the preparations the absence of these two destroyed 
 much of the happiness of the young lady, yet it 
 made her look forward with more hopeful anxiety 
 to the time when, instead of mother and brother, 
 she would have a husband to care for her. But 
 what would the husband, what would the wife be? 
 It need not be told how anxious each was to meet 
 the other and see if all that had been told was true, 
 and if either had changed since childhood. 
 
 The bride, dressed in brilliant colors, was carried 
 in a closed red sedan-chair to the home of Choh 
 Lin. He, too, was dressed in his best, waiting to 
 receive the wedding-procession. It was an anxious 
 moment to the two when he stepped to the sedan as 
 it was set down at his home. Then he opened the 
 door of the chair and for the first time since child- 
 hood looked on the face of his bride, and she on the 
 face of her husband. 
 
 As Mrs. Lee, her son and the bride were Chris- 
 tians, the ceremony resembled a marriage-ceremony 
 in America. After the wedding the young couple 
 settled down quietly to married life. Owing to the 
 death of her near relatives the bride did not bring 
 the usual number of presents, and Choh Lin had 
 less money to pay to her relatives for his wife. 
 They accepted twenty-four dollars as a fair price, 
 considering the circumstances. Of course the Chi- 
 nese deny that the money is given to pay for a wife, 
 yet admit that it is meant to make amends for the 
 loss her relatives feel at her leaving them. 
 
MARRIED AND A PREACHER. 
 
 275 
 
 Choli Lin and his wife soon learned that neither 
 was perfect, yet each found in the other a true and 
 faithful companion, and before they had been mar- 
 ried many months they had learned to love each 
 other fondly. Some years after their marriage the 
 author visited them in their home and saw that 
 there can come true love to the hearts of those who 
 are strangers on their wedding-day. But Choh 
 Lin’s experience is not like that of many married 
 people in China. Their lives are wretched ; un- 
 loved they live and unloved they die. A married 
 life without love they find a miserable slavery. 
 
 For some time before his marriage Choh Lin’s 
 time had been largely given to preaching. At 
 length the work became so urgent that the mission- 
 aries were obliged to take the older students alto- 
 gether from their studies and place them in charge 
 of the different fields. He had been married only 
 a short time when they told him one day that he 
 must give up study in the seminary and move out 
 into the country to take charge, with another 
 preacher, of a large mission-field where the people 
 seemed ready and anxious to hear the gospel. 
 
 “We would like you to remain here and study 
 longer,” said they — “you are yet too young to have 
 so much work and responsibility placed on you — 
 yet what else can we do ? The Lord has heard the 
 prayer of the Church and has opened the field for 
 us; now we must try to occupy it. We are few, 
 but the Lord will be with us. It may be that after 
 
276 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 awhile you will be able to return and study, but 
 now it seems the Lord’s will that you give all your 
 time to preaching.” 
 
 “ As you say, teachers, so will I do,” answered 
 Choh Lin. “ I gave myself to the Lord for his 
 work, and do not mean to keep part of myself back 
 now, and thus be like Ananias and Sapphira. If 
 you think I can do the work, send me. I am glad 
 to do the Lord’s will, only I wish that I were 
 better fitted for it.” 
 
 Choh Lin went to the mission-field alone, leaving 
 his wife in Amoy, intending as soon as he could 
 make arrangements to move to the field and live 
 there. He longed to stay at Amoy or near the city, 
 where so many Christians were and where he had 
 so many friends. To leave behind those whom he 
 loved, to give up the associations and the comforts 
 he had there, to live among heathen people, made 
 the sacrifice no small one for the young man. But 
 a greater trial was before him, and one that he 
 dreaded more than any other. He must have 
 charge in part of a mission. True, the older 
 preacher would have the principal charge, but 
 Choh Lin knew enough of the work to know that 
 the older man would stay at the principal station 
 and send him to preach and take charge of one or 
 more of the smaller ones connected with it. How 
 could he do this? How meet the opposition of 
 idolaters? How meet their shrewd schemes to 
 drive him away? How keep the Christians and 
 
MARRIED AND A PREACHER. 
 
 277 
 
 the inquirers from getting into trouble with the 
 heathen? How hold his position and yet keep 
 peace? A single mistake on his part might destroy 
 the effect of all that had been done and prevent for 
 years the preaching of the gospel again in the place. 
 Then, too, what would the people think of him ? 
 What heed would the heathen give to the words of 
 such a youth ? 
 
 A more serious trouble seemed before him. How 
 should he be able to teach inquirers the way to 
 Christ and to heaven ? What if he make a mistake 
 and direct them wrong? What if he lead men 
 away from Christ? 
 
 As these thoughts came to the mind of the young 
 man he was almost ready to refuse to become a 
 preacher. He thought and prayed over the matter, 
 he read the Bible to learn more clearly his duty, but 
 could see only one course, and that was to go for- 
 ward and do the work to which the Lord had called 
 him. He remembered Jonah ; he also remembered 
 the Lord’s promise, “ My grace is sufficient for 
 thee;” and he went forward. 
 
 The new work was even more difficult than he 
 supposed ; so the strength he received to do it was 
 greater thau he expected. With every trial he 
 found new help given, yet it seemed to him as if 
 the heathen made special efforts to trouble and per- 
 plex him. While usually polite, they occasionally 
 were unkind and insulting, telling him that he was 
 taking foreigners’ money to betray his own people 
 
278 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 and their religion to a foreign people and a foreign 
 God. In a quiet way and by shrewd means they 
 sought to drive him away. They tried to frighten 
 the man who had rented a house for a chapel, so 
 that he should demand it back. They tried, by 
 telling of a probable war against foreigners and all 
 who held to their religion, to make Choh Lin afraid 
 to preach. Bills were found posted along the streets 
 warning people not to forsake their own for a for- 
 eign religion, and telling of the danger of attending 
 chapel-services. Now and then, during worship 
 in the chapel, stones were thrown on the roof to 
 frighten the worshipers. Those who came to hear 
 the gospel were threatened if they continued to at- 
 tend the chapel. Many were frightened away, and 
 some who seemed really interested in the gospel 
 stayed away for fear of persecution. 
 
 Choh Lin was often sick at heart, and not with- 
 out serious fears lest he might suffer violence, yet 
 he kept faithfully at his work. He could now un- 
 derstand the persecutions the apostles suffered. He 
 could understand, too, what the Saviour meant when 
 he said, “Lo, I am with you alway, even unto the 
 end.” The young preacher felt that presence. In 
 his darkest hours he could look upward and see 
 light there; in his weakest moments he felt a strong 
 arm supporting him. 
 
 His work was not without results. In spite of 
 threats, some did come to the chapel ; they listened 
 too, and more, they believed the truth he taught. 
 
MARRIED AND A PREACHER. 
 
 279 
 
 One and another stayed after the sermon to talk 
 with the preacher about “ the doctrine.” Gradually 
 light came to their souls, and one by one they gave 
 themselves to Christ. Only those who have led souls 
 to Jesus can understand the joy of Choh Lin as 
 these told him that they had found the Saviour. 
 His voice and theirs united in many a song of 
 thanksgiving over what the Lord had done for 
 their souls. 
 
 For a long time Choh Lin did not think it best 
 to bring his wife to the place where duty called 
 him. Those were happy times when he was able 
 for a few days to leave his station and go to Amoy 
 to his home and to Christian friends. He soon 
 learned the value of his good wife’s sympathizing 
 words and cheerful counsels, but more still did he 
 prize the helpful words and helpful advice of the 
 missionaries. He said they seemed to lift his faith 
 above the clouds and showed him the sun always 
 shining there. From these visits the young preach- 
 er returned with stronger heart and more earnest zeal. 
 
 It was not the purpose of the missionaries to keep 
 the young men steadily in the same place, but to 
 change them about, that they might not be com- 
 pelled to study so hard in preparing their sermons, 
 and also to give them a chance to work under the 
 care of different leaders among the older preachers. 
 Then, as soon as a young man proved himself fitted 
 for a larger and more important field, the mission- 
 aries speedily promoted him. 
 
280 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 Thus, Choh Lin was changed about from one 
 station to another, though most of the time at a 
 distance from Amoy. After a few years he was 
 promoted to be at the head of a principal station, 
 where he remained in charge for some time, and 
 then was placed over one of the most important of 
 all the stations connected with the mission. But of 
 this more will be told in a later chapter. 
 
CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 THE GOSPEL AT T AY SO A. 
 
 HEN the missionaries inquired of Mrs. Lee 
 
 ’ » about the village in which she had lived, she 
 told them that none except herself had heard a mis- 
 sionary preach, but that she had spoken to some 
 about the foreign God, and added, “Few care to 
 hear about him ; the most say that I must not speak 
 in the village of any but the gods of the Middle 
 Kingdom.” 
 
 “ Do you obey ?” was asked. 
 
 “ No,” was her reply, “ but I say nothing to those 
 who are angry, for fear it will only make them hate 
 the doctrine the more. There are some who are 
 willing to listen, and one or two who want to know 
 more. I wish that the foreign teachers could visit 
 Tay Soa and tell the people of the doctrine. You 
 could make it so plain that they would see it to be 
 good.” 
 
 More than once Mrs. Lee invited and even urged 
 the missionaries to go to Tay Soa to preach the gos- 
 pel to the people. As their number was so small 
 and their work in the city as well as outside of it 
 so great, it was some time before they were able to 
 
 2SL 
 
282 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 visit the village. Meanwhile, Mrs. Lee’s talks, and 
 still more her life, were having an effect on some 
 of the people. The change in her had been great 
 — too great to pass unnoticed by a watchful and 
 gossiping people. They had not forgotten her 
 search for the life-giving God, and saw from her 
 manner and her life that she believed she had 
 found this God. There was a marked change that 
 they could not help noticing. She had no longer 
 unkind and harsh things to say of her enemies. 
 She said little about them, and that little was rather 
 tinged with sadness than hate. 
 
 “Yes, they have wronged me,” said she one day 
 to a friend, “ but I must bear it patiently. The 
 great Upper Ruler (the Chinese Christian name for 
 God) will make it all right sometime; he knows 
 what is best.” 
 
 “What!” asked the friend in surprise, “ do you 
 think it best for you to be robbed of all your prop- 
 erty? I think it would have been best if the rob- 
 bers were made to pay back and then go to prison. 
 I do not see how it can be best for you to be made 
 to work so hard for your living, when, had it not 
 been for those robbers, you would have plenty, and 
 to spare for your needy friends.” 
 
 “It will be for the best in the end,” replied Mrs. 
 Lee quietly. “ Even now I see how it has proved 
 for the best. Had I not been poor I would not 
 have been in Amoy and would not have heard 
 about the life-giving God.” 
 
THE GOSPEL AT T AY SO A. 
 
 283 
 
 “ But then you would not have needed him,” 
 spoke the other. 
 
 “ ‘ Would not have needed him ’ ?” implied Mrs. 
 Lee, looking up in surprise: “I always needed him, 
 but did not know it. I was like a thirsty person 
 who dreams of water, but awakens to know that lie 
 is dying from thirst. When I sought among the 
 temples for the life-giving God, then in dreams I 
 was feeling my thirst and seeking to quench it, but 
 not until I heard in the chapel of the true God did 
 I awaken to know that I was dying from thirst. 
 Yes, there I awoke, and there too found the living 
 Fountain of water. No, no, it is well. My pov- 
 erty made me go to Amoy, and there I became rich. 
 The good Upper Ruler allowed me to lose my earthly 
 property that I might have a share in his eternal 
 and heavenly riches. It was best.” 
 
 Talks like these left an impression on her friends. 
 They saw that Mrs. Lee was moved by a different 
 spirit, and many were the remarks made about her 
 by her neighbors. Nor were these all against her. 
 The people saw that she was not affected by ridicule. 
 Instead of persecution arousing her to anger and to 
 reply in bitter words, it only seemed to make her 
 more gentle and kind. True, there were times when 
 her old nature, aroused beyond the power of the 
 new and better one to control it, showed itself in 
 angry words. This was not often, and was always 
 followed by acts of kindness that really perplexed 
 the people of Tay Soa more than her general change 
 
284 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 of conduct. Returning good for evil is not a Chi- 
 nese custom. 
 
 Mrs. Lee was not backward to speak about the / 
 true God to those who were ready to listen, and 1 
 gladly visited and talked with those who showed 
 any interest in the gospel. But she was obliged to 
 be very careful, lest those opposed to the truth 
 should persecute those to whom she talked. Some 
 who would willingly have listened dared not speak 
 to Mrs. Lee about Christianity, and hardly dared 
 visit or speak to her at all, lest others should accuse 
 them of wishing to become worshipers of the for- 
 eign God. 
 
 In spite of all opposition and persecution, some 
 in Tay Soa became deeply interested in the gospel, 
 and their interest continued, so that when one of 
 the missionaries visited the village not long after 
 Mrs. Lee moved to Amoy, there were others besides 
 Mrs. Lee, who was at Tay Soa on a visit, glad to 
 welcome him. Of course the people all gathered to 
 see and listen to the foreigner. Many had never 
 before seen one, and to them he was a great curi- 
 osity. 
 
 The missionary’s visit made no little talk in Tay 
 Soa. His dress, his appearance, his way of speaking 
 their language, were all discussed; and when these 
 subjects grew old the doctrine he taught formed an 
 unending topic for discussion. Men talked of it on 
 the street, women talked of it in their homes, hus- 
 bands and wives talked of it in their families. Some 
 
THE GOSPEL AT T AY SO A. 
 
 285 
 
 were bitter against the missionary and the foreign 
 religion, and some merely spoke of both as curios- 
 ities, while a few showed that they were friendly to 
 both missionary and doctrine. Nearly all of these 
 were Mrs. Lee’s friends and persons with whom she 
 had already talked of Christianity. Those who 
 were friendly were careful, though, to say little in 
 favor of the gospel in the presence of its enemies, 
 and specially careful were they to say and do noth- 
 ing that might arouse against themselves persecution 
 such as Mrs. Lee had suffered. 
 
 When Mrs. Lee removed to Amoy, there had been 
 no little discussion and bitter feeling. Some said 
 that she had gone to be a servant and a spy for the 
 foreigners, and others that the cruelty of the vil- 
 lagers had driven her awav. 
 
 “ Some day the gods will visit Tay Soa with great 
 calamities for what that woman has suffered,” said 
 a man one day to several who were talking about 
 Mrs. Lee’s leaving. “ The gods have led her awav 
 that they may punish the village the more severely.” 
 
 “ We had nothing to do with her suffering,” re- 
 plied another. “ It was her own relatives who did 
 it. I am willing that the gods shall punish all of 
 them : they deserve it.” 
 
 “Yes, but we did not hinder their robbing the 
 widow,” persisted the other. “ We did nothing to 
 help her, and we must suffer with the evil ones. 
 Angry gods are sometimes blind. Yet we also had 
 something; to do with her suffering;. Have we not 
 
 O O 
 
286 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 ridiculed her search for the life-giving God, and 
 have we not even persecuted her since she believes 
 that she has found him?” 
 
 “ ‘ Persecuted her ’ !” spoke another excitedly. 
 “She deserved it for deserting the worship of the 
 Middle Kingdom for that of outside barbarians. 
 No, no ; the gods have not led her away that they 
 may punish, but that they may favor and bless, this 
 village. Let her go; it will be a blessing to us.” 
 
 “Oh, she has not gone for any such reason,” said 
 a man who had been quiet before. “ The gods did 
 not send her away, nor has she gone away to wor- 
 ship the foreign God. She is a wise woman. She 
 sees that neither she nor her sons can make money 
 here, but that, aided by the friendship of foreigners, 
 they will earn money rapidly in Amoy ; so she goes 
 there. Chi Lap is already earning money in the 
 city ten times as rapidly as he could here; his 
 mother and younger brother will soon be doing the 
 same. Foreigners have ten thousand times as much 
 money as Middle-Kingdom people, and Mrs. Lee is 
 wise enough to take the right way to get it. She 
 becomes a friend of foreigners and follows their re- 
 ligion, but it is that she may win their favor, and 
 so help her sons as well as herself to gain their 
 money. I too would be willing to accept the for- 
 eigners’ teligion could I make a fortune by it; so 
 would every one else.” 
 
 This speech had a great effect for the time; nor 
 did this effect entirely die away. It made many 
 
THE GOSPEL AT T AY SO A. 
 
 287 
 
 think more favorably of Mrs. Lee and of foreigners 
 too — also of their religion, or rather of their money. 
 
 Another visit from the missionary followed the 
 first. Though he was not so much of a curiosity 
 as before, the interest in the doctrine was greater. 
 Mrs. Lee’s talks were having their etfect, and that 
 effect had been increased rather than lessened by 
 her leaving them. But, more still, the discussions 
 about the Christian doctrine had aroused a great 
 deal of interest, and many listened intently to the 
 address of the missionary. There was in it little to 
 anger the most determined idolater, but much to 
 lead him to think. Little was said against the gods 
 of China. They were given all the credit, and far 
 more than they deserved, but their best qualities 
 were contrasted with those of the true God. When 
 the missionary spoke of Christ, he could find noth- 
 ing in the religion of the Chinese with which to 
 compare or contrast him. Jesus was presented as 
 the God who knew men — knew their souls, uudei’- 
 stood their need, and came to supply that need, 
 came to save men whom no spirits, no gods besides, 
 could save. 
 
 Greater and more earnest discussion followed this 
 than the former visit of the missionary, but now it 
 was the doctrine he taught rather than the man that 
 was discussed. Some had asked many questions ; 
 these were regarded as the wise men now, and their 
 opinions about Christianity were considered as worth 
 a great deal. They were ready to give not only the 
 
288 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 missionary’s words, but as ready to add to them 
 what they supposed he would have said had he 
 been asked certain questions. In this way the for- 
 eign teacher was made to teach some things that he 
 would never have thought of saying. Yet many 
 truths remained in the minds of the people, and 
 those truths were working, though slowly. 
 
 Mrs. Lee’s weekly visits to Tay Soa helped on 
 the effect of the truth. She visited the women and 
 explained many things, so that by several of the 
 women and a few of the men her visits were antici- 
 pated with growing interest. After several visits 
 of missionaries it became evident that there were a 
 number of inquirers in the village. It seemed that 
 a mission-station should be formed and a chapel 
 opened at Tay Soa, and regular services held. 
 
 When the missionaries tried to hire a house for a 
 chapel their enemies began to make their opposition 
 felt. They went to the man who intended to rent 
 them the house and forbade his doing it. They made 
 such threats that he dared not keep his part of the 
 bargain. He sent word to Amoy that he could not 
 rent his house to the missionaries, nor would an 
 offer of a larger rent make him change his mind. 
 He wanted the money, but he was afraid that if he 
 got it he could not long keep it, if indeed he could 
 keep his life. 
 
 Foiled in their efforts to hire this man’s house, 
 the missionaries were at a loss what to do. They 
 were determined to open a chapel in Tay Soa, not 
 
THE GOSPEL AT TAY SO A. 
 
 28'J 
 
 only on account of the interest among the people, 
 but to have a station there as a starting-place for 
 the large and populous country beyond. 
 
 “ I’ll tell you how to get a house for a chapel,” 
 said Mrs. Lee. “Let some Christian Chinaman go 
 up there and rent a house for you. When the bar- 
 gain is made and the owner gets his money regu- 
 larly, he will not readily turn you out.” 
 
 Acting on this advice, a house was rented and a 
 chapel opened. As soon as the enemies of Chris- 
 tianity learned how they had been defeated they 
 were more opposed than ever to the gospel. They 
 "were not angry at being outwitted, but angry be- 
 cause the missionaries had succeeded. Shrewdness 
 in bargains rarely offends a Chinaman. Though 
 unable to prevent the worship of the foreign God 
 in their village, these men determined to make it as 
 uncomfortable as possible for the worshipers. These 
 were threatened with all manner of punishment, 
 nor were threats alone applied. More than once 
 was violence used, yet a wholesome fear of the mis- 
 sionaries, who were known to have influence with 
 the mandarins, prevented any great injury being 
 done. 
 
 Regular Sabbath services were now held by a 
 native preacher ; occasionally one of the mission- 
 aries preached. Quite a large class of inquirers 
 was formed. For the first time in the history of 
 new stations in and around Amoy the majority of 
 these inquirers were women. According to Chinese 
 
 19 
 
290 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 custom, none but elderly women are allowed to go 
 out into the streets, nor is it deemed proper for even 
 these to be much in gatherings of men. For them 
 to hear the gospel is therefore nearly impossible, 
 except as they hear it through fathers, brothers, 
 husbands or sons. It is no unusual thing for a 
 church to be organized and continued for several 
 years with men only as members. Work by women 
 among the women is bringing about a change in 
 this respect. 
 
 The missionaries were surprised to find so many 
 women among the inquirers at Tay Soa, but a ques- 
 tion or two made it plain. This was the result of 
 Mrs. Lee’s efforts. Her talks in the homes of those 
 willing; to allow it had brought the natural results. 
 The prayers of the good woman not only for, but 
 with, her friends had been specially powerful. 
 Mrs. Lee’s strong point was prayer. Her equal 
 among Chinese Christians, men as well as women, 
 the author never heard in China. Gifted with good 
 intellect, a pleasing voice, a ready flow of words and 
 beautiful imagery, being a woman of deep emotions, 
 strong; faith, and with a heart on fire with love for 
 souls, it was almost impossible to listen to her sup- 
 plications without being affected by them. 
 
 For a number of months the missionaries and 
 native preachei’S visited and preached in the chapel 
 at Tay Soa ; and then a Christian was placed in 
 charge as chapel-keepei'. It was this man’s duty to 
 attend to the building, conduct the daily morning 
 
THE GOSPEL AT TAY SO 1 . 
 
 291 
 
 and evening worship, and even lead the Sabbath 
 service if no preacher came. He was also expected 
 to talk to the people about the gospel. 
 
 When Choh Lin was able to be away from school 
 at Amoy and visit Tay Soa, it was his delight to be 
 present at these services. His heart was glad when 
 he welcomed several of his old friends to the chapel, 
 and his joy was great when he met his early com- 
 panions, Oan and Jip. He knew that their excuse, 
 that they came from curiosity, was not the only 
 reason. Their eager faces as they listened to his 
 words told more than language could that they were 
 interested in the gospel. When none heard, they 
 let him know that they did care about the new re- 
 ligion, only they were afraid of persecution. The 
 threats of the leading men of the village had 
 alarmed them as well as others, and kept them from 
 the place of worship; yet they were eager to learn, 
 and when able asked any who knew about the 
 truth. 
 
 At last, after many months of instruction, the 
 first converts at Tay Soa were baptized and admitted 
 to the membership of the Church. It was not 
 thought wise to organize a church at once in the 
 village, so these became members of the second 
 Christian church in Amoy. 
 
 That first communion season at Tay Soa was one 
 never to be forgotten by those who there for the 
 first time took the bread and wine in remembrance 
 of Jesus. They had found it trying before to bear 
 
292 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 persecution; they hud often wished that the Chris- 
 tian life were not such a hard one, but now they 
 felt repaid for all they had suffered. They began 
 to understand how the Lord pays back a hundred- 
 fold in this life for what his people lose for his sake. 
 
 The converts and inquirers were not all from Tay 
 Soa. Several lived outside of the village, and a few 
 came from the village of Ang Tung; Thau, some 
 miles farther north. This was a place of more im- 
 portance than Tay Soa, on the way to the large 
 walled city of Tang Wan, and only a few miles 
 from it. The missionaries knew of this important 
 city, and were anxiously hoping for some way to be 
 opened that the gospel might be carried to it. The 
 converts at Ang; Tung; Thau seemed to be marking; 
 out the line of that road. It needed no urging to 
 induce the missionaries to try to open a chapel iu 
 that village. Before long this was accomplished, 
 and Ang Tung Thau was joined to Tay Soa, the 
 two becoming one charge in the care of a native 
 preacher who lived at Ang Tung Thau, while the 
 chapel-keeper remained at Tay Soa. 
 
 As the missionaries hoped and prayed, people 
 from Ang Tung Thau visiting Tang Wan told of the 
 chapel and the religious teacher who lived in their 
 village. So, too, people from that city learned in the 
 village of the new religion, and listened to the teach- 
 er, and at length asked for some one for their city. 
 
 Ang Tung Thau soon became a very important 
 station. The attendance at the little chapel grew 
 
THE GOSPEL AT TAY SO A. 
 
 293 
 
 rapidly, and was soon too large to find room in the 
 building. 
 
 “ We must have more room,” wrote the mission- 
 aries to the Church at home. “More people are 
 coming from Tang Wan ; and when these and the 
 Tay Soa people join in the Sabbath service the 
 chapel will hardly hold half of them.” 
 
 Money was sent by the Church in America for 
 building a house of worship at Ang Tung Thau, and 
 as quickly as possible a neat chapel was built for the 
 Christians in that village. The new chapel was 
 lanje enough to hold all the attendants from Any- 
 Tung Thau, heathen as well as Christian, and it 
 could have held many more than came from Tay 
 Soa, Tang Wan and the village itself. Rising 
 much higher and being considerably larger thau 
 any other building in the village, the white walls, 
 the green blinds and the straight roof of the chapel 
 attracted attention at once. Within, its high ceiling, 
 tiled floor and large windows not only give it a cool 
 appearance, but make it a delightfully light and 
 airy house of worship. This substantial chapel, if 
 no misfortune destroys it, will in all probability re- 
 main for half a century or more to bless the people 
 of Ang Tung Thau. And yet, if the author does 
 not mistake, its whole cost was only about six hun- 
 dred dollars. 
 
 Reader, few memorials are more useful and last- 
 ing in results than schools and churches founded 
 and built in mission- fields. 
 
CHAPTER XXVIII. 
 
 SETTLED AT ANG TUNG THAU. 
 
 "VTOW that Ang Tung Thau and Tay Soa had 
 -L’ become such important mission-stations, the 
 question with the missionaries was as to whom to 
 put in charge of the places. 
 
 “ He must be a careful man,” said one of the 
 missionaries, “and a man who not only can see far 
 ahead, but be able to manage the people without 
 getting into trouble with the mandarins. We had 
 better not be too fast in deciding on the man ; let 
 us try our men for a while and see who is likely to 
 prove the best for the field.” 
 
 This plan was taken, and one of the older preach- 
 ers was sent. For a month or more this man re- 
 mained ; then it was thought best to send him to 
 another field even more important than that around 
 Tay Soa. Another of the older preachers was sent 
 to take this man’s place. He soon proved that he 
 was better suited to another charge. Thus change 
 after change was made in preachers at the two 
 stations. 
 
 “I have been thinking,” said one of the mission- 
 aries when the subject for a permanent preacher at 
 
 294 
 
SETTLED AT ANG TUNG THAU. 295 
 
 the two stations was talked of again, “ that we 
 might try Choh Lin. I know it is near his old 
 home, yet that may not be so much against him; 
 indeed, it may be in his favor. Perhaps he can 
 interest some of his old friends and relatives and 
 lead them to become Christians. Choh Lin has 
 been a faithful and judicious man in every place 
 where he has been tried, and I believe that he 
 would do well in the Tay Soa and Ang Tung Thau 
 region. Let us try him.” 
 
 It was agreed to send the young preacher for a 
 few weeks to those stations, with the understanding 
 that it was to be only until a suitable man could be 
 decided on, so that he might not be disappointed if 
 not continued there. Word was sent to him to 
 come to Amoy to see the missionaries. 
 
 “Shall I tell you what for?” asked the man who 
 gave the message. “ They mean to send you to 
 your old home. If you do well, they may continue 
 you there; if not, you will be sent to some other 
 station. It is a hard place. The man who goes 
 there must not only be able to take charge of Tay 
 Soa and Ang Tung Thau, but must try to open a 
 station at Tang Wan. If you can do this, the mis- 
 sionaries will think you a number-one good man. 
 Others of us have tried, but we have failed.” 
 
 “I hardly think they will send me there,” an- 
 swered Choh Lin. “ I am neither old enough nor 
 wise enough. Where you have not succeeded I 
 must fail.” 
 
296 
 
 CHOU LIN. 
 
 When he appeared in the mission-house, Clioh 
 Lin was told that the missionaries wanted him to 
 go to take charge of the two stations for a while 
 until permanent arrangements could be made. 
 
 “Do you think me able to take charge of such 
 important places?” he asked. “It will be more 
 difficult to do it in and near my old home than 
 among strangers.” 
 
 “Are you not willing to go?” inquired one of 
 the missionaries. 
 
 “ It is not for the servant to say where he will 
 or will not go,” replied Choh Lin. “ Where the 
 Lord has work for me I am ready to go : I only 
 fear that it will need a far better and wiser man 
 than I am to do the work. If you think me fitted, 
 I am willing to go and remain there, and will do 
 my very best, poor as that is, in the work.” 
 
 “ Whether or not you remain will depend on how 
 well you succeed,” said a missionary. “ You are 
 able to do what we expect of you if you go in the 
 strength of the Lord. It is an important field ; it 
 is the key to the large country beyond. We are 
 sorry to take you away again from your family, but 
 until we know what is best to be done it will not 
 be wise to move your family to Ang Tung Thau. 
 While you are there you will be able to come to 
 Amoy often to consult with us regarding your 
 studies, so that you will not be altogether the loser, 
 and in the end you may gain the more.” 
 
 As Choh Lin’s family was increasing, he became 
 
SETTLED AT ANG TUNG THAU. 297 
 
 more and more anxious to have a permanent home 
 where he might be with his children and do more 
 to train them in the Christian life. 
 
 The missionaries had told the preachers that as 
 the churches became able more pastors would be 
 needed ; these would be chosen from the men best 
 fitted by thorough study as well as by God’s Spirit 
 for the work. The hope of becoming a pastor was 
 a great inducement to them to study faithfully. As 
 pastors they would not only be settled permanently 
 and receive a larger salary, but their positions would 
 be more honorable. The English Presbyterian and 
 the American missionaries had, with the two native 
 pastors and the Christian churches, formed what the 
 Chinese called the “ Tai Hoey,” or “ great assem- 
 bly ” of churches and ministers; this is like a pres- 
 bytery. To be able to take a part in the work of 
 the Tai Hoey was the ambition of all the preachers. 
 
 After a time the missionaries determined to have 
 a yearly examination of all who had any wish to 
 become pastors, as well as of the students in the 
 two seminaries; for the two missions were now 
 uniting in much of their work. The examination 
 created not a little excitement among the preachers. 
 They saw that their study must not only be real, 
 but such as would bear a close examination by the 
 missionaries. To be stationed so near Amoy that 
 they might come often to the city for help in their 
 studies was the wish of every one of the younger 
 men ; and when Choli Lin was told to take a charge 
 
298 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 so near the city he was delighted, even though the 
 charge was not permanent. He could easily bring 
 his family down to Amoy, and be with them each 
 week, and thus there would be at once almost as 
 much of a gain as loss. The more he thought of 
 the change, the more pleased he was. But, then, 
 how could he succeed where others who were older 
 had failed ? What should he do about Tang Wan ? 
 He knew more about that city and the enemies of 
 the gospel there than others did. He had not only 
 heard that the mandarins and the more wealthy and 
 educated people had said that the foreign religion 
 should not be preached in that city, but he knew 
 that they meant what they said and would leave 
 nothing undone to prevent it. 
 
 Choh Lin went to Ang Tung Than with a deter- 
 mination to do his best, and if possible prove him- 
 self fitted for the field, so that he might stay. For 
 some weeks he remained, doing the work so well 
 that nothing was said in the mission about a change. 
 There was, however, less need now of a man to 
 manage the affairs for Tang Wan. The mission- 
 aries hired a house in the city for a chapel about 
 the time or soon after Choh Lin went to his new 
 field ; so that he was relieved from a large share of 
 the work and care that lie dreaded. 
 
 The story of the renting of this building need 
 not be told : it was the old story of honest, persist- 
 ent and quiet determination of men who believed 
 themselves doing God’s work against hate, cunning 
 
SETTLED AT ANG TUNG THAU. 299 
 
 and deceit. The missionaries won not merely be- 
 cause they were honest, but because they were really 
 wiser. Theirs was the wisdom that God gives, and 
 in his strength they trusted. The enemies of the 
 foreign religion were furious when they found all 
 their efforts to keep the foreigners out of the city 
 vain. The house was rented and the lease was not 
 only signed, but had the sanction of the mandarins: 
 to oppose further would be to bring themselves into 
 the hands of the officials. While the mandarins 
 had no more love for the foreign religion than had 
 its most bitter enemies, yet they would have an ex- 
 cuse to demand no small sum of money from any 
 who might attack the chapel of the foreigners. 
 Since the love of money in China is stronger than 
 conscience or enmity to another religion, the haters of 
 foreigners and the gospel contented themselves with 
 attacking Christians rather than their house of wor- 
 ship. As this story is of Choh Lin rather than of 
 the chapel at Tang Wan and the Christians there, 
 the story of their persecutions is left untold. 
 
 A preacher was soon placed in that city, and 
 Choh Lin’s work was confined to the two stations 
 and the country around them. He was now told 
 that he might remove his family to the house at 
 Ang Tung Thau, and for the present at least live 
 there as the pastor of the two places. 
 
 Settled near his old home, with his family around 
 him and preaching the gospel to his old friends and 
 people, Choh Lin was a happy man. He was loved 
 
300 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 by his friends, the people under his care loved and 
 trusted him, and he was also a favorite with the 
 missionaries. 
 
 Though the two stations had been prosperous 
 before, the coming; of Choh Lin to Ang; Tung; Thau 
 was the beginning of a new time of prosperity. 
 The attendance at the larger chapel steadily in- 
 creased; so did the number of inquirers, and one 
 by one these were admitted to the communion. 
 Some came on foot fourteen miles nearly every Sab- 
 bath to hear the gospel. The service was now held 
 on the Lord’s Day at Ang Tung Thau, because the 
 Tay Soa chapel was too small to hold those who 
 came even after the Tang Wan house of worship 
 was opened. 
 
 The writer, who had reached Amoy a few months 
 before Choh Lin was settled at Ang Tung Thau, 
 spent a Sabbath at that place not long after the 
 young man was placed in charge, and describes 
 what he saw : 
 
 On Saturday evening the people gathered front 
 the village and some distance beyond for evening 
 worship. Perhaps the visit of the young mission- 
 ary attracted some, and the communion of the mor- 
 row drew more than the usual number. At the 
 hour for service the leader rose and read the hymn. 
 At once, as he sat down, a burst of song almost 
 startled the visitor. All seemed to sing, and, while 
 some made their tunes as they went along, most of 
 them sang the tune of the leader, and sang it well. 
 
SETTLED AT ANG TUNG THAU. 301 
 
 One or two verses would not suffice : tlie whole 
 hymn was sung, and then another followed, and 
 still another. The people sang as though they en- 
 joyed it and wanted to keep on. After the hymns 
 came the reading of Scripture with pointed and 
 practical comments, then followed a prayer, and 
 then another song. After the service came an im- 
 portant part of the meeting — the hand-shaking. 
 While this is a custom well worth keeping up in 
 American churches, more than one missionary has 
 wished that it had not been introduced into the 
 churches in China. Don’t wonder, reader : Chinese 
 hands are not always clean. But this could not be 
 said of Choh Lin’s flock. They were the most clean- 
 ly Chinese the writer has ever met. This fact was 
 more evident by daylight the next morning. Each 
 man, woman and child was dressed neatly and in 
 clean clothing, and there w r as even evidence that 
 some, if not all, had taken a bath. 
 
 “ How do you manage, Choh Lin,” was asked, 
 “to make the people come to church so clean and 
 so neatly dressed?” 
 
 “ We keep the church clean,” was his reply, “and 
 tell the people that they must neither bring dirt 
 into nor be dirty within the house of God. I tell 
 them that nothing that defileth, not even dirt, can 
 enter heaven, and that if they wish to live there 
 they must begin to live cleanly here. People whose 
 hearts God has cleansed should show it not only by 
 clean lives, but by clean bodies.” 
 
302 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 “How did you induce them to change?” 
 
 “ I told Christians to set the example ; and when 
 one or two came with dirty clothes I asked if they 
 had forgotten that God was expected with us, and 
 if it would not be better to go home and put on 
 their cleanest clothes, and then come back to meet 
 God.” 
 
 “ How did they like that ?” 
 
 “ They went home and put on their clean cloth- 
 ing, and came back not at all offended. It makes a 
 great difference whether we want people to do things 
 for our own or for the Lord’s sake. I had but little 
 trouble to persuade them to come clean and neat to 
 meet the Lord.” 
 
 Before the hour of service on Sabbath morning 
 the chapel was well filled. The time of waiting 
 was spent in singing. One started a hymn, and at 
 once all joined in. The regular service and the 
 sermon were much like such services in our own 
 churches. 
 
 The communion of the afternoon was the import- 
 ant service of the day : before that an inquiry-meet- 
 ing was held, with probably as many as twenty in- 
 quirers. Among these was an old woman of more 
 than eighty years. Her form was bent, her face 
 wrinkled, her eyes dim, her ears dull. She seemed 
 anxious to know the truth, but unable to understand 
 it. She was attentive to every word spoken to 
 others, but when questions were put to her she an- 
 swered, “ I am too old to understand. Go to my 
 
SETTLED AT ANG TUNG THA U. 303 
 
 daughter ” (also among the inquirers) ; “ she is not 
 too old. Tell it all to her; she may become a fol- 
 lower of the true God. It is too late for me ; I am 
 too old.” Questions were vain : they brought the 
 same answer : “ I am too old. Teach the younger 
 ones; it is not too late for them.” Her daughter 
 and two others were admitted to the communion, 
 but the old mother was left mourning that the gos- 
 pel came too late for her. 
 
 As Choh Lin was not an ordained preacher, the 
 ordinances were administered by the two mission- 
 aries present. 
 
 It had been several months since the last celebra- 
 tion of the Lord’s Supper at Ang Tung Thau, and 
 the Christians might well say, “ With great desire 
 have we longed to eat this supper,” and still more 
 might those who for the first time commemorated 
 the dying love of the Lord tell of their wish to take 
 the bread and wine in remembrance of Christ. 
 
 As they gathered in the body of the chapel, fill- 
 ing many seats, they presented a sight not soon to 
 be forgotten. Their serious, earnest faces turned to 
 the speaker were a study. Only a few years ago 
 every one of that gathering, the two missionaries 
 excepted, was a heathen. Every lip had prayed to 
 false gods, every knee had bowed to idols, every 
 one had worshiped the spirits of the dead : now 
 all were followers of Christ. 
 
 The moments flew swiftly as the missionary told 
 the old, old, yet new, new story of a Saviour’s love; 
 
304 
 
 CIIOH LIN. 
 
 and when all arose to join in the song of consecra- 
 tion the disciples felt that the song was far too short. 
 They wished to consecrate themselves over and over 
 again to such a Saviour as was their Lord. When 
 the bread and wine were in silence distributed each 
 seemed to be in communion with the Lord. To 
 describe that communion or to tell the feelings of 
 the Christians would be an impossibility. There 
 are joys that are unspeakable, and there is a peace 
 that passes understanding. The child of God 
 knows them. That joy and peace were felt at that 
 communion at Ang Tung Thau. 
 
 When the services closed a large number of 
 Christians stayed for a talk with the preacher and 
 missionaries. 
 
 “ Since the Loi’d has done so much for us, what 
 ought we to do for him?” was asked. 
 
 “ We should, besides giving ourselves to him, 
 do all we can to tell others about him,” was an- 
 swered. 
 
 “ Yes,” added Choh Lin, “ and that is what we 
 must try to do here. We must not only tell others 
 of salvation, but give our money to send the gospel 
 to those who are far away.” 
 
 “ We have not forgotten what you told us the 
 other Sabbath, teacher,” said one of the people. 
 “ We want to be like our heavenly Father and Sa- 
 viour — give and sacrifice for the good of those who 
 are far away — but we do not feel sure how much 
 we ought to give. You said that we should do as 
 
SETTLED AT ANG TUNG THAU. 
 
 305 
 
 the Jews — give one-tenth. Did you mean that we 
 must give one-tenth before or after we buy our rice 
 to eat ?” 
 
 “ Let us ask Tim Lo,” was Choh Lin’s answer 
 as he turned to a cripple standing near. — “ What 
 do you think of it, Brother Tim ?” 
 
 “ I think that we should be honest with the 
 Lord,” answered Tim. “ If we give him or his 
 work one-tenth, we should do it before taking our 
 own share. It would not be one-tenth if we first paid 
 for our rice from it. Some people might want a 
 great deal of rice ; what would become of the Lord’s 
 work then ?” 
 
 “How do you give, Brother Tim?” asked Choh 
 
 Lin. 
 
 “Why, if I earn forty cash a day (but I don’t 
 often do it), I take out four first for the Lord, and 
 say that is his; the thirty -six are mine; with those 
 I buy my rice.” 
 
 From the first the missionaries taught the Chris- 
 tians that it was not only their duty to give for the 
 spread of the gospel, but to support their own pas- 
 tors. So decided were they in this that until lately 
 no pastor was ordained and settled over a church 
 until the people promised to give him a better salary 
 than preachers supported by the missions received. 
 
 Choh Lin was anxious to see Tay Soa and Ang 
 Tung Thau not only prosperous, but united in one 
 and become an organized church, able to call and 
 support their own pastor. 
 
 20 
 
^06 
 
 CHOH LTN. 
 
 Steady progress was made in the two stations : 
 the members increased in number, and so did the 
 contributions. Before Choh Lin had been two 
 years in charge the two stations applied to the 
 Tai Hoey for an organization into a church. The 
 request was granted, and from the two the church 
 of “ Hong San ” was formed. But as the people 
 were not able to pay enough to support a pastor, 
 Choh Lin remained the acting pastor. He had, 
 however, in the mean while passed the examinations 
 at Amoy successfully and become a licensed preach- 
 er, ready to become a pastor as soon as a church was 
 able to call him. Here he might be left, but his 
 story would not be complete if some of his trials 
 as an acting pastor were not told. These are held 
 for another chapter. 
 
CHAPTER XXIX. 
 
 TRIALS OF A PASTOR. 
 
 B ELOVED by the people under his care, Choh 
 Lin was not without enemies. These were 
 bitter against him, not so much for his own sake as 
 for that of the foreigners and their religion. In 
 China the gospel is hated, not so much because of 
 itself as because it is the religion of foreigners. 
 Such people in and around Ang Tung Thau tried 
 to arouse others against the chapel, its worship and 
 its worshipers. At first they had tried to prevent 
 the building of the chapel; failing in that, they 
 tried to give trouble to the Christians. These ene- 
 mies of the truth were wealthy and educated, and 
 it is quite probable that they were secretly aided by 
 the lower officials. 
 
 As in Ang Tung Thau there were three large 
 idol temples, to have a foreigners’ house of worship 
 in their village was felt to be a terrible insult to the 
 gods of the Middle Kingdom. After submitting 
 for some time to the disgrace, as well as risking the 
 anger of the gods, the devout idolaters determined 
 to make a strong effort to drive Christianity from 
 the village. Priests were summoned from other 
 
 307 
 
308 
 
 CHOH LIN 
 
 places, in the hope that they could bring some 
 power to drive out the gospel or induce the gods to 
 destroy the chapel and frighten Christians back to 
 idolatry. Among other efforts for this end, they 
 built a large fire in front of one of the temples, and 
 the priests, after chanting and going through a va- 
 riety of ceremonies, leaped through this fire, hoping 
 by their earnestness to attract the attention of the 
 gods. At length the ceremonies were ended, and 
 many felt sure that the chapel and Christianity 
 were doomed in that place at least. Day by day 
 the idolaters waited to see an earthquake destroy 
 the chapel or lightning burn it down, or some other 
 destruction come upon it, but they waited in vain. 
 Sabbath after Sabbath the worshipers gathered; 
 they sang, they prayed, they listened to the truth 
 from Choh Lin’s lips, and, like their house of 
 worship, remained unharmed. 
 
 For a while the idolaters waited hopefully, now 
 and again telling the Christians that the gods would 
 before long prove their power. Growing weary of 
 vain waiting, the idolaters began another course. 
 One dav the Ang Tung Thau people were surprised 
 to find posted on the buildings printed placards 
 threatening the enemies of the gods with terrible 
 calamities if they continued to follow the teacher 
 of another religion than that of China. Christians 
 were terrified, and not a few who had become in- 
 terested in the gospel were frightened away from 
 the chapel-services. Choh Lin and his people knew 
 
TRIALS OF A PASTOR. 
 
 309 
 
 very well that those were not meant as idle threats. 
 It was no uncommon thing for a mob to attack and 
 destroy a Christian house of worship, and drive the 
 worshipers from the place or kill them in it. True, 
 such occurrences had been less frequent of late, since, 
 by treaty with foreign nations, the Chinese had been 
 compelled to pay for all damage done by such mobs; 
 yet there were many people willing to run all the 
 risk in order to gratify their hatred to foreigners 
 and their religion. 
 
 Many and earnest were the prayers offered by the 
 anxious Christians, great were their fears, yet they 
 stood firm in their faith. It was a time of trial to 
 Choh Lin. He did not know when each morning: 
 came but that that day would witness the destruction 
 of the chapel and the scattering of his people. Per- 
 haps night would find their bodies and his lying 
 dead in the streets. Perhaps his wife and children 
 would be torn from him and carried into slavery, 
 and he, left houseless, homeless, bereft of family 
 and friends, forced to hide as a fugitive and an 
 outcast. When weeks passed and the threats 
 had not been carried out, the preacher and his peo- 
 ple hoped no harm would come to them. Suddenly 
 they were startled by a new and an unexpected 
 danger. 
 
 The missionaries having called the attention of 
 the mandarins to the threatening posters, the people 
 had been warned not to molest the chapel. Not 
 daring to disobey, they sought some other way of 
 
310 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 attacking the Christians and frightening others from 
 
 o o o 
 
 joining them. 
 
 Among the inquirers was a man from a village 
 some distance from Ang Tung Thau. Between 
 that village and a neighboring one there had some 
 time before been trouble, and considerable property 
 had been stolen. That difficulty had never been 
 settled. This man, known here as Lon, was now 
 accused as one of those who had stolen the property. 
 He was arrested and taken to Amoy for trial. He 
 refused to confess himself guilty ; no proof being 
 found, there was only one course for the magistrates 
 — to set him free. He had, however, in the trial 
 confessed himself a Christian: this made his accu- 
 sers the more determined to punish him and the 
 mandarins to listen to other charges. One was 
 speedily brought : he was accused of taking part in 
 a local rebellion fourteen or fifteen years before, and 
 tried for this offence. But as there had been many 
 engaged in the same rebellion, and as it had not 
 amounted to anything, the mandarins dared not 
 convict this man only and so long after the time ; 
 therefore he was acquitted at the second trial. De- 
 termined not to be defeated in their plans, the en- 
 emies of the gospel told the officers that a murder 
 had been committed in this man’s village and the 
 murderers never brought to trial. Lon was the 
 third time put on trial, now as a murderer to be 
 tried for his life. Had he been convicted on either 
 of the other charges, he would probably have been 
 
TRIALS OF A PASTOR. 
 
 311 
 
 executed. If proved guilty of this crime, he must 
 die. 
 
 As soon as Choh Lin learned of Lon’s arrest he 
 hurried to Amoy to do what he could to aid this one 
 of his flock. It became evident that not justice, but 
 Lon’s death, was the object of the accusers ; and this 
 not so much from hatred to the man as to the for- 
 eigners and their religion. Further, Choh Lin 
 learned that they hoped by killing this man to 
 frighten others who were interested in the gospel, 
 and perhaps drive the gospel entirely from Ang 
 Tung Thau. The young preacher told the mission- 
 aries his fears, and the advice and aid of the Amer- 
 ican consul, Gen. Legendre, were sought. He at 
 once requested the mandarins to give Lon a fair 
 trial. Angry at the consul, at the missionaries and 
 at everything foreign, the mandarins, instead of 
 granting a trial or summoning witnesses, ordered 
 the accused to be compelled to make a confession. 
 
 Lon’s hands were held together, a close-fitting 
 ring forced over a finger of each, a stick placed be- 
 tween his hands, and by that he was suspended. 
 For six hours he was left to hang in agony, his 
 whole weight supported by the two fingers. In the 
 mean while he was beaten several times and told to 
 confess the part he had in the murder. Again and 
 again he declared his innocence : at last he was 
 taken down. 
 
 Word of this cruelty reaching the ears of Gen. 
 Legendre, he tried to prevent it, but to no purpose. 
 
312 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 The next day poor Lon was put to the same torture 
 and beaten more severely than before to make him 
 confess guilt. Weak and faint, he still insisted that 
 he had nothing to do with the murder. After being 
 hung as before for several hours, he was again taken 
 down and locked up alone in the prison. The third 
 day he was subjected to the same torture. Hopeless 
 and almost dead from pain and suffering, he groaned 
 out that he was present when the murder was com- 
 mitted, though he did not say that he had anything 
 to do with it. This, however, was enough. He 
 was taken down and again shut up in the prison. 
 
 Meanwhile, Gen. Legendre had forced the man- 
 darins to consent to a fair trial, and it had been 
 agreed that Lon should be tried on the day follow- 
 ing the one on which the poor man had made the 
 confession. Early that morning, several hours be- 
 fore the time set for the trial, the accused was hur- 
 ried from the prison to the execution-ground aud 
 beheaded. When the time for trial came the man 
 was dead and the enemies of foreigners aud their 
 religion had conquered. 
 
 It was sad news to the Christians of Ang Tung 
 Thau that their leader brought. All felt sure that 
 Lon had been killed because he was a Christian, and 
 they asked each other who would be the next vic- 
 tim. Lon’s death, however, probably saved them. 
 The American consul would not allow such a case 
 of cruelty and the murder of a Christian to go 
 by without protesting to the Chinese government. 
 
TRIALS OF A PASTOR. 
 
 313 
 
 Probably that had the effect to make the mandarins 
 careful how they beheaded any more Christians. 
 They, in turn, no doubt warned the people, for after 
 Lon’s death the enemies of Christianity were much 
 more quiet. 
 
 For a while those who had attended the chapel- 
 service, yet had given no proof of being Christians, 
 remained away ; but one after another came back, 
 and the number was even larger than before. 
 Everything seemed to show that the Christians 
 were likely to have little more persecution. 
 
 One day a startling story was told in the streets. 
 White ants, it was said, had quietly eaten the wood- 
 work of all the temples, and each was ready to 
 crumble. This is not an uncommon thing in China. 
 These little insects find their way into the timber 
 and destroy all but the outside. This is done so 
 quietly and quickly that often the first sign of their 
 presence is the sudden falling in of roof and floors 
 of a house, leaving only the walls standing. People 
 crowded to the temples to look at the ruin the ants 
 had wrought. Ants were in two of the buildings, 
 but the story was proven to be worse than the real- 
 ity. By taking out the eaten timbers the temples 
 could yet be saved. Priests came to take charge of 
 the repairs, but on their examining the idols they 
 made a more alarming discovery. Several of the 
 idols carved from wood had been eaten by the ants. 
 This was indeed a calamity to the idolaters. The 
 priests at once told them that the spirits of the gods 
 
314 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 had left the idols and deserted the village. The 
 reason was plain : the gods would not stay where a 
 chapel of a foreign god was allowed. 
 
 The words of the priests excited the crowd, and 
 a fanatical idolater by a speech aroused the people 
 to such a degree that they were ready for anything. 
 The end might have been the destruction of the 
 chapel had it not been for a shrewd old man in the 
 gathering. Pie was not a Christian, nor did he even 
 attend the chapel-service, so none suspected him of 
 being a friend of the gospel. “ What kind of gods 
 have we in our village,” asked he, “ if they are 
 driven awav by a single foreign chapel and noth- 
 ing but the foreigners’ religion?” 
 
 “ What do you mean ?” inquired a priest. 
 
 “ Gods who cannot protect themselves can give 
 our village but little protection,” was the reply. 
 
 “ They are able to protect both themselves and 
 us,” said the priest sharply. “ They left because 
 unwilling to stay where the people do not want 
 them.” 
 
 “ We do want them to stay,” spoke the man 
 quietly, “ but we would like to see them able to 
 take care of us.” 
 
 “ They will stay if that chapel is taken away,” 
 shouted the fanatic, “ but otherwise not.” 
 
 “ If the chapel of the foreigners troubles the 
 gods, why cannot they remove it, instead of asking 
 us to do it?” asked the old man. “ They can do it 
 very easily, but we will get into trouble if we at- 
 
TRIALS OF A PASTOR. 
 
 315 
 
 tempt it. They certainly are stronger than we, and 
 stronger no doubt than the foreign God. Let them 
 show him what they can do.” 
 
 It was useless for the friends of the gods to reply 
 to this man. His questions troubled the priests and 
 quieted the people. Especially did the people grow 
 quiet when the man asked who would pay for the 
 chapel if torn down. 
 
 The storm that rose so suddenly soon passed 
 away, and the chapel remained. The devout idol- 
 aters insisted that some judgment would fall upon 
 Ang Tung Thau for allowing the foreign God to 
 be worshiped there. As no special calamity came, 
 the temples, beyond the most necessary repairs, re- 
 mained as they were, and for a time the gods were 
 allowed to remain away from the village. 
 
 But, as this story is growing too long, the rest of 
 Choh Lin’s trials are untold, and with two incidents 
 that are more pleasing the story will close. 
 
 Among the new-comers Choh Lin noticed one day 
 an old man, who hurried away after service. This 
 continued for some time. At first Choh Lin did not 
 try to speak to him, lest he should be frightened 
 away, but as he came week after week the preacher 
 inquired more about him. One week he visited 
 the old man’s home, some miles away. He asked 
 one or two of the neighbors regarding him. They 
 said that of late he had given up the worship of 
 idols and spirits, and, instead, prayed to an unknown 
 and unseen god. Whenever he prayed, which was 
 
316 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 very often, they said he first sounded a gong, and 
 then kneeling down with upturned face and closed 
 eyes prayed at nothing. 
 
 Calling on the old man, Choli Lin learned that 
 he had given up idolatry for the worship of the 
 true God, of whom he had heard and whom he had 
 learned to love in the Ang Tung Thau chapel. 
 
 “ Do you sound a gong before you pray ?” asked 
 the preacher. 
 
 “ Certainly,” was the reply ; “ I always do.” 
 
 “ Why do you do that ?” 
 
 “‘Why’?” repeated the old man in surprise. 
 “ Don’t you always begin worship in the chapel by 
 sounding the gong?” 
 
 Choli Liu understood it now. The gong — one 
 having a much more agreeable sound than the gongs 
 we hear in America — is usually sounded in front of 
 Christian chapels in China, as bells are rung with 
 us before service to call people to church. The old 
 man thought that sounding the gong was part of 
 the worship of the true God. 
 
 “ God does not need a gong to call him to listen 
 to our prayers,” said Choli Lin, “as the idolaters 
 say their gods need to be called. The true God 
 knows all that is going on in the world around and 
 in our hearts.” 
 
 “Yes, you told us that some weeks ago in the 
 chapel,” spoke the old man. “ But I heard the 
 gong sounded before the service, so thought that 
 it had something to do with pleasing God. I want 
 
TRIALS OF A PASTOR. 
 
 317 
 
 to please him. I did not know exactly how to 
 worship him, and did as others do who know better 
 than I.” 
 
 Choh Lin learned that this old man had been, 
 through his preaching, led to give up idols and 
 become a worshiper of the true God, and before 
 long he had the pleasure of seeing him a follower 
 of the Saviour and a member of the Church. 
 
 Thus not only in but out of the chapel and out- 
 side of the village did the young preacher teach 
 men of the Saviour. 
 
 In a village some distance from Ang Tung Thau, 
 as well as from Tay Soa, lived an old uncle of Choh 
 Lin. As a boy the latter had been a great favorite 
 of this uncle. His mother had taken him, a short 
 time before Mr. Lee died, to see this uncle, who was 
 then very sick. This visit pleased the old man 
 very much, and he remembered the boy and his 
 mother as his best friends. He always held a deep 
 interest in Choh Lin as he grew to be a man, and 
 was ready to do any favor he could for his nephew. 
 When news came to him that Choh Lin had become 
 a Christian, the old man was greatly troubled. He 
 went to see his nephew and Mrs. Lee, and begged 
 them not to give up the religion of their fathers for 
 that of strangers. Although his advice was un- 
 heeded, the old man remained a firm friend of his 
 nephew. When Choh Lin became a preacher at 
 Ang Tung Thau, he visited his uncle, and the two 
 had a long talk about the gospel. 
 
318 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 The old man was well educated and loved to talk 
 and read. “ What a pity, Choh Lin,” said he, “that 
 you will remain a Christian and preach that foreign 
 doctrine ! You have a good education and fine 
 abilities : if you would study the Chinese classics 
 and take the regular course of students, you would 
 graduate with great honors and become a noted 
 scholar and perhaps a high officer. But, alas ! you 
 follow the doctrine of those foreigners, and now 
 there is no hope. You throw everything away for 
 that. Yet what good will it ever do you or your 
 friends ?” 
 
 Choh Lin said that his life was much happier 
 now than when he served false gods, and tried to 
 reason with his uncle on the folly of idolatry; but 
 the talk seemed to have little effect on the old man, 
 who was unwilling to be convinced by a youth who 
 had only studied at the school of foreigners. 
 
 Choh Lin visited his uncle as often as he could, 
 and each time found him more ready to talk about 
 Christianity. From opposing it he contented him- 
 self with speaking well of the religion and the 
 books of China. “Those books,” said he, “are far 
 better than the books written in other countries. 
 If you must teach a foreign religion, why not teach 
 our own as well, and specially teach the more 
 worthy truths in our books? The foreign God 
 no doubt is good, but ours are better. Why not, 
 then, take the best, instead of teaching the people 
 to serve an inferior god? You are only helping 
 
TRIALS OF A PASTOR. 
 
 319 
 
 the foreigners to take possession of our country 
 some clay.” 
 
 When Choli Lin read some passages from the 
 Bible, and, comparing them with the writings of 
 Confucius, asked, “Which of these will be likely 
 to do our countrymen the most good — the teachings 
 of the foreign book or those of the Middle King- 
 dom?” the old man was silent. 
 
 At another time he admitted that the Bible was 
 a very good book, and was willing to take and read 
 it. The next time Choh Lin came the old man 
 said, “ That sacred book of the foreigners is very 
 good. It will do no harm, but very much good. 
 It is an excellent book for some people, but for me, 
 who have lived a virtuous life, the Chinese books 
 are better.” He, however, did not wish his nephew 
 to take the Bible away, and said that he had not 
 read all in it that he wished to know. 
 
 At Choh Lin’s next visit the uncle did not com- 
 pare it with the books of China, but said a great 
 deal about the Bible. “ It is the book for my fam- 
 ily,” said he; “ I want my children to read it. The 
 doctrines it teaches are just what they need. If they 
 will read and obey its doctrines, I will not object 
 even though they become Christians. That book will 
 make them better men and women, and better citi- 
 zens of the Middle Kingdom.” He, however, did 
 not understand all, and had many questions to ask. 
 
 At Choh Lin’s next visit the old man said, “ That 
 holy book is the book for me : it has the food for 
 
320 
 
 CHOH LIN. 
 
 my soul. Other books do well for the body and 
 mind, but this has truths that go to the heart. Old 
 as I am, I mean to serve the one true God aud give 
 myself to Jesus as my Saviour.” 
 
 There was now perfect sympathy between Choh 
 Lin and the old man as the younger told the other 
 more plainly the way of salvation. 
 
 The next time Choh Lin called his uncle was sick, 
 too sick to talk much, and a few days later word 
 came to Ang Tung Thau that he was dead. 
 
 “Oh,” said Choh Lin to the author a short time 
 after the uncle’s death, “ if I had only been more 
 faithful in prayer as well as teaching, I would have 
 more assurance that my kind and loving uncle is 
 saved, but now I am not sure ; I only hope.” 
 
 Several if not all of that uncle’s family became 
 Christians after his death, and at least one of the 
 sons became a preacher of the gospel. 
 
 Here, as he was in 1870, we leave Choh Lin, 
 though he is yet living and a preacher. This true 
 story of his life is not unlike those of many other 
 as faithful men as he was, who are giving their all 
 to the work of bringing their countrymen to Christ. 
 These men need help in their work. Will you, 
 reader, give it? They need more foreign teachers, 
 more money, more prayer. You can give the last; 
 you perhaps cau give some of the second, and, it 
 may be, can give the first. Will you give as you 
 are able? 
 

 
 
 

 .